JP2015024249A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing the increase of a control load due to a monitor processing or the like of a detection signal of a game medium while contributing to the reliability improvement of the game machine.SOLUTION: A game board 80 of a pachinko machine is equipped with a variable winning device 1082, and a game ball having flown into the variable winning device 1082 is guided to the back of the game board 80 via a guide passage, an upstream passage and a downstream passage. At a midway position of the downstream passage, there is disposed a detection sensor 1350, which outputs a signal of a game ball detection to a main control unit when detecting the game ball. The signal reading processing of the main control unit is so constituted as to be switched into a monitoring state for monitoring an abnormality in the detection signal and a non-monitoring state not for monitoring that abnormality.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes detection means (for example, a proximity sensor) that detects a game medium at a game medium detection position in a guide passage that guides the game medium, and a control device that is input from the detection means. There is something. Based on the detection information input from the detection means by the control device, it is determined whether or not the game medium has passed through the game medium detection position. For example, in a pachinko machine, a game ball that has entered a winning opening is detected by the detection means, and if it is determined that a game ball win has occurred based on the detection information, a game ball is given to the player. Is given out (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-236080 A

  If an abnormality occurs in the detection signal from the detection means (for example, when noise or the like is mixed), there is a concern that an erroneous determination may occur due to such an abnormality in the detection signal. This is not preferable because it may cause a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine. In particular, as described above, the occurrence of profits is often involved in the determination of the passage of game media, and the occurrence of such an erroneous determination is not preferable because it may cause a disadvantage for the player or the game hall.

  Here, it is possible to improve the reliability of the detection signal and thus the gaming machine by adopting a monitoring means for monitoring the detection signal. However, even if the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine is improved by adopting the monitoring means or the like in this way, it is not preferable that the control load due to the monitoring process of the detection signal of the gaming medium is increased.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and contributes to improving the reliability of a gaming machine, while suppressing an increase in control load caused by a monitoring process of a detection signal of a gaming medium. The object is to provide a game machine that can be used.

The present invention
A guide passage for guiding game media;
Game medium detection means for detecting a game medium passing through a game medium detection position in the guide passage and outputting a predetermined detection signal;
Passage determination means for determining whether or not a game medium has passed through the game medium detection position based on the detection signal;
Means for executing a predetermined process based on the determination result when the passage determination means determines that the game medium has passed through the gaming medium detection position;
It is possible to switch to a first state in which it is difficult or impossible to move the game medium to the game medium detection position, and a second state in which it is easier to move the game medium to the game medium detection position than the first state. A variable means,
Control means for continuing the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied after the variable means is switched from the first state to the second state, and switching to the first state when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
An abnormality monitoring means capable of switching to a monitoring state for monitoring an abnormality relating to the detection signal and a non-monitoring state not monitoring the abnormality;
Switching means for switching the abnormality monitoring means from the non-monitoring state to the monitoring state after the variable means is switched to the second state;
The control means satisfies the predetermined condition when the determination result based on determination by the passage determination means that the game medium has passed the game medium detection position reaches a predetermined number, and the variable Switching means from the second state to the first state;
The switching means is a specific condition in which the determination result based on determining that the passage determination means has passed the game medium detection position after the variable means is switched to the second state is halfway reaching the predetermined number. Or when the predetermined number is reached, the abnormality monitoring unit is switched from the non-monitoring state to the monitoring state.

  While contributing to improving the reliability of the gaming machine, it is possible to suppress an increase in the control load due to the monitoring processing of the detection signal of the gaming medium.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a front door frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a back pack unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a back pack unit. FIG. 6 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 5. It is a B arrow line view of FIG. (A) It is a perspective view of a detection sensor, (b) It is a disassembled perspective view of a detection sensor. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a signal reading process. It is a flowchart which shows a signal determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a timing chart which shows the mode of winning determination. It is a timing chart which shows the mode of winning determination. It is a timing chart which shows the mode of winning determination. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is the CC sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is D arrow line view of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a signal reading process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st signal reading process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd signal reading process. It is a flowchart which shows a signal determination preparation process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows an error determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the situation of winning determination and error determination. It is a timing chart which shows the situation of winning determination and error determination. It is a timing chart which shows the situation of winning determination and error determination. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the game board in 3rd Embodiment. It is the EE sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is a F arrow line view of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a signal reading process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows an error determination preparation process, (b) It is a flowchart which shows an error determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the mode of winning determination. It is a timing chart which shows the mode of winning determination. It is a timing chart which shows the mode of winning determination. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the game board in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 53 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 52. It is a H arrow line view of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the detection aspect in a detection sensor. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a signal reading process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a timing chart which shows the mode of winning determination. It is a timing chart which shows the mode of winning determination. It is a timing chart which shows the mode of winning determination. It is a timing chart which shows the mode of winning determination. It is the schematic which shows the modification of a period adjustment means and a guide passage. It is the schematic which shows the modification of a period adjustment means and a guide passage. It is the schematic which shows the modification of a period adjustment means and a guide passage. It is the schematic which shows the modification of a detection means.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

  The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island facility of the game arcade.

  The gaming machine main part 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper support bracket 17 is fixed to a connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and the lower frame portion and the left frame in the outer frame 11 are further fixed. A lower support metal fitting 18 is provided at a connecting portion with the portion. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism. The support mechanism causes the gaming machine main unit 12 to turn the left side of the pachinko machine 10 in the front view with respect to the outer frame 11. In addition, the right side can be turned forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the turning tip side.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main part 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack arranged behind the inner frame 13. Unit 15. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. In the following description, FIGS. 1 and 2 are referred to, and FIG. 3 is referred to for the configuration of the back surface of the front door frame 14. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front door frame 14.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. Yes. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that a substantially entire game area PE described later can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 is formed by the glass unit 22. The front door frame 14 is closed from the back side.

  The glass unit 22 includes glass panels 23 and 24 having transparency, and a glass holder 25 that holds the glass panels 23 and 24. The glass holder 25 is formed with a partition part for partitioning the holding region of the glass panels 23 and 24 in the front and rear, and the glass panels 23 and 24 are opposed to each other in the front and back with the partition part interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the glass panels 23 and 24, avoiding the interference between the glass panels 23 and 24, the game area PE is placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23 and 24. It is in a state of covering twice from.

  The glass panels 23 and 24 are not necessarily unitized using the glass holder 25, and the glass panels 23 and 24 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and security, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to make the glass panels face each other across a predetermined gap. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a synthetic resin panel member having transparency instead of the glass panel.

  Around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21), light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. For example, an annular illumination part 26 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window part 21. In the annular illumination part 26, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or at a predetermined reach. In addition, an error display lamp unit 27 that is turned on at the time of a predetermined error is provided in the center of the annular illumination unit 26 and at the uppermost part of the pachinko machine 10, and a prize that is turned on while the prize ball is being paid out on the left and right sides. A sphere lamp portion 28 is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28 to output sound effects corresponding to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper pan 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower pan 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described later while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 33.

  A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, a game ball is launched from a game ball launch mechanism described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a passage forming unit 50 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 50 is formed of a synthetic resin, and includes a front door side upper dish passage 51 that communicates with the upper dish 33 and a front door side lower dish passage 52 that communicates with the lower dish 34. In the passage forming unit 50, a receiving portion 53 that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at an upper corner portion thereof, and the receiving portion 53 is divided into left and right portions by a partition wall 54, whereby the front door side upper plate is formed. An entrance portion of the passage 51 and an entrance portion of the front door side lower dish passage 52 are partitioned. The upstream side of the front door side upper dish passage 51 and the front door side lower dish path 52 are connected to a game ball distributing section described later, and the game balls that have entered the front door side upper dish path 51 are guided to the upper plate 33, The game balls that have entered the door-side lower dish passage 52 are guided to the lower dish 34.

  Protrusion shafts 61 and 62 are provided on the upper and lower ends of the rotation base end side (the right side in FIG. 3) on the rear surface of the front door frame 14. These projecting shafts 61 and 62 constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of hooks 63 extending rearward are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction on the rotation tip side (the left side in FIG. 3) on the back surface of the front door frame 14. These hooks 63 constitute a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

  Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the inner frame 13. In FIG. 4, the configuration in the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience as in FIG. 2.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 70 whose outer shape is substantially rectangular like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 70 is set slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The resin base 70 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 70. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close the gap. The curtain plate is disposed below the resin base 70 (specifically, the lower end portion thereof). When the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the resin base 70 is placed on the curtain plate. . A slight clearance may be provided between the curtain plate and the resin base 70.

  Support metal fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 4) on the front surface of the resin base 70. Although illustration is omitted, shaft holes are formed in the support fittings 71 and 72, and the projection shafts 61 and 62 of the front door frame 14 are inserted into these shaft holes, so that the front door with respect to the inner frame 13. The frame 14 is rotatably supported.

  Insertion holes 73 for inserting the metal fittings 63 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the rotation front end side (right side in FIG. 4) on the front surface of the resin base 70. The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that a locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened by the hook metal 63 being locked to the locking device 75 (specifically, the front door hook receiving member 76) through the insertion hole 73. The The locking device 75 has an inner frame collar member 77 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 77 are hooked on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11, so that the gaming machine main part 12 is locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

  A cylinder lock 78 for performing an unlocking operation of the locking device 75 is installed at the lower right corner of the resin base 70. The cylinder lock 78 is integrated with the locking device 75. When the key inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the right, the lock of the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 is released, and the cylinder lock 78 is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 78. The locking device 75 is configured such that when the key is turned counterclockwise, the locking of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released.

  A substantially elliptical window hole 74 is formed at the center of the resin base 70, and the window hole 74 is closed from behind by a game board 80 attached to the resin base 70. The game board 80 includes a wooden plywood and a sheet material that covers a front plate surface of the plywood, and the front surface thereof is exposed to the front side of the resin base 70 through the window hole 74. In the exposed portion, that is, the front surface of the game board 80, a game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed. As already described, the game area PE is covered with the glass unit 22 (specifically, the glass panel 24). In the glass unit 22, the gap between the glass panel 24 and the front surface of the game board 80 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is at the same location in the game area PE. It is arranged so that it does not line up in the front and rear. Thereby, the ball blockage in the game area PE is suppressed. Note that the game board 80 is not limited to wooden, and may be made of synthetic resin.

  Hereinafter, the game board 80 (in particular, various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the game board 80.

  The game board 80 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its own thickness direction (front-rear direction) by performing router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 81, a variable winning device 82, operating ports 83 and 84, a through gate 85, a variable display unit 86, and the like. When game balls enter the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operation ports 83 and 84, these game balls are detected by a detection switch described later, and a predetermined number of award balls are paid out based on the detection result. The In addition, an out port 87 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 80, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 87. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 87, the general ball port 81, the variable winning device 82, the operation ports 83 and 84, and the game ball entering the through gate 85 will be described. Also expressed as a prize.

  In addition, in the game board 80, a number of nails 88 are implanted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (functions) such as a windmill are arranged. By various configurations such as the nail 88 and the windmill, the flow path of the game ball is differentiated and adjusted so that the winning to the above-described general winning opening 81 and the like occurs with an appropriate establishment.

  The variable display unit 86 is provided with a symbol display device 91 that variably displays symbols with a winning at the operation ports 83 and 84 as a trigger. The variable display unit 86 is provided with a center frame 92 so as to surround the symbol display device 91. A first specific lamp portion 93 and a second specific lamp portion 94 are provided on the center frame 92. Reserving lamp portions 95 and 96 are provided at the upper and lower portions of the center frame 92, respectively. The lower holding lamp unit 95 corresponds to the symbol display device 91 and the first specific lamp unit 93. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the operation port 84 is held up to four times, and the holding lamp unit 95 is turned on. The number of reserved items is displayed. The upper holding lamp unit 96 corresponds to the second specific lamp unit 94, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 85 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the holding lamp unit 96. It has become so.

  The symbol display device 91 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 91, for example, symbols are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled up and down. When a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, a special gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a jackpot) occurs.

  In the first specific lamp section 93, the emission colors are switched in a predetermined order using a winning at the operation ports 83 and 84 as a trigger, and a big hit is generated when the display is stopped in a predetermined color.

  The operation ports 83 and 84 are arranged at positions close to the variable display unit 86. Since a big win can be generated with a winning at the operating ports 83 and 84 as a trigger, the player pays attention to whether or not to win the operating ports 83 and 84 and to determine whether or not a big win will occur. It is considered that attention is paid to the display device 91 and the first specific lamp unit 93. Providing the operation ports 83 and 84 closer to the variable display unit 86 is a device for concentrating the portion that the player wants to pay attention to around the variable display unit 86.

  Further, the operation ports 83 and 84 are arranged vertically below the variable display unit 86. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the upper working port is referred to as “upper working port 83”, and the lower working port is referred to as “lower working port 84”.

  The lower operating port (lottery opportunity entrance ball portion) 84 is provided with an open / close type entrance assist device (entrance assist means) or an electric accessory 89 as an open / close member (open / close means). The electric accessory 89 can be switched between an open state (assist state) in which the ball can enter the lower operation port 84 or becomes easy, and a closed state (non-assist state) in which the ball can not be entered or becomes difficult. ing. In the second specific lamp portion 94 described above, when the emission color is switched in a predetermined order triggered by the passing of the through ball 85 of the game ball, and the predetermined color is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory 89 Is opened for a predetermined time.

  The variable winning device (special pitching device or special pitching means) 82 has an opening / closing door as an opening / closing member (opening / closing means), and an open state (assist state) in which a game ball can be entered or facilitated. Then, it is possible to switch to a closed state (non-assisting state) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball. During normal times, the open / close door is maintained in a closed state, and when it is a big hit, it is switched to an open state. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 82, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings is defined as one round, and the variable winning device 82 has a maximum number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds). In general, the opening is repeated.

  Referring back to FIG. 4, a game ball launching mechanism 110 that launches a game ball to the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41 is provided below the game board 80 in the resin base 70. ing. As shown in FIG. 4, the game ball launching mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, and a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying a game ball to the launch standby position and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 70. Thus, the resin base 70 is integrated.

  The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 80 side. A ball stopper that holds the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the above-described firing standby position is disposed at a position closer to the downstream end portion (that is, the lower end portion) of the firing rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

  The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source / launch control device described later. Based on the output of the electrical signal from the power supply / launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction, so that the game ball placed at the launch standby position is on the game board 80 side, more specifically, the game. It is driven out toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the board 80.

  In the guide rail 100, the game area PE is partitioned so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. In addition, the guide rail 100 includes an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide passage 103 is defined by both the rails 101 and 102. Is formed. The guide passage 103 has an inlet portion that is open to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the firing rail 112 and an outlet portion that is located above the game area PE. The game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion). In the game board 80, a reverse prevention member 106 for preventing the game ball reaching the game area PE from going back into the guide passage 103 is attached to the front side of the exit portion, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101. Thus, it is possible to prevent the subsequent launch of the game ball from being hindered by the game ball that has reached the game area PE first.

  Each of the rails 101 and 102 constituting the guide rail 100 has an arc shape centered at a substantially central portion of the game area PE. For this reason, the game ball passing through the guide passage 103 is likely to move (slide or roll) along the outer rail 102, that is, in contact with the outer rail 102 due to the centrifugal force generated by itself.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the lower edge of the game board 80. ing. That is, both the rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 are shifted left and right in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the game board 80. Thus, a gap of a predetermined interval is formed between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 while bringing both rails 100 and 112 close to the lower end edge of the game board 80.

  A foul ball passage 55 is disposed below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage 55 is integrally formed with the passage formation unit 50 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return as foul balls in the guide passage 103, the foul balls enter the foul ball passage 55 through the gap. It becomes. The foul ball passage 55 communicates with the front door side lower tray passage 52, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball passage 55 are discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in FIG. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

  A through hole that penetrates the resin base 70 in the front-rear direction is formed on the left side of the firing rail 112 in the resin base 70 (specifically, the side that supports the front door frame 14). A passage forming member is formed in the through hole. 121 is disposed. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 70 and has a main body side upper dish path 122 and a main body side lower dish path 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper dish passage 122 and the main body side lower dish passage 123 communicates with a game ball distributing section described later. A receiving portion 53 of a passage forming unit 50 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and a front door side upper plate passage 51 is provided below the main body side upper plate passage 122. The front door side upper dish path 51 is disposed below the main body side lower dish path 123 (see FIG. 2).

  An opening / closing member 124 that opens and closes the main body side upper dish path 122 and the main body side lower dish path 123 is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the resin base 70. The opening / closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft provided at the lower end of the opening / closing member 124 so as to be pivotable in the front-rear direction. Further, the opening / closing member 124 is biased to a forward position where the main body side upper dish passage 122 and the main body side lower dish path 123 are closed. A member is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening / closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure, and the main body side upper dish passage 122 and the main body side lower dish path 123 are closed. Thereby, when the front door frame 14 is opened in a state in which the game balls are stored in the main body side upper dish passage 122 or the main body side lower dish passage 123, it is possible to prevent the stored balls from spilling down. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion 53 provided in the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper dish path 122 and the front door side upper dish path 51 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower dish path 123 and the front door side lower dish path 52 communicate with each other.

  Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (the resin base 70 and the game board 80) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the rotation base end side (the right side in FIG. 8) on the back surface of the resin base 70, bearing fittings 132 are arranged vertically. The bearing bracket 132 is formed with bearing portions spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

  A plurality of locking fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 70, and the game board 80 is attached to the resin base 70 by the locking fittings 135 as described above. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 80 will be described. FIG. 7 is a rear view showing a state in which the main controller unit 160 is removed from the game board 80.

  The variable display unit 86 disposed in the center of the game board 80 is provided with a frame cover 141 made of a synthetic resin that covers the center frame 92 from the back, and protrudes backward from the frame cover 141 from the rear side. The above-described symbol display device 91 is attached, and a display control device for driving the symbol display device 91 is attached (not shown). The symbol display device 91 and the display control device are arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction (the symbol display device is in front and the display control device is in rear), and the sound lamp control device unit 142 is mounted on the rear side. The sound lamp control device unit 142 includes a sound lamp control device 143 and a mounting table 144, and the sound lamp control device 143 is mounted on the mounting table 144.

  The sound lamp control device 143 includes a sound lamp control board that controls sound, lamp display, and display control device in accordance with instructions from a main control device to be described later, and the sound lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 145.

  As shown in FIG. 7, a collective plate 150 is provided below the variable display unit 86 on the back surface of the game board 80. The collective board 150 is provided with a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls won in various winning ports, a detection mechanism for detecting the entering of game balls into various winning ports, and the like.

  The game ball collecting mechanism will be described. The collective plate 150 is provided with a collecting passage 151 corresponding to each of the various winning holes such as the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83 and 84. . These collection passages 151 go down along the back surface of the game board 80 from these entrances, and define the fall path of the game balls. Each collection passage 151 joins in the vicinity of the lower end of the game board 80, and any game balls that have passed through the entrance holes such as the general prize opening 81 gather at the lower part of the game board 80 via the collection passage 151. Will be. The outlet portion of each collection passage 151 is opened downward, and a discharge passage described later is provided on the front side (specifically, below the game board 80). The game balls gathered below the game board 80 by the collection passage 151 are led out to the discharge passage. Similarly, the out port 87 leads to the discharge passage, and a game ball that has not won any winning port is led to the discharge passage through the out port 87.

  The detection mechanism will be described. The collective plate 150 is provided with detection sensors corresponding to the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83 and 84, respectively. These various detection sensors are arranged in the middle of each collection passage 151 connected to the entrance such as the above-described general winning opening 81, and the game is played in a state in which the fall path of the game ball is defined in the collection passage 151. Detects the passage of a sphere. More specifically, each detection sensor detects a ball entering a ball entrance such as the general winning port 81 or the like when a game ball passes through a detection area provided in the middle of each collection passage 151. Specifically, a magnetic sensor that grasps a change in a magnetic field that occurs when a game ball passes through the detection area is employed.

  These various detection sensors are electrically connected to a main control device unit 160 (specifically, a main control device) provided on the back side of the game board 80, and detection signals from these detection sensors are transmitted to the main control device. Output. In the following, the main controller unit 160 and the configuration associated therewith will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the main controller unit 160.

  The main controller unit 160 is mounted on the game board 80 so as to cover the assembly board 150 from the rear side, and is composed of a synthetic resin mounting base 161 and a main control unit 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. It is configured. The main controller 162 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 163 made of, for example.

  The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be opened by a sealing portion 164 as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. Five sealing portions 164 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used for sealing processing.

  Any configuration can be applied to the sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened. However, the box base and the box cover can be inserted by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the sealing portion 164 And can be unopened. The sealing process by the sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the sealing process again even after it has been performed. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the five sealing portions 164. When opening the board box 163 such as when a failure occurs in the housed main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connecting part between the sealing part into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing part is provided. Disconnect. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the substrate box 163 are separated, and the internal main control substrate can be taken out. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing portions. If the history of opening the substrate box 163 is left in the substrate box 163, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 163.

  A plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 163 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and a sealing process is performed between the board box 163 and the mounting base 161 by the coupling pieces and the coupled pieces. Is called.

  Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 9 is a front view of the back pack unit 15, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view showing the back pack unit 15 disassembled for each main configuration.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the inner frame 13 is covered from behind by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

  The back pack 201 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and as shown in FIG. 9, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. And have. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 86.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the base part 211 is provided with an external terminal plate 213 at the upper right part thereof. The external terminal board 213 is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. The base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower retaining pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and a bearing fitting 132 (specifically, a bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13 with the retaining pins 214. The back pack unit 15 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the inner frame 13. In addition, a fastening tool 215 for fastening to a fastening hole 90 provided in the inner frame 13 is provided at the rotating tip of the base portion 211, and the fastening tool 215 is fitted into the fastening hole. As a result, the back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

  In the base portion 211, a payout mechanism portion 202 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is arranged at the top of the back pack 201 and that opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. The A tank rail 222 that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected to the lower side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224.

  The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to any one of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, and a discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. The side upper dish passage 122 and the front door side upper dish path 51 communicate with the upper dish 33, and the outer opening communicates with the main body side lower dish path 123 and the front door side lower dish path 52. (See FIGS. 3 and 7).

  As shown in FIG. 10, the discharge passage board and the control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion in the front-rear direction. In the discharge passage board, a discharge passage opened rearward is formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and an open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island facility or the like of the game hall, and the game ball led to the discharge passage from the recovery passage described above passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Discharged.

  The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, and a payout control device 242 and a power supply / launch control device 243 are mounted on the mounting base 241. The payout control device 242 and the power supply / launch control device 243 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is accommodated in the board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box 244. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 224, the ball jam is eliminated.

  The power source / launch control device 243 includes a power source / launch control board housed in the board box 246, and a predetermined power source required for various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board. Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 41 is performed. Further, the power supply / launch control device 243 is provided with a RAM erase switch 247. This pachinko machine 10 has a function to store and store various data so that even if a power failure occurs, it maintains the state at the time of the power failure, and when it recovers from the power failure, it can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure. It has become. Therefore, for example, when the power supply is turned off in the normal procedure, as in the case of the game hall being closed, the state before the interruption is stored and held, but when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 247 is held down, the RAM data is initialized. It is like that.

(Configuration related to winning detection at the operation ports 83 and 84)
As already described, when a game ball that has flowed into a ball-entry portion such as the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83 and 84 is detected by the detection sensor, a game is given to the player based on the detected information. Benefits such as paying out balls are granted. Particularly in the present embodiment, various measures are taken to improve the detection accuracy of the game ball that has flowed into the winning portion (that is, the winning detection accuracy). Therefore, as an example, a supplementary description will be given of the configuration relating to ball detection at the operation ports 83 and 84 with reference to FIGS. 5 and 11. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11, an upper opening 98 and a lower opening 99 are provided below the variable display unit 86 in the game board 80 so as to be lined up and down. Both the openings 98 and 99 penetrate in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the game board 80, and are formed so that the opening cross section has a substantially rectangular shape. The opening 98, 99 is assembled with an operation port forming unit 250 from the front side of the game board 80.

  The working port forming unit 250 includes an upper working port forming unit 260 that forms the upper working port 83 at the upper opening 98 and a lower working port forming unit 270 that forms the lower working port 84 at the lower opening 99. It is integrated. It is also possible to provide the upper working port forming portion 260 and the lower working port forming portion 270 as separate bodies, and attach each of the working port forming portions 260 and 270 to the game board 80 individually.

  The upper working port forming unit 260 is configured to receive an upper take-in portion 261 that takes in a game ball flowing down in the game area PE, and an upper lead that guides the game ball taken in by the upper take-in portion 261 to the back side of the game board 80. And a passage portion 262.

  The upper take-in portion 261 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 80 and is opened upward. Thereby, inflow of the game ball from the upper side of the upper taking-in part 261 is permitted, but inflow of the game ball from another direction (for example, left and right direction) is disabled. If attention is paid to the point where the game ball flows into the upper intake portion 261, the upper intake portion 261 may be referred to as an “upper inflow portion 261”.

  The upper guide passage portion 262 is open upward and has a bowl shape extending in the thickness direction of the game board 80, and is inserted into the upper opening 98 to straddle the front and rear surfaces of the game board 80. . On the bottom surface of the upper guide passage portion 262, a guide rib 263 that guides the game ball that has flowed from the upper take-in portion 261 to the back side of the game board 80 is formed. The guide rib 263 has a protrusion that rises upward from the bottom surface of the upper guide passage portion 262 and extends from the upper intake portion 261 to the rear end of the upper guide passage portion 262.

  The standing tip portion of the guide rib 263 is inclined downward toward the back side of the game board 80. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed in from the upper take-in portion 261 moves toward the back side of the game board 80 along the inclination of the guide rib 263. Therefore, the game balls are preferably avoided from staying in the upper guide passage portion 262.

  The lower working port forming unit 270 has the same configuration as the upper working port forming unit 260, that is, a lower take-in portion 271 that takes in a game ball flowing down in the game area PE, and a lower take-in portion 271 A lower guide passage portion 272 for guiding the game ball to the back side of the game board 80;

  The lower intake portion 271 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 80 and is opened upward. An upper working port forming portion 260 is located immediately above the inlet portion of the lower intake portion 271, and the upper working port forming portion 260 prevents the inflow of game balls from directly above. The lower working port forming portion 270 is provided with the electric accessory 89 so as to sandwich the inlet portion of the lower intake portion 271 from both the left and right sides. When the electric accessory 89 is closed, the electric accessory The gap size between the object 89 and the upper working port forming portion 260 is smaller than the diameter size of the game ball. For this reason, unless the electric accessory 89 is opened, the inflow of the game ball into the lower operation port forming portion 270 is hindered by the electric accessory 89 and the upper operation port forming portion 260. Note that the lower intake portion 271 can also be referred to as a “lower inflow portion 271” when attention is paid to the point where the game ball flows into the lower intake portion 271.

  On the bottom surface of the lower guide passage portion 272, a guide rib 273 that guides the game ball that has flowed in from the lower intake portion 271 to the back side of the game board 80 is formed, similarly to the upper guide passage portion 262. The guide rib 273 stands upward from the bottom surface of the lower guide passage portion 272 and has a ridge extending from the lower intake portion 271 to the rear end of the lower guide passage portion 272. The standing tip portion of the guide rib 273 is inclined downward toward the back side of the game board 80. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed in from the lower take-in portion 271 moves toward the back side of the game board 80 along the inclination of the guide rib 273. Therefore, the game balls are preferably avoided from staying in the lower guide passage portion 272.

  The game balls guided to the rear of the game board 80 through these guide passage portions 262 and 272 reach the collective plate 150. The collective plate 150 is provided with an upper collection passage portion 311 for collecting game balls flowing out from the upper guide passage portion 262 and a lower collection passage portion 321 for collecting game balls flowing out from the lower guide passage portion 272. A part of the recovery passage 151 is constituted by the passages individually formed by the recovery passage portions 311 and 321.

  About the upper collection | recovery channel | path part 311 and the lower side collection | recovery channel | path part 321, the structure of the routing of a path | route etc. is a little different. Hereinafter, for convenience, the lower collection passage portion 321 and the configuration accompanying it will be described based on FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, and then the upper collection passage portion 311 and the accompanying configuration will be taken in consideration of the difference from the lower collection passage portion 321. The structure to perform is demonstrated. 12 is a view taken in the direction of arrow B in FIG. In FIG. 12, for convenience, a part of the collection passage 151 can be visually recognized by breaking a part of the collective plate 150.

  The lower collection passage portion 321 has a vertical passage 322 extending in a direction intersecting the passage direction of the guide passage 275 defined by the lower guide passage portion 272, specifically, in the vertical direction. 322 communicates with the guide passage 275.

  A game ball that has flowed into the vertical passage 322 from the guide passage 275 is located on a portion of the passage wall 324 that defines the vertical passage 322 that is located on the extension of the guide passage 275 (specifically, on the extension to the downstream side). Is provided with a ball collision surface 325 for collision. The ball collision surface 325 is formed substantially perpendicular to the direction of the guide passage 275 (specifically, the direction of inclination of the guide rib 273). That is, the spherical collision surface 325 is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so as to face upward, that is, to have a component facing upward.

  The game ball that has flowed in from the lower intake portion 271 flows into the vertical passage 322 through the guide passage 275. Thus, the game ball that has flowed into the vertical passage 322 moves in the extending direction of the guide passage 275 and collides with the ball collision surface 325. At this time, the game ball is prevented from bouncing toward the downstream side of the lower collection passage portion 321 (specifically, the vertical passage 322). That is, the game ball that has flowed into the lower collection passage 321 is adjusted so that the downward velocity component temporarily becomes a predetermined value (almost zero in the present embodiment) in the upstream portion of the vertical passage 322. After that, it falls along the vertical passage 322.

  By tilting the ball collision surface 325 upward, the falling speed of the game ball can be adjusted as described above. However, if one game ball collides with the ball collision surface 325, the game ball is moved to the same game ball. On the other hand, when a plurality of game balls are connected, there is a concern that inconveniences such as ball clogging are likely to occur. Such inconvenience is assumed to become more prominent as the upward facing component on the wall surface increases. In this regard, for the ball collision surface 325 in the present embodiment, the inclination angle ANG1 of the ball collision surface 325 with respect to the vertical direction is set to the inclination angle ANG2 of the guide rib 273 with respect to the horizontal direction (specifically, the guide passage 275 By making it equal to the inclination angle ANG2) at the exit portion, occurrence of such inconvenience is suppressed.

  Incidentally, it is also possible to incline the ball collision surface 325 leftward or rightward. When such a change is made, it is possible to guide the game ball that has collided with the ball collision surface 325 to the side away from the extension of the guide passage 275, and it is possible to more suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-described clogging. . Therefore, the inclination angle ANG1 is set to be large to enhance the de-energizing function, and the occurrence of ball clogging due to this can be suppressed, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

  In addition, when the subsequent game ball comes into contact with the preceding game ball, the rear end of the guide rib 273 (of the lower guide passage portion 272 so that the subsequent game ball remains on the guide rib 273). The positional relationship between the exit portion) and the ball collision surface 325 is defined. As a result, the preceding game ball can be prevented from being pushed upward by the subsequent game ball, and the above-described ball clogging prevention function is further improved.

  A detection sensor 350 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the vertical passage 322 is provided at a position in the middle of the vertical passage 322, specifically, at a portion downstream of the ball collision surface 325 in the lower collection passage portion 321. Yes. The detection sensor 350 is integrated with the assembly plate 150 by being fixed in a state of being accommodated in a sensor housing portion 326 formed on the assembly plate 150 (see FIG. 7). Here, the detection sensor 350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 13. 13A is a perspective view of the detection sensor 350, and FIG. 13B is an exploded perspective view showing the detection sensor 350 in an exploded manner for each main part.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the detection sensor 350 has a sensor main part 360 that detects a game ball. In the sensor main part 360, a sensor board 361 on which various circuits are formed by mounting electronic components such as capacitors, an electromagnetic ball detector 362 fixed to one side of the sensor board 361, A connector base 363 fixed to the end of the sensor substrate 361 opposite to the sphere detector 362 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the ball detector 362 has a cylindrical portion 362a extending in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal passage 322, and a state in which the detection sensor 350 is assembled to the assembly plate 150, that is, a sensor housing portion. In the state accommodated in 326, a part of the vertical passage 322 is constituted by the cylindrical portion 362a. More specifically, the sensor housing portion 326 is formed by denting a part of the longitudinal passage 322 in a direction intersecting the passage direction of the longitudinal passage 322, and the detection sensor 350 is housed in the sensor housing portion 326. In this state, the recessed portion is closed from the inside of the passage by the cylindrical portion 362a. The inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 362a is formed so as to be substantially flush with the wall surface of the vertical passage 322, and a portion of the passage region is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 362a.

  A coil 364 is wound around the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 362a, and both ends (both ends of the electric conducting wire) of the coil 364 are connected to the sensor substrate 361 (see 13 (b)). When the coil 364 is energized, a magnetic field is generated in at least a region surrounded by the cylindrical portion 362a (hereinafter referred to as a detection region DE for convenience).

  Referring to FIG. 13 again, the detection sensor 350 includes a case body 370 that houses the sensor main portion 360. The case body 370 has a pair of case components facing each other with the sensor main portion 360 interposed therebetween, and the case components 370 are combined to partition the inner region and the outer region of the detection sensor 350. Yes. The case body 370 is provided with a shield function for suppressing the passage of radio waves, static electricity, and the like, and the case body 370 suppresses the influence of the radio waves and the like on the sensor substrate 361.

  The case body 370 is formed with a notch 372 for exposing the connector base 363 to the outside of the detection sensor 350, and a harness H is connected to the connector base 363 (see FIG. 13B). . As a result, the detection sensor 350 and the main control device 162 are electrically connected, and the detection signal output from the detection sensor 350 can be transmitted to the main control device 162.

  Further, the case body 370 is formed with an opening 371 communicating with the cylindrical portion 362a of the ball detecting portion 362, and is allowed to pass through the detection area DE of the game ball falling through the vertical passage 322. When the game ball passes through the detection area DE, the magnetic field formed in the detection area DE changes, and the impedance in the coil 364 changes. As a result, the passage of the game ball appears as a change in signal, specifically, a change in voltage.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the length dimension L1 of the cylindrical portion 362a in the central axis direction (passage direction of the longitudinal path 322) is set smaller than the diameter dimension D1 of the game ball. For this reason, the game ball passing through the cylindrical portion 362a is not buried in the cylindrical portion 362a, and at the passage timing, at least a part of the game ball protrudes from the cylindrical portion 362a. As a result, for example, the ability to identify individual game balls when the game balls pass through the detection area DE in a state where a plurality of game balls are connected is improved.

  In the present embodiment, in particular, a contrivance for avoiding passing through the detection area DE in a state where a plurality of game balls are connected in advance is provided, thereby suppressing the occurrence of erroneous detection.

  Specifically, a protrusion 274 that gently protrudes upward is formed on a portion of the upper surface of the guide rib 273 that is in the middle of the lower guide passage 272. The protrusion 274 has an upstream portion inclined upward and a downstream portion inclined downward. For this reason, the game ball passing through the protrusion 274 is decelerated by passing through the upstream portion and then accelerated again by passing through the downstream portion.

  If a plurality of game balls are connected to each other and pass through the projection 274, the preceding game ball and the subsequent game ball are in contact with each other and pass through the ascending slope, so the movement speed of each game ball is the same. It becomes. On the other hand, when the preceding game ball reaches the descending slope portion, the moving speed of the preceding sphere becomes faster than the moving speed of the succeeding ball still existing in the ascending slope portion. For this reason, a speed difference occurs between these two game balls, and a gap is generated between them. In this way, by preventing the game balls from flowing down in contact with each other, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the erroneous detection described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 again, the upper recovery passage portion 311 and the configuration associated therewith will be described.

  The upper collection passage portion 311 is disposed so as to avoid interference with the lower collection passage portion 321. Specifically, the upper recovery passage portion 311 is the same as the horizontal passage 312 that guides the game balls that have flowed out from the guide passage 265 defined by the upper guide passage portion 262 to the side away from the lower recovery passage portion 321. The vertical passage 315 communicates with the downstream end of the passage 312 and extends in the direction intersecting the horizontal passage 312 (specifically, the vertical direction). A detection sensor 350 is disposed in the vertical passage 315. Yes.

  That is, in the lower working port 84, the game ball that has passed through the lower guiding passage portion 272 flows directly into the vertical passage 322 in which the detection sensor 350 is disposed, whereas in the upper working port 83, Is configured such that the game ball that has passed through the upper guide passage portion 262 flows into the vertical passage 315 via the horizontal passage 312.

  The lateral passage 312 communicates with the guide passage 265 of the upper guide passage portion 262 and is inclined downward toward the side away from the communicating portion. A projecting portion 314 that protrudes upward is formed on the bottom surface of the lower collection passage portion 321 that forms the lateral passage 312, specifically, at a position that is in the middle of the lateral passage 312 on the bottom surface. The protrusion 314 has a function similar to that of the protrusion 274 of the lower guide passage 272. That is, when a plurality of game balls flow into the lateral passage 312, it is possible to suppress the game balls from moving in a row and to separate each game ball.

  A game ball that has flowed into the longitudinal passage 322 from the lateral passage 312 at a portion of the passage wall 316 that defines the longitudinal passage 315 and located on the extension of the lateral passage 312 (specifically, on the extension toward the downstream side). Sphere collision surface 317 is provided. The ball collision surface 317 is formed substantially perpendicular to the passage direction of the lateral passage 312. That is, the spherical collision surface 317 is formed so as to be inclined obliquely with respect to the horizontal plane so as to face upward, that is, to have a component facing upward. The game ball that has flowed into the vertical passage 315 from the horizontal passage 312 collides with the ball collision surface 317, so that the vertical movement component of the game ball becomes a predetermined low speed (almost 0 in the present embodiment). Will be adjusted.

  As described above, when the upper collection passage 311 is routed so as to avoid interference with the lower collection passage 321, the passage distance from the inlet of the upper working port 83 to the detection sensor 350 is the lower distance of the lower working port 84. There is a concern that the responsiveness of the ball detection at the time of winning the upper working port 83 is lowered by being longer than the passage distance from the side take-in portion 271 to the detection sensor 350. That is, it is assumed that the period from when the game ball flows into the upper guide passage portion 262 until the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 350 becomes longer. Such a decrease in responsiveness is not preferable because it can hinder smooth game progress.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, the degree of inclination of the guide rib 263 of the upper guide passage portion 262 is increased at a portion close to the entrance of the upper intake portion 261, that is, a portion located immediately below the entrance. The configuration. That is, since the upper take-in portion 261 assumes inflow of game balls from above, the upper take-in portion can be obtained by diverting the momentum of the fall of the game balls to the movement toward the upper collection passage portion 311. The arrival period from 261 to the upper collection passage 311 is shortened. In this way, even if the game ball is made to reach the upper collection passage portion 311 vigorously, the momentum is weakened by passing through the lateral passage 312 of the upper collection passage portion 311. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rampaging at the boundary portion between the horizontal passage 312 and the vertical passage 315, and to suppress variations in the falling speed of the game ball in the vertical passage 315.

  In the lower guide passage portion 272, the game ball flows directly from the lower guide passage portion 272 into the vertical passage 322. Since the protrusion 274 is disposed in the lower guide passage portion 272, if excessive momentum is applied to the game ball, the game ball is lifted by passing through the protrusion 274, and the vertical position is not stabilized. It can flow into the passage 322. It is assumed that this makes it difficult to adjust the falling speed of the game ball. Therefore, as described above, an attempt to use the momentum of the fall for the backward movement by increasing the inclination of the guide rib around the receiving entrance is stopped at the upper guide passage portion 262, and the lower guide passage portion 272 is moved to the lower guide passage portion 272. It is better to refrain from applying.

  Incidentally, the detection sensor disposed in the upper collection passage portion 311 has the same configuration as the detection sensor disposed in the lower collection passage portion 321. That is, the detection sensor 350 is accommodated in the sensor accommodation portion 326 of the upper collection passage portion 311, and when the game ball passes through the detection area DE defined by the cylindrical portion 362a, The output signal changes (see FIG. 13).

  Here, the flow of game ball detection as the game progresses will be described.

  The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 reaches the game area PE via the guide rail 100. When one of the plurality of game balls flows into the upper operation port 83, the game ball collides with the guide rib 263 of the upper guide passage portion 262, so that the falling moment can be utilized behind the pachinko machine 10, That is, it moves toward the upper collection passage 311. The game balls that have reached the upper collection passage 311 collide with the rear side wall surface of the horizontal passage 312, so that the momentum is weakened, and the game balls move toward the vertical passage 315 along the inclination of the horizontal passage 312. The game ball that has moved along the bottom surface of the horizontal passage 312 is weakened again by colliding with the ball collision surface 317 of the vertical passage 315, and the downward movement speed is a predetermined low speed (this embodiment). Is almost 0). After that, by falling along the vertical passage 315 by its own weight, it passes through the detection area DE of the detection sensor 350 at a predetermined speed (approximately 0.3 m / s in the present embodiment) in which variation in the drop speed is suppressed. To do. In other words, a predetermined period (approximately 20 msec in the present embodiment) is required to pass through the detection area DE. A signal obtained by the game ball passing through the detection area DE is output to the main controller 162 via the sensor board 361 → the connector base 363 → the harness H (see FIG. 13).

  The game ball that has flowed into the lower operating port 84 at the timing when a part of the game ball that has reached the game area PE passes through the through gate 85 and the electric accessory 89 is released is the movement component in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. However, when it flows into the lower intake 271, the movement component in the left-right direction of the game ball is absorbed by colliding with the side wall of the lower guide passage 272, The moving component is absorbed by colliding with the guide rib 273 of the lower guide passage portion 272. The game ball whose momentum has been weakened in this way slowly moves rearward along the guide rib 273 of the lower guide passage portion 272.

  The game ball that has reached the lower collection passage 321 is weakened by colliding with the ball collision surface 325 of the longitudinal passage 322, and the downward movement speed is a predetermined low speed (almost in this embodiment). 0). After that, by dropping along the vertical passage 322 by its own weight, it passes through the detection area DE of the detection sensor 350 at a predetermined speed (approximately 0.3 m / s in the present embodiment) in which variation in the drop speed is suppressed. To do. In other words, a predetermined period (approximately 20 msec in the present embodiment) is required to pass through the detection area DE. A signal obtained by the game ball passing through the detection area DE is output to the main controller 162 via the sensor board 361 → the connector base 363 → the harness H.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG. In FIG. 14, a power supply line is indicated by a double line arrow, and a signal line is indicated by a solid line arrow.

  A main control board 601 provided in the main controller 162 incorporates a main control circuit 602 and a power failure monitoring circuit 603. An MPU 611 is mounted on the main control circuit 602. The MPU 611 includes a ROM 612 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 611 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 612 is executed. A certain RAM 613 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated.

  The RAM 613 is configured to retain data by supplying data storage holding power from the power supply / launch control board 621 provided in the power / fire control device 243 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off.

  An input / output port is connected to the MPU 611 via a bus line including an address bus and a data bus. Connected to the input side of the main control circuit 602 are a power failure monitoring circuit 603 provided on the main control board 601, a payout control board 622 provided on the payout control device 242 and various sensor groups. In this case, a power / fire control board 621 is connected to the power failure monitoring circuit 603, and power is supplied to the main control circuit 602 via the power failure monitoring circuit 603.

  As a part of the sensor group, the detection sensors 350 for the operation ports 83 and 84 and a plurality of detection sensors provided in other ball-entry units such as the variable winning device 82 are connected. Winning determination is performed.

  Here, the electrical configuration for performing the winning determination based on the detection information from the detection sensor 350 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 15, an integrated circuit including a main circuit 650 and an output circuit 680 is provided on the sensor substrate 361 of the detection sensor 350.

  The main circuit 650 includes an oscillation circuit 660 in which the coil 364 and the capacitor 661 are connected in parallel. The oscillation circuit 660 is a circuit having the coil 364 as an oscillation coil, and oscillates at a constant frequency (1 MHz in the present embodiment) when a constant voltage is applied. A signal (analog signal) output from the oscillation circuit is input to the processing circuit 670 that constitutes the main circuit 650 together with the oscillation circuit 660. The processing circuit 670 has a function of converting (binarizing) the signal input from the oscillation circuit 660 into either the HI level or the LOW level, and the amplitude of the signal oscillated at the above frequency is a predetermined value. When the threshold value is exceeded (normal time), an HI level signal is output. The signal binarized in this way is inverted through the output circuit 680 and then output to the main control board 601.

  When the game ball passes through the detection area DE of the detection sensor 350, the game ball passes through the magnetic field formed by the coil 364. When the game ball passes through the magnetic field in this way, the impedance in the coil 364 decreases, so that the oscillation condition of the oscillation circuit changes and the amplitude of the signal output from the oscillation circuit 660 decreases. More specifically, the amplitude is almost zero and the oscillation is temporarily stopped.

  The above-described threshold is set so that when the amplitude is reduced as the game ball passes, the amplitude is less than the threshold, and when the amplitude falls below the threshold in this way (that is, at the time of detection). The LOW level signal is input from the processing circuit 670 to the output circuit 680. The LOW level signal input to the output circuit 680 is inverted through the output circuit 680 and then output to the main control board 601.

  By analyzing the signal input from the detection sensor 350 by the MPU 611 of the main control board 601, a winning determination described later is executed. An audio lamp control device 143 (specifically an audio lamp control board 624) is connected to the output side of the main control board 601 (specifically the main control circuit 602) via a relay terminal board 623 and an external terminal board 213. The hall computer is connected through. If an error due to the influence of noise or the like is confirmed in the winning determination, a notification command is output to the voice lamp control device 143 to notify that the error has occurred, and the error information is stored in the hall. Will be transmitted to the computer.

  Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the electrical configuration for determining the winning in the MPU 611 of the main controller 162.

  The RAM 613 of the MPU 611 is provided with a first detection counter area 613a and a timer counter area 613b that are used when determining the winning of a game ball. The first detection counter area 613a is a counter whose maximum value is “2” (hereinafter referred to as a first detection counter DC1 for convenience), and the value is “0”, “1” according to a predetermined condition. , “2”. Specifically, it is reset to “0” by confirming the input of a signal (that is, a LOW level signal) corresponding to the fact that the game ball is not detected in any one process, and then the game ball is When the input of the signal corresponding to the detection (that is, the HI level signal) is continuously confirmed by two processes, “0” → “1” or “1” → “2”. Will be counted up. In this way, when the value of the first detection counter DC1 becomes “2”, it is determined that one game ball has won.

  The timer counter area 613b is a counter (hereinafter referred to as a timer counter TC for convenience) that is returned to 0 by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time it is updated according to a predetermined update condition. The value of the timer counter TC is the sum of the measuring engine by the timer counter TC and the period from when the detection signal is switched to the HI level until it is determined that the game ball has won a prize. It is set so as to be equivalent to a period required for passing the DE, that is, a period during which the detection signal is maintained at the HI level as the game ball passes.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has flowed into the respective operation ports 83 and 84 is guided to the detection sensor 350 (specifically, the detection region DE) via the guide passages 265 and 275 and the vertical passages 315 and 322. Therefore, the period required for the game ball to pass through the detection area DE is about 20 msec in design and experiment. Furthermore, by setting the timing for performing the winning determination every “2 msec”, the period required for the winning determination is approximately 2 msec to 4 msec by detecting two consecutive HI level signals every 2 msec. Yes. Accordingly, by setting the maximum value of the timer counter TC to “9” and setting the update timing every “2 msec”, at least the timing when the game ball finishes passing through the detection area DE, that is, the detection signal is switched to the LOW level. It is avoided that the timer counter TC becomes “0” at an earlier timing.

  Further, the RAM 613 of the MPU 611 is a second detection counter area used when determining whether or not the detection signal input from the detection sensor 350 is normal, that is, whether harmful noise or the like is mixed. 613c and an error counter area 613d are provided. The second detection counter area 613c is a counter whose maximum value is “2” (hereinafter referred to as a second detection counter DC2 for convenience), and the value is “0”, “1” according to a predetermined condition. , “2”. Specifically, it is reset to “0” by confirming the input of a signal (specifically, a LOW level signal) corresponding to the fact that the game ball is not detected in any one process, and then the game ball When the input of a signal (specifically, an HI level signal) corresponding to the detection of the signal is continuously confirmed by two processes, the count is incremented so that “1” → “2”. In this way, based on the fact that the second detection counter DC2 becomes “2”, the mixing of noise that may cause a false detection is grasped.

  Similarly to the second detection counter area 613c, the error counter area 613d is a counter having a maximum value “2” (hereinafter referred to as an error counter EC for convenience), and the value is “ It is configured to change between “0”, “1”, and “2”. Specifically, when the second detection counter DC2 is counted up from “1” to “2”, it is incremented by one. In this way, when the value of the error counter EC is “2”, it is understood that the detection signal is not normal. That is, it is understood that noise or the like may be mixed in the detection signal due to intentional or accidental factors.

  Next, an electrical configuration for determining the occurrence of a jackpot in the MPU 611 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.

  The MPU 611 uses various counter information (specifically, information on various counter areas 613e of the RAM 613 shown in FIG. 15) during the game to set the jackpot lottery, the emission color of the first specific lamp unit 93, and the symbol display of the symbol display device 91. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the jackpot used to determine the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot The type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device 91 fluctuates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1, and the first specific lamp unit 93 The period for switching the color displayed on the symbol and the symbol variable display time on the symbol display device 91 are determined. It is set to be used and variation type counter CS for. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 89 of the lower working port 84 is in the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS are provided in various counter areas 613e of the RAM 613.

  Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 613f of the RAM 613. The RAM 613 is provided with a holding ball storage area 613g and an electric role holding area composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), of which the holding ball storage area 613g The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in time series in accordance with the entry history of the game balls into the operation ports 83 and 84.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 676, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 676), it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the big hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 676). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 613g of the RAM 613 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation ports 83 and 84.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 49, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 49) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type counter C2 determines whether the probability change state or the normal state is set after the jackpot is finished. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 613g of the RAM 613 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation ports 83 and 84.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 613g of the RAM 613 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation ports 83 and 84.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 240) and then returns to 0. The switching display time as a period for switching the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit 93 is determined by the variation type counter CS. This switching display time corresponds to the symbol fluctuation display time of the symbol display device 91. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the switching of the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit 93 and determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 91.

  At the start of one game round, the MPU 611 of the main control board 601 uses a value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the reserved ball storage area 613g to perform a big hit lottery or the first specific lamp unit 93. The switching time of the color displayed on the screen is determined. Information on the lottery result determined here and information on the switching time are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 as a game turn command. The sound lamp control device 143 determines the effect contents of the corresponding game times, such as the variation pattern in the symbol display device 91 and the presence / absence of reach, based on the game times command.

In addition, the value of the electric utility release counter C4 at that time is acquired at the timing when the winning to the through gate 85 occurs, and a lottery is executed as to whether or not the electric accessory is to be opened based on the acquired value. Is done.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10, the power failure monitoring circuit 603, the payout control board 622, and the relay terminal board 623 are connected to the output side of the main control circuit 602. Various commands such as a prize ball command are output to the payout control board 622. Various commands including the notification command are output from the main control circuit 602 to the sound lamp control board 624 provided in the sound lamp control device 143 via the relay terminal plate 623.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 603 relays between the main control circuit 602 and the power / launch control board 621, and monitors a DC stable 24 volt power source that is the maximum power output from the power / fire control board 621.

  The payout control board 622 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 224. The MPU 631 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 632 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 631, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 633 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  Similar to the RAM 613 of the main control circuit 602, the RAM 633 of the payout control board 622 is configured such that the data storage holding power is supplied from the power / launch control board 621 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and the data is held. It has become.

  An input / output port is connected to the MPU 631 of the payout control board 622 through a bus line including an address bus and a data bus. On the input side of the payout control board 622, a main control circuit 602, a power / fire control board 621, and a back pack board 629 are connected. A main control circuit 602 and a back pack substrate 629 are connected to the output side of the payout control substrate 622.

  The power / launch control board 621 includes a power source unit and a launch control unit. The power supply unit supplies necessary operating power to the main control circuit 602, the payout control board 622, and the like through a path indicated by a double line arrow. The launch control unit is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110 according to the operation of the game ball launch handle 41 by the player, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. .

  The sound lamp control board 624 controls the various lamp units 26 to 28, the speaker unit 29, and the display control device 625. The MPU 641 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 642 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 641, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 643 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port is connected to the MPU 641 of the sound lamp control board 624 via a bus line including an address bus and a data bus. A main control circuit 602 is connected to the input side of the sound lamp control board 624 by being relayed to the relay terminal plate 623, and various lamp units 26 to 28, speakers, and the like based on various commands output from the main control circuit 602. The unit 29 and the display control device 625 are controlled. The display control device 625 controls the symbol display device 91 based on a display command input from the sound lamp control board 624.

(About various processes executed by the main controller 162)
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 611 of the main controller 162 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 611 executes a main process that is activated when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 611 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec). This period is arbitrary. However, since the timer interrupt processing is set to be executed repeatedly in a short cycle such as confirmation of power interruption signal or fraud detection signal, confirmation of various winnings, etc., other processing is set. It is preferably set shorter than the repetition period of the normal process described later.

  First, in step S101, a signal reading process is executed. In the signal reading process, information input to the input port from the detection sensors individually provided for the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, the operating ports 83 and 84, and the through gate 85 is confirmed, and the confirmation result To determine whether or not there is a ball entering each ball club. Specifically, the input of a signal (for example, LOW level signal) corresponding to not detecting a game ball is confirmed, and a signal (for example, HI level signal) corresponding to detecting a game ball is detected. When the input is confirmed twice in succession, it is determined that a game ball has entered in the ball entry unit corresponding to the detection sensor. Hereinafter, a part of the signal determination process, specifically, a process based on a signal from the detection sensor 350 corresponding to the operation ports 83 and 84 will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG.

(Signal reading process)
In the signal reading process, first, the subtraction process of the timer counter TC is executed in step S201. Specifically, when the timer counter TC is 0, the timer counter TC is maintained as 0, and when the timer counter TC is not 0, 1 is subtracted from the value of the timer counter TC.

  After performing the subtraction process in step S201, it is determined in step S202 whether or not the value of the timer counter TC is zero. If the value of the timer counter is “0”, it is determined in step S203 whether or not the detection signal is at the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S203, that is, if the detection signal is at the LOW level, the process proceeds to step S204, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated to “0”, and then the main read processing is performed. Exit.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S203, that is, if it is determined that the detection signal is at the HI level, the process proceeds to step S205. In step S205, it is determined whether or not the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “1”. If a negative determination is made in step S205, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “0” or “2”, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “2” in step S206. Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S206, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “0”, after updating the value of the first detection counter DC1 to “1” in step S207, Alternatively, if an affirmative determination is made in step S206, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “2”, this signal reading process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S205, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “1”, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated to “2” in step S208. The process proceeds to step S209. The affirmative determination in step S205 indicates that the signals are input in the order of LOW level → HI level → HI level, and based on the input of such signals, there is a winning to the operation ports 83 and 84. Will be determined. In step S209, a winning detection flag is set. This winning detection flag is a flag that is used when a jackpot lottery or game ball payout is executed based on winning in the operation ports 83 and 84.

  After the winning detection flag is set in step S209, “9” (corresponding to 18 msec) is set in the timer counter TC in step S210. As a result, the next game ball winning determination process (steps S203 to S208) is canceled for 20 msec thereafter.

  Then, after updating the value of the second detection counter DC2 to “0” in step S211, the signal reading process is terminated.

  The various processes in steps S201 to S211 described in detail above are for determining whether or not a game ball is won. In the present embodiment, whether or not the detection signal is normal during detection of the ball by the detection sensor 350. One of the features is that signal determination processing is performed to determine whether or not. Hereinafter, the signal determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Signal judgment processing)
In the determination process of the timer counter TC in step S202, when it is determined that the value of the timer counter TC is not “0”, that is, when 18 msec has not elapsed since the winning is detected (the detection signal becomes HI level). If 20 msec has not elapsed since switching), the process proceeds to signal determination processing in step S212.

  In the signal determination process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the signal input from the detection sensor 350 is at the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S301, that is, if the detection signal is at the LOW level, the process proceeds to step S302, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is updated to “2”, and then this signal determination process ends. To do.

  During the period measurement by the timer counter TC, the LOW level signal is not input unless noise or the like is mixed. For this reason, normally, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is maintained at “0”. If the above-described noise mixing occurs (when the detection signal falls temporarily), the second detection counter DC2 is updated to “2” when the LOW level signal is confirmed, which will be described later. Various determination processes to be performed are permitted.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S301, that is, if it is determined that the detection signal is at the HI level, the process proceeds to step S303 to determine whether or not the value of the second detection counter DC2 is “0”. To do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S303, the above-described signal determination process is terminated because the above-described mixing of the LOW level signal has not occurred, that is, no noise has been mixed in the signal.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S303, that is, if the value of the second detection counter is “1” or “2”, after subtracting 1 from the second detection counter DC2 in step S304, Proceed to step S305.

  In step S305, it is determined whether or not the value of the second detection counter DC2 is “0” as a result of the subtraction. If an affirmative determination is made in step S305, this signal determination process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S305, the process proceeds to step S306.

  In step S306, it is determined whether or not the value of the error counter EC is “2”. If a negative determination is made in step S306, 1 is added to the value of the error counter EC in step S307, and then this signal determination process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S306, that is, if it is determined that the value of the error counter is “2”, the process proceeds to step S309, and an error detection flag is stored in various flag storage areas 613h of the RAM 613.

  The error detection flag is used to transmit error information to the hall computer or to notify that an error has occurred using the error display lamp unit 27 or the speaker unit 29 in an external output process described later. Flag. When the number of occurrences of the error is 3, it is notified that there is a possibility that a malfunction has occurred in the detection sensor 350 or the like, or that an illegal signal is intentionally input, and the player or the game hall It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages. Note that the maximum value of the error counter EC, that is, the allowable number of occurrences of errors, is set to 3 times, so that the progress of the game is prevented from being obstructed by strictly monitoring / notifying the accidental noise mixture. Is intended. Incidentally, the allowable number of error occurrences is not limited to three, but is arbitrary.

  After the error detection flag is set in step S308, the process proceeds to step S309, the value of the error counter EC is updated to “0”, and this signal determination process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 17 again, timer interrupt processing will be described. After executing the signal reading process detailed above, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S102. In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the value of each random number counter is incremented by 1 and it is determined whether or not the added value is an upper limit value. If the added value exceeds the upper limit value, the counter value is set to the initial value. Thereafter, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 613.

  Here, with respect to the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Since the random number initial value counter CINI is a random value, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 varies. Therefore, the timing at which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 coincides with the winning value is different every time the jackpot random number counter C1 makes a round, so it is difficult to grasp the timing at which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 becomes the winning value. It has become.

  In the subsequent step S104, a through winning process is performed in conjunction with winning through the through gate 85. In the through winning process, if a winning to the through gate 85 has occurred, the number of stored item holdings stored in the electronic combination holding area is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”). As a condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric utility reservation area. In addition, the voice lamp control device 143 performs a process for lighting the holding lamp unit 96 corresponding to the number of stored item holdings.

  Thereafter, a start winning process is executed in step S105. In the start winning process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for the operation port is stored in the winning detection flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 613h of the RAM 613. Thus, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start prize) at the operation ports 83 and 84.

  If it is determined that the game ball has won the operating holes 83, 84, in the subsequent step S402, the number N of operating reserved balls of the first specific lamp portion 93 and the symbol display device 91 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not there is. The process proceeds to step S403 on the condition that there is a winning at the operation ports 83 and 84 and the number N of activated balls is less than 4, and the number N of activated balls is incremented by one. Note that the operation port flag is deleted after the process of step S403. In the subsequent step S404, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 613f are stored in the first area of the free space in the reserved ball storage area 613g of the RAM 613. Store.

  Then, after the start winning process, the MPU 611 once ends this timer interrupt process.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S501 to S506 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S509 and S510 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S501, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242. Further, when a game time control command or a game state command is set, it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143. Furthermore, when the error detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 613h of the RAM 613, the error display lamp unit 27 and the speaker unit 29 are used by outputting a notification command to the sound lamp control device 143. A notification to this effect is executed, and error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 213.

  In the following step S502, the variation type counter CS is updated, and in step S503, a first specific lamp unit control process for switching the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit 93 is executed. In the first specific lamp unit control process, jackpot determination, on / off control of a light source switch of an LED lamp disposed in the first specific lamp unit 93, and the like are performed. In the first specific lamp unit control process, the symbol display device 91 also sets the first symbol variation display.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 coincides with a winning value that is a predetermined jackpot winning. Further, the type of jackpot is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 (determining whether or not it is a so-called probable big hit). Further, based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the variation type counter CS, the color switching display time displayed on the first specific lamp unit 93 and the variation display time of the first symbol are determined. Each time the on / off control of the first specific lamp unit 93 is started in the first specific lamp unit control process, the number of the operation reserved balls N is decremented by 1 and when the number of operation reserved balls N is 0, the on / off control is performed. Does not start.

  After the first specific lamp unit control process, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S504. In the big prize opening / closing process, the big prize opening of the variable prize winning device 82 is opened or closed in the case of the big hit state. That is, it is determined whether the big winning opening is opened for each round of the big hit state, and whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of game balls have been won in the big winning opening. The determination as to whether or not the prescribed number has been won is made by checking the big winning counters in the various counter areas 613e of the RAM 613. When either of these conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening is closed.

  Thereafter, in step S505, a second specific lamp unit control process for switching the color displayed on the second specific lamp unit 94 is executed. In the second specific lamp unit control process, switching of the display color in the second specific lamp unit 94 is started on the condition that a game ball has won the through gate 85. At this time, the display color switching time is also set. In addition, the color to be stopped and displayed is set based on the value of the second specific lamp random number counter acquired when the game ball wins the through gate 85. When a predetermined color is set as the stop-displayed color, the electric accessory 89 associated with the operation ports 83 and 84 is opened for a predetermined time after the stop display of the color.

  After step S505, a game ball launch control process is executed in step S506. In the game ball launch control process, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply / launch control device 243. As shown, the game ball launching mechanism 110 is driven. Specifically, the MPU 611 outputs a firing pulse signal to the power source / launch controller 243 every elapse of a predetermined period. Based on the input of the firing pulse signal, the power source / launch control device 243 directs the drive signal (drive voltage) obtained by amplifying the voltage of the launch pulse signal to the solenoid 111 mounted on the game ball launching mechanism. The output of the solenoid 111 is moved to the launch position and the storage position to control the launch of the game ball.

  Thereafter, in step S507, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is stored in the RAM 613. If the power failure flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S508 to determine whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached, that is, an interrupt criterion that is set in advance as a timer interrupt process multiple times from the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether or not the number of times (specifically, twice) has occurred. Specifically, the number of timer interrupts is grasped by adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter in the various counter areas 613e of the RAM 613 every time the timer interrupt is activated, and immediately before executing the process of step S501. At the timing, the counter value is cleared to 0 (initialized). If the timer interruption process has not occurred for the number of interruptions, the process proceeds to step S509.

  In step S509, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 (initialized) when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the lottery counter buffer 613f of the RAM 613. In step S510, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared (initialized) to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the lottery counter buffer 613f of the RAM 613.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S507, and the above-described process is repeated from the start of the previous normal process until the timer interrupt process is generated for the interrupt reference number. When the interrupt reference number is reached, the process returns to step S501. That is, when the power failure flag is not stored, various processes in steps S501 to S506 are repeatedly executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Note that the period is not limited to 4 msec as long as the progress of the game can be well controlled.

  When the power failure flag is stored, the power failure process after step S511 is executed. That is, in step S511, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S512. After the access to the RAM 613 is prohibited in step S513, the power is completely shut off and the process is performed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

  Next, specific examples of aspects of winning determination and signal determination when the game ball passes the detection sensor 350 (specifically, the detection region DE) will be described based on the timing charts of FIGS. FIGS. 22A to 24A are schematic diagrams showing the positional relationship between the game ball and the detection sensor 350, and FIGS. 22B to 24B are schematic diagrams showing signals generated by the oscillation circuit 660. FIGS. 22 (c) to 24 (c) are schematic diagrams showing signals input from the detection sensor 350 to the main controller 162, and FIGS. 22 (d) to 24 (d) show the first detection counter DC1. 22 (e) to 24 (e) are schematic diagrams illustrating values of the second detection counter DC2, and FIGS. 22 (f) to 24 (f) are schematic diagrams illustrating values of the timer counter TC. FIG. In addition, about Fig.22 (a), the timing which each schematic diagram shows is represented using the downward arrow.

  As shown in FIG. 22, at the timing t1, the game ball B1 is positioned above the detection sensor 350. Thereafter, at the timing t2, the game ball B1 reaches the detection sensor 350, and a part of the game ball B1 enters the detection area DE. However, since the game ball B1 has a spherical shape, no noticeable change occurs in the signal generated in the oscillation circuit 660 when a part of the game ball B1 is slightly within the detection area DE. At this time, the value of the timer counter TC is “0”, and the LOW level signal is detected by the MPU of the main controller 162. For this reason, the value of the first detection counter DC1 remains “0”.

  At the timing of t3 when 2 msec (period in which the timer interrupt process is executed) has elapsed from the timing of t2, the game ball B1 further falls, and the impedance of the coil 364 changes, so that the amplitude of the signal generated in the oscillation circuit 660 is reduced. It becomes almost 0 (more specifically, it becomes smaller than a predetermined threshold value). Thereby, the signal input to the main controller 162 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Along with such a change in signal, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated from “0” to “1”.

  At the timing of t4 when 2 msec (period in which the timer interrupt processing is executed) has elapsed from the timing of t3, the amplitude of the signal generated in the oscillation circuit 660 is maintained at 0, and the signal input to the main controller 162 is also The HI level is maintained. Since the signal is maintained at the HI level in this way, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated from “1” to “2” at the timing of t4, and it is determined that one game ball has been won. . At the timing when this winning occurs, “8” is set in the timer counter TC.

  Thereafter, most of the game ball B1 passes through the detection area DE at the timing of t5, so that the change in the impedance of the coil 364 decreases. Specifically, although a part of the game ball B1 remains slightly in the detection area DE, it is insufficient to change the impedance of the coil 364 as in the case of the timing t2. For this reason, the amplitude of the signal generated in the oscillation circuit 660 returns to the original state and exceeds a predetermined threshold value. Thereby, the signal input to the main controller 162 is switched from the HI level to the LOW level.

  At the same time t6, the timer counter TC becomes “0”, so that the first detection counter DC1 can be updated. That is, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated to “0” based on the fact that the signal input to the main controller 162 is at the LOW level. Thus, when the timer counter TC becomes “0” and the first detection counter DC1 becomes “0”, the next winning determination is permitted.

  After “9” is set in the timer counter TC at the timing of t4, the timer counter TC is subtracted every 2 msec. In this way, at the timing t4 to t5 when the timer counter TC is subtracted, the signal determination process is performed together with the subtraction process of the timer counter TC. If noise or the like is mixed during this period, noise is detected by the second detection counter DC2, but no noise or the like is mixed in the detection signal as shown in FIG. In this case, the second detection counter is maintained at the initial value (specifically, “0”).

  In the determination example detailed above, the case where one game ball passes the detection sensor 350 alone has been described. Next, based on FIG. 23, the case where it passes through the detection sensor 350 in a state where two game balls are connected will be described.

  At the timing of t10, the two game balls B2 and B3 that are vertically connected are positioned above the detection sensor 350. Thereafter, the preceding game ball B2 (that is, the lower game ball B2) reaches the detection sensor 350 at the timing of t11, and a part of the game ball B2 enters the detection area DE. However, since the game ball B2 has a spherical shape, no noticeable change occurs in the signal generated in the oscillation circuit when a part of the game ball B2 is slightly within the detection area DE. At this time, the value of the timer counter TC is “0”, and the LOW level signal is detected by the MPU of the main controller 162. For this reason, the value of the first detection counter DC1 remains “0”.

  At the timing of t12 when 2 msec (period in which the timer interrupt process is executed) has elapsed from the timing of t11, the game balls B2 and B3 further fall, and the preceding game ball B2 further enters the detection area DE, The impedance of the coil 364 will change. As a result, the amplitude of the signal generated in the oscillation circuit 660 becomes substantially zero (specifically, becomes smaller than a predetermined threshold value), and the signal input to the main controller 162 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Along with such a change in signal, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated from “0” to “1”.

  At the timing of t13 when 2 msec elapses from the timing of t12, the amplitude of the signal generated in the oscillation circuit 660 is maintained at 0, and the signal input to the main controller 162 is also maintained at the HI level. Since the signal is maintained at the HI level in this way, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated from “1” to “2” at the same timing t13, and it is determined that one game ball has been won. . Thus, at the timing when the winning occurs, “9” is set in the timer counter TC, and the period until the timer counter TC becomes “0” (18 msec in this embodiment), the next game ball The winning determination is cancelled.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t14, a part of the preceding game ball B2 and a part of the subsequent game ball B3 (lower game ball B3) are in the detection area DE. Since the game balls B2 and B3 are both spherical, even if both the game balls B2 and B3 are in the detection area DE, the change in impedance due to the game balls B2 and B3 is weak. . Thereby, the amplitude of the signal generated in the oscillation circuit 660 is recovered and exceeds a predetermined threshold value. As a result, the signal input to the main controller 162 temporarily falls from the HI level to the LOW level.

  At the timing t14, the timer counter TC becomes “0”, so that the first detection counter DC1 can be updated. That is, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated to “0” based on the fact that the signal input to the main controller 162 is at the LOW level. Thus, when the timer counter TC becomes “0” and the first detection counter DC1 becomes “0”, the next winning determination is permitted.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t15, the preceding game ball B2 leaves the detection area DE, and only the subsequent game ball B3 remains in the detection area DE. Thus, when the subsequent game ball B2 enters the detection area DE, the impedance of the coil 364 changes again, and the amplitude of the signal generated in the oscillation circuit 660 becomes almost zero again (more specifically, a predetermined threshold value) Smaller than). Thereby, the signal input to the main controller 162 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Along with such a change in signal, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated from “0” to “1”.

  At the timing t16 when 2 msec has elapsed from the timing t15, the amplitude of the signal generated in the oscillation circuit 660 is maintained at 0, and the signal input to the main controller 162 is also maintained at the HI level. Since the signal is maintained at the HI level in this way, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated from “1” to “2” at the timing t16, and it is determined that a new game ball has been won. . Thus, at the timing when the winning occurs, “9” is set in the timer counter TC, and the period until the timer counter TC becomes “0” (18 msec in this embodiment), the next game ball The winning determination is cancelled.

  Thereafter, a part of the subsequent game ball B3 remains in the detection area DE at the timing of t17, but most of the game ball B3 passes through the detection area DE, so that the change in the impedance of the coil 364 is reduced. . As a result, the amplitude of the signal generated in the oscillation circuit 660 returns to the original state and exceeds a predetermined threshold value. As a result, the signal input to the main controller 162 falls from the HI level to the LOW level.

  At the timing t17, the timer counter TC becomes “0”, so that the first detection counter DC1 can be updated. That is, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated to “0” based on the fact that the signal input to the main controller 162 is at the LOW level. Thus, when the timer counter TC becomes “0” and the first detection counter DC1 becomes “0”, the next winning determination is permitted.

  In the two determination examples described in detail above, the determination in a normal state in which noise or the like is not added to the signal generated in the oscillation circuit 660 during the ball detection has been described. Next, a determination example in the case where noise or the like is added to a signal generated in the oscillation circuit 660 will be described based on FIG.

  With respect to the timing from t30 to timing t33, the winning determination is made based on the detection signal, similarly to the timing from t1 to t4, and “9” is set to the timer counter TC based on the determination result. Thereby, during the period until the timer counter TC becomes “0” (18 msec in the present embodiment), the winning determination of the next game ball is cancelled.

  When noise having the same waveform as the signal (specifically, the waveform having the same frequency and the same amplitude) is added to the signal generated by the oscillation circuit 660 at the timing of t34, the amplitude of the waveform exceeds the threshold value. As a condition, the signal input to the main controller 162 falls from the HI level to the LOW level. At this timing, since the timer counter TC has not yet reached “0”, no winning determination is made (specifically, a negative determination is made in S202 of FIG. 18), and this change in signal affects the winning determination. Is not given.

  Since the timer counter TC is not “0” at the timing t35 when 2 msec (period in which the timer interrupt processing is executed) has elapsed from the timing t34, the second detection counter DC2 detects noise. . Specifically, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is updated from “0” to “2” based on the detection signal being at the LOW level.

  At the timing of t36 when 2 msec has elapsed from the timing of t35, noise disappears, so that the signal input to the main controller 162 switches from the LOW level to the HI level. At this time, since the timer counter TC is not “0”, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is updated (subtracted) from “2” to “1”.

  The detection signal is maintained at the HI level also at the timing of t37 when 2 msec has elapsed from the timing of t36. As a result, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is updated (subtracted) from “1” to “0”, and the error counter EC is updated (added) from “0” to “1”.

  When noise having the same waveform is added to the signal generated by the oscillation circuit 660 at timing t38 when 2 msec has elapsed from timing t37, the main control is performed on the condition that the amplitude of the waveform exceeds the threshold value. The signal input to the device 162 falls from the HI level to the LOW level.

  At the timing of t39 when 2 msec has elapsed from the timing of t38, since the timer counter TC is not “0”, the noise is detected by the second detection counter DC2. Specifically, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is updated from “0” to “2” based on the detection signal being at the LOW level.

  Thereafter, the second detection counter DC2 is updated (subtracted) from “2” to “1” at the timing of t36 when 2 msec has elapsed from the timing of t39, and at the timing of t36 at the subsequent timing of t41. Similar to the timing, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is updated (subtracted) from “1” to “0”, and the error counter EC is updated (added) from “1” to “2”. As a result, the error counter EC is added once again, and the error information is output (standby state).

  Thereafter, at the timing t42 when 20 msec has elapsed from the timing t32, the value of the timer counter TC becomes “0”, and the detection signal of the game ball is switched from the HI level to the LOW level. Specifically, although a part of the game ball B4 remains in the detection area DE, most of the game ball B4 passes through the detection area DE, so that a change in impedance of the coil 364 is reduced. As a result, the amplitude of the signal generated in the oscillation circuit 660 returns to the original state and exceeds a predetermined threshold value. Along with this, the signal input to the main controller 162 falls from the HI level to the LOW level.

  Thus, when the timer counter TC becomes “0”, the first detection counter DC1 can be updated. That is, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated to “0” based on the fact that the signal input to the main controller 162 is at the LOW level. Thus, when the timer counter TC becomes “0” and the first detection counter DC1 becomes “0”, the next winning determination is permitted.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The passage period required for the game ball to pass through the detection area DE (that is, the output period during which a game ball detection signal is output from the detection sensor 350) is adjusted to be constant, and is the same as the prescribed period. Even if there is information indicating the passage of a plurality of game media within the length of time, it is avoided that it is determined that the game media have passed based on such erroneous information. As described above, it is possible to improve the winning determination accuracy of the game ball by making the determination indicating the passage of one gaming medium within the same length of time as the passing period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantage due to erroneous detection and contribute to the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

  The noise mixed in the signal output from the detection sensor 350 is not only due to an accidental factor, but may be intentionally mixed by an unauthorized person. For example, noise can be intentionally mixed by emitting a high frequency similar to the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 660 of the detection sensor 350 to the detection sensor 350 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this respect, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suitably enhance the crime prevention function against such illegal acts.

  In particular, since the configuration is such that the passing of the game ball is detected by reducing the amplitude of the high frequency, even if the illegal high frequency is output when the game ball does not flow into the operation ports 83 and 84, the high frequency It is difficult to reduce the amplitude of. For this reason, it is assumed that the offender injects the above-mentioned fraudulent high frequency in view of the timing at which the game balls flow into the operation ports 83 and 84. At this time, at least one game ball has been properly awarded. It becomes. Therefore, in the embodiment, the measurement start timing of the winning determination cancellation period (specifically 18 msec) using the timer counter TC is set to the same timing as the game ball winning. As a result, it is possible to determine that a game ball that has been properly entered has been won, and it is possible to disregard unauthorized noise generated accompanying the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to suitably achieve both improvement in crime prevention and profit collateral for the player.

  Also, the regulation period ends so that the output of the game ball detection signal corresponding to the preceding game ball is stopped and the output of the game ball detection signal corresponding to the subsequent game ball is started. A transit period was set. Thereby, even if the game balls continuously pass through the detection area DE while avoiding the influence of noise or the like, it is possible to appropriately grasp the winnings of both of these game balls, which is practically preferable. The configuration can be realized.

  When the error determination of the detection signal input from the detection sensor 350 is performed, the error determination determination condition is the same as the determination condition in the winning determination. As a result, it is possible to distinguish between substantially harmless noise and harmful noise that may affect the progress of the gaming machine. It is not preferable to react sensitively to harmless noise because it hinders the smooth progress of the game, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized by ignoring such noise. In addition, when noise is intentionally mixed by an unauthorized person as described above, such harmful noise can be suitably identified. Thereby, it is possible to facilitate the discovery of fraud.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the output period of the game ball detection signal output from the detection sensor 350 is set to a known length. For this reason, it is possible to accurately grasp the erroneous detection of the game ball due to noise or the like within the same length of time as the output period. That is, if the output period of the detection signal is unknown, it becomes difficult to correctly determine whether it is a legitimate detection or a false detection if a plurality of game balls are detected. According to this, such inconvenience can be solved. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the disadvantage by misdetection can be suppressed and it can contribute to the reliability improvement of a game machine.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when a detection ball is detected by a detection sensor, a game ball is sent to the player based on the detection information. However, in the present embodiment, the configuration relating to ball detection in the variable winning device is different from that of the first embodiment. Therefore, the same configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 25 is a rear view showing the configuration of the game board according to the second embodiment, FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 25, and FIG. 27 is a view taken along arrow D in FIG. In FIG. 27, for the sake of convenience, a part of the collective plate is broken so that the inside of the collection passage formed in the collective plate is partially visible. Further, in the following description, description regarding the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is simplified or omitted.

(Configuration related to winning detection in the variable winning device 1082)
As shown in FIG. 25, an opening 1099 having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided at a position below the lower operation port 1084 in the game board 1080. The opening 1099 penetrates in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the game board 1080, and the opening cross section is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A variable winning device 1082 is assembled to the opening 1099 from the front side of the game board 1080.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the variable winning device 1082 includes a guide passage 1260 for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the opening 1099 to the back side of the game board 1080, and a forward opening portion (hereinafter referred to as the guide passage portion 1260). And an open / close door 1270 formed in accordance with a special prize opening 1261). The open / close door 1270 closes the grand prize winning opening 1261 to a closed position where the inflow of gaming balls to the grand prize winning opening 1261 is disabled, and an open position that allows inflow of gaming balls to the grand winning prize opening 1261. It is provided to be switchable.

  Specifically, the opening / closing door 1270 is rotatably provided and is biased toward the closed position. Due to this urging force, the opening / closing door 1270 is in a standby state in the closed position. Further, the variable winning device 1082 includes a drive unit (specifically, a solenoid) that is electrically connected to the main control device 1162. When a big hit occurs, a drive signal is input from the main controller 1162 to drive the solenoid, and the door 1270 is pushed toward the open position by the output shaft of the solenoid. As a result, the open / close door 1270 moves to the open position against the urging force (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 26).

  Thus, in a state where the opening / closing door 1270 is opened, the game ball flowing down the game area PE moves along the plate surface of the opening / closing door 1270. Thereby, winning to the big winning opening 1261 is facilitated. In other words, the opening / closing door 1270 is provided with a support function for supporting the inflow of game balls to the grand prize winning opening 1261, and the opening / closing door 1270 is arranged at the open position, thereby enabling the support function.

  Behind the guide passage portion 1260, a prize winning collection passage portion 1310 for collecting game balls flowing out from the guide passage portion 1260 is provided, and is partitioned by the prize winning collection passage portion 1310. A part of the recovery passageway 1151 is constituted by the passageway.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the winning prize collection passage portion 1310 includes an upstream passage portion 1320 into which game balls that have flowed out from the guide passage portion 1260 flow in, and a downstream passage portion 1330 that continues to the upstream passage portion 1320. have.

  The upstream side passage portion 1320 faces the front side wall portion 1321 across a front side wall portion 1321 that covers the guide passage 1265 of the guide passage portion 1260 from the rear and a game ball passage area (hereinafter referred to as an upstream passage 1325). An upstream passage 1325 extending in the horizontal direction (specifically, the left-right direction in a pachinko machine) is defined in the same manner as the big prize opening 1261.

  The front side wall portion 1321 is formed with a receiving port 1323 that is open to the guiding passage portion 1260 side, and a game ball flows from the guiding passage 1265 to the upstream passage 1325 through the receiving port 1323. The upstream passage 1325 is gently lowered toward the side away from the receiving port 1323, and the game ball that has flowed into the upstream passage 1325 flows down along the upstream passage 1325.

  In the present embodiment, a device for reducing the momentum of the game ball flowing from the guide passage 1265 to the upstream passage 1325 is provided. Here, the configuration related to the de-energization of game balls will be described.

  The guide passage portion 1260 has a long plate-like bottom portion 1262 provided along the bottom surface of the opening 1099. As shown in FIG. 27, a groove 1263 is formed in a portion of the bottom 1262 that is in front of the receiving port 1323 so as to be continuous with the receiving port 1323. More specifically, a groove portion 1263 that extends rearward and communicates with the receiving port 1323 is formed on one side portion of the bottom portion 1262.

  Further, the upper surface of the bottom portion 1262 is inclined downward toward the groove portion 1263. For this reason, the game ball that has flowed in from the special winning opening 1261 flows into the groove portion 1263 along the inclination of the bottom portion 1262. The bottom surface of the groove portion 1263 is gently lowered to the rear (see FIG. 26), and the game ball that has flowed into the groove portion 1263 moves rearward along the bottom surface, thereby allowing the prize winning opening collection passage portion 1310 to pass through the receiving port 1323. Flow into. By passing through the groove portion 1263 in this way, the movement of the game ball flowing in from the big prize opening 1261 in the passage direction of the upstream passage 1325 is suppressed.

  The game ball that has flowed into the winning prize collection passage portion 1310 collides with the rear side wall portion 1322 of the upstream passage portion 1320. Thereby, the momentum in the front-back direction is weakened. In this way, the game ball whose flow force has been weakened moves along the upstream passage 1325 to the downstream side.

  A protruding portion 1324 a that gently protrudes from the bottom portion 1324 of the upstream-side passage portion 1320 is formed in the middle of the upstream passage 1325. The protrusion 1324a has an upstream portion inclined upward and a downstream portion inclined downward. For this reason, the game ball passing through the protrusion 1324a is decelerated by passing through the upstream portion, and then accelerated again by passing through the downstream portion. The protrusion 1324a has the same function as the protrusions 274 and 314 shown in the first embodiment, and will be described later by preventing the game balls from flowing down in contact with each other. Occurrence of erroneous detection by the sensor 1350 is suppressed.

  The downstream passage portion 1330 defines a downstream passage 1335 through which game balls can pass one by one in the same location, and the downstream passage 1335 intersects the passage direction of the upstream passage 1325, specifically, vertical. Extending in the direction.

  A game ball that has flowed into the downstream passage 1335 from the upstream passage 1325 is located in a portion of the passage wall 1331 that defines the downstream passage 1335 that is located on the extension of the upstream passage 1325 (specifically, on the extension to the downstream side). Is provided with a ball collision surface 1332 that collides with each other. The ball collision surface 1332 is formed substantially perpendicular to the passage direction of the upstream passage 1325. That is, the spherical collision surface 1332 is formed so as to be inclined obliquely with respect to the horizontal plane so as to face slightly upward, that is, to have a component facing upward.

  The game ball that has flowed in from the prize winning opening 1261 flows into the upstream passage 1325 through the guide passage 1265, and the game ball that has flowed into the upstream passage 1325 moves in the extending direction of the upstream passage 1325 to move to the ball collision surface. Collide with 1332. At this time, the game ball is prevented from bouncing toward the downstream side of the special winning opening recovery passage portion 1310 (that is, downstream of the downstream passage 1335). In other words, the game ball that has flowed into the winning prize collection passage section 1310 has a predetermined velocity value (approximately zero in the present embodiment) that has a downward speed component at the boundary between the upstream passage 1325 and the downstream passage 1335. After being adjusted so as to become, it falls along the downstream passage 1335.

  Since the ball collision surface 1332 has the same configuration as the ball collision surfaces 317 and 325 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  A detection sensor 1350 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the downstream passage 1335 is provided at a position in the downstream passage 1335, specifically, at a portion downstream of the ball collision surface 1332 in the prize winning collection passage portion 1310. It has been. The detection sensor 1350 is integrated with the assembly plate 1150 by being fixed in a state of being accommodated in a sensor housing portion 1333 formed on the assembly plate 1150 (see FIG. 25).

  Similar to the detection sensor 350 shown in the first embodiment, the detection sensor 1350 includes a sensor main portion having a sensor substrate 1361 and a case body that accommodates the sensor main portion. The various configurations of the detection sensor 1350 are the same as the various configurations of the detection sensor 350, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the flow of game ball detection as the game progresses will be described.

  The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism reaches the game area PE via the guide rail. When some of the plurality of game balls flow into the operation port, the main control device 1162 executes a jackpot winning lottery. As a result of the winning / losing lottery, if the winning combination is won, the open / close door 1270 of the variable winning device 1082 is opened, and the inflow of game balls to the big winning opening 1261 is allowed.

  When the game ball that has flowed down the game area PE hits the open / close door 1270 thus opened, the game ball is guided along the open / close door 1270 to the big prize opening 1261 and along the guide passage 1265. Move backward. The momentum is weakened by colliding with the front side wall portion 1321 of the prize winning collection passage portion 1310, and flows into the groove portion 1263 along the bottom portion 1262 of the guide passage 1265. The game ball that has flowed into the groove portion 1263 moves to the rear of the pachinko machine along the groove portion 1263, and flows into the upstream passage 1325 of the prize winning collection passage portion 1310 through the receiving port 1323. At this time, the game ball collides with the rear side wall 1322, and the momentum is weakened again.

  The game ball that has flowed into the upstream passage 1325 flows down along the slope of the upstream passage 1325 and collides with the ball collision surface 1332 of the downstream passage portion 1330, so that its momentum is weakened again, The moving speed is a predetermined low speed (almost 0 in the present embodiment). Thereafter, the detection sensor 1350 detects the detection sensor 1350 at a predetermined speed (approximately 0.3 m / s in the present embodiment) in which variation in the falling speed is suppressed by dropping along the downstream passage 1335 due to its own weight (free fall). Pass through area DE. When the game ball passes through the detection area DE in this way, a game ball detection detection signal (specifically, a HI level signal) is output to the main controller 1162 over approximately 20 msec, as in the first embodiment. Is done.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment will be described based on the block diagram of FIG. Since the electrical configuration in the present embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment, a winning determination is made based on differences from the first embodiment, specifically, detection information from the detection sensor 1350. The description will focus on the electrical configuration for performing the above, and the description of the common configuration will be simplified or omitted.

  The MPU 1611 (specifically, the RAM 1613) of the main control board 1601 in the main controller 1162 is input from the first detection counter area 1613a (first detection counter DC1) and the detection sensor 1350 used when determining the winning of the game ball. A determination timer counter area 1613b (determination timer counter JTC) used when determining whether or not the detected signal is normal, that is, whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection signal due to harmful noise or the like. A second detection counter area 1613c (second detection counter DC2) and an error counter area 1613d are provided. Of these, the counter areas 1613a to 1613c have the same configuration as the counter areas 613a to 613c in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The error counter area 1613d is a counter whose maximum value is “3” (hereinafter referred to as an error counter EC for convenience), and the value is “0”, “1”, “2” according to a predetermined condition. , “3”. Specifically, when the second detection counter DC2 is counted up from “1” to “2”, it is incremented by one. As a result of such count-up, the value of the error counter EC becomes “3”, so that it is understood that the detection signal is not normal. That is, it is understood that there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the detection signal due to noise mixed into the detection signal due to an intentional or accidental factor.

  Further, the MPU 1611 includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for jackpot lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining jackpot types such as probability variation jackpots and normal jackpots, and reach when the symbol display device changes and changes. The reach random number counter C3 used for the lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the period for switching the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit, and the symbol in the symbol display device Various counters including a variation type counter CS for determining a variation display time and an electric accessory release counter C4 used for lottery of whether or not the electric accessory 89 of the lower working port 2084 is in an electric utility open state. An area 1613e is provided. A jackpot occurrence determination is performed using these counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, and C4 provided in various counter areas 1613e. Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 1613f of the RAM 1613. The counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, C4 and the lottery counter buffer 1613f have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The RAM 1613 is provided with a holding ball storage area 1613g and an electric role holding area consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), of which the holding ball storage area 1613g The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in time series in accordance with the entry history of the game balls into the operation ports 1083 and 1084.

  Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the electrical configuration used in various processes when a big hit occurs.

  When it is determined that the above-described internal lottery result has been won, the variable winning device 1082 is switched to the open state. As a release mode of the variable winning device 1082, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings is set as one round, and the opening with a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit is repeated.

  In the various counter areas 1613e, a round counter RC that counts the rounds of jackpots, a winning counter PC that counts the number of winnings, an opening timer counter OTC that counts the opening period during each round, and a closing period between rounds are provided. A closing timer counter CTC for counting is provided.

  The round counter RC is a counter whose maximum value is “15”, and is decremented by 1 every time one round passes. When the round counter reaches “0”, the open mode of the variable winning device 2082 that accompanies the jackpot ends. The winning counter PC is a counter whose maximum value is “10”, and is decremented by one every time it is determined by the first detection counter that the game ball has won. The open timer counter OTC is a counter whose maximum value is “15000”, and is decremented by 1 each time a timer interrupt process described later is performed. When one of the winning counter PC and the open timer counter OTC becomes “0”, one round is completed. Further, the closing timer counter CTC is a counter whose maximum value is “2000”, and is decremented by 1 every time a timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the closing timer counter CTC becomes “0”. It moves to the next round, and the opening / closing door 2270 of the variable winning device 1082 is opened.

(About various processes executed by main controller 1162)
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 1611 of the main controller 1162 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 1611 executes a main process that is activated when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 1611 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec). This period is arbitrary. However, since the timer interrupt processing is set to be executed repeatedly in a short cycle such as confirmation of power interruption signal or fraud detection signal, confirmation of various winnings, etc., other processing is set. It is preferable that the period is set to be shorter than a repetition period (for example, 4 msec period) of normal processing described later.

  First, in step S1101, a signal reading process is executed. In the signal reading process, the information input to the input port from the detection sensors individually provided for the general winning opening, the variable winning device 1082, the operation opening 1083, 1084, and the through gate is confirmed, and each result is confirmed from the confirmation result. The presence or absence of the entrance to the entrance part is specified. Specifically, input of a signal (for example, a LOW level signal) corresponding to not detecting a game ball in any one process is confirmed, and a game ball is detected in the subsequent two processes. When the input of a signal (for example, an HI level signal) corresponding to being performed is continuously confirmed, it is specified that a game ball has entered in the entrance corresponding to the detection sensor. Hereinafter, a part of the signal determination process, specifically, a signal reading process based on a signal from the detection sensor 1350 corresponding to the variable winning device 1082 (large winning opening 1261) will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. To do.

(Signal reading process)
As shown in FIG. 30, in the same signal reading process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not a flag for generating a big hit is stored in various flag storage areas 1613h. If a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the jackpot is not in effect, the signal reading process is terminated as it is. That is, the winning determination to the variable winning device 1082 (big winning opening 1261) in the present embodiment is configured to be executed while the jackpot is being generated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if it is determined that a big hit is being made, the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, it is determined whether a reading mode switching flag is stored in various flag storage areas 1613h. If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the first signal reading mode is selected, that is, the process proceeds to step S1203 to execute the first signal reading process, and then the signal reading process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, the second signal reading mode is selected, that is, the process proceeds to step S1204 to execute the second signal reading process, and then the signal reading process is terminated. In other words, two different signal reading modes are selected depending on the presence or absence of the reading mode switching flag. The processing executed in each signal reading mode includes processing common to both modes and processing provided only in one mode, and the latter processing has a monitoring function as to whether or not the detection signal is normal. Has been granted. Therefore, the detection signal monitoring state and the non-monitoring state are switched depending on which of the first signal reading mode and the second signal reading mode is selected.

  Here, processing contents in each reading mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32.

(First signal reading process)
As shown in FIG. 31, in the first signal reading process, it is first determined in step S1301 whether or not the detection signal from the detection sensor 1350 is at the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S1301, that is, if the detection signal is at the LOW level, the process proceeds to step S1302, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated to “0”, and then the first signal reading is performed. End the process.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S1301, that is, if it is determined that the detection signal is at the HI level, the process proceeds to step S1303. In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “1”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1303, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “0” or “2”, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “2” in step S1304. Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S1304, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “0”, after updating the value of the first detection counter DC1 to “1” in step S1305, When the first signal reading process is finished and an affirmative determination is made in step S1304, that is, when the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “2”, the first signal reading process is finished as it is. .

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “1”, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated to “2” in step S1306. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1307. The affirmative determination in step S1303 indicates that the signals are input in the order of LOW level → HI level → HI level. Based on the input of such signals, the variable winning device 1082 (big prize opening 1261). It will be determined that there has been a prize. In step S1307, the first winning detection flag is set, and the first signal determination process is terminated. The first winning detection flag is a flag used when a game ball is paid out based on winning in the variable winning device 1082.

  The various processes in steps S1301 to S1307 in the first signal reading process described in detail above are for determining a winning game ball. In contrast, in the second signal reading process, in addition to the winning determination of the game ball. , A preparatory process for monitoring whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection signal during detection of the sphere by the detection sensor 1350, that is, a preparatory process for performing a signal determination for determining whether or not the detection signal is normal Is added. Hereinafter, each process in the second signal reading mode will be described with reference to FIG.

(Second signal reading process)
In the second signal reading process, first, in step S1401, the determination timer counter JTC is updated. The determination timer counter JTC has the same configuration as the timer counter TC shown in the first embodiment, and a game ball detection signal (specifically, a HI level signal) when the game ball passes through the detection area DE. It is used to measure the timing of disappearance. In this update process, when the determination timer counter JTC is 0, the determination timer counter JTC is maintained at 0, and when the determination timer counter JTC is not 0, the determination timer counter JTC is decremented by 1. .

  After performing the update process in step S1401, it is determined in step S1402 whether the value of the determination timer counter JTC is zero. If the value of the determination timer counter JTC is “0”, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not the detection signal is at the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S1403, that is, if the detection signal is at the LOW level, the process proceeds to step S1404, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated to “0”, and then the second signal reading is performed. End the process.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S1403, that is, if it is determined that the detection signal is at the HI level, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, it is determined whether or not the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “1”. If a negative determination is made in step S1405, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “0” or “2”, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “2” in step S1406. Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S1406, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “0”, after updating the value of the first detection counter DC1 to “1” in step S1407, When the second signal reading process is finished and an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, that is, when the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “2”, the second signal reading process is finished as it is. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1405, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “1”, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated to “2” in step S1408. The process proceeds to step S1409. The affirmative determination in step S1405 indicates that the signals are input in the order of LOW level → HI level → HI level. Based on the input of such a signal, the variable winning device 1082 (in detail, the big prize opening) 1261) is determined to have been won. In step S1409, the first winning detection flag is set. The first winning detection flag is a flag used when a game ball is paid out based on winning in the variable winning device 1082.

  After the first winning detection flag is set in step S1409, “9” (corresponding to 18 msec) is set in the determination timer counter JTC in step S1410. Thereby, the winning determination process (steps S1403 to S1408) for the next game ball is canceled over 18 msec thereafter. Then, after updating the value of the second detection counter DC2 to “0” in step S1411, the signal reading process is terminated.

  The various processes in steps S1403 to S1409, which have been described in detail above, are game ball winning determinations, and are similar to steps S1301 to S1307 in the first signal determination process. Here, the second signal determination process is characterized by performing a signal determination preparation process for determining whether or not the detection signal is normal during the ball detection by the detection sensor 1350. Hereinafter, the signal determination preparation process will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

(Signal judgment preparation process)
In the determination process of the determination timer counter JTC in step S1402, when it is determined that the value of the determination timer counter JTC is not “0”, that is, when 18 msec has not elapsed since the winning is detected (the detection signal is HI). If 20 msec has not elapsed since switching to the level), the process proceeds to a signal determination preparation process in step S1412.

  In the signal determination preparation process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the signal input from the detection sensor 1350 is at the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, that is, if the detection signal is at the LOW level, the process proceeds to step S1502, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is updated to “2”, and then this signal determination preparation process is performed. finish.

  During the period measurement by the judgment timer counter JTC, the LOW level signal is not input unless noise or the like is mixed. For this reason, normally, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is maintained at “0”. If the above-described noise mixing occurs (when the detection signal falls temporarily), the second detection counter DC2 is updated to “2” when the LOW level signal is confirmed, which will be described later. Various determination processes to be performed are permitted.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, that is, if it is determined that the detection signal is at the HI level, the process proceeds to step S1503 to determine whether or not the value of the second detection counter DC2 is “0”. To do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, since the above-described mixing of the LOW level signal has not occurred, that is, no noise has been mixed in the signal, this signal determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1503, that is, if the value of the second detection counter is “1” or “2”, after subtracting 1 from the second detection counter DC2 in step 1504, The process proceeds to step S1505.

  In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the value of the second detection counter DC2 is “0” as a result of the subtraction. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, the signal determination preparation process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1505, the process proceeds to step S1506, and error counter update processing is executed.

  In the error counter update process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the error counter EC is “3”. If the value of the error counter EC is “3”, the value of the error counter EC is held. When the value of the error counter EC is not “3”, 1 is added to the value of the error counter EC.

  If the maximum value of the error counter EC is changed and the maximum value is set to be larger than the maximum number of false detections that can occur during one round, the error counter update process is simplified, A configuration in which 1 is added each time is also possible. By making such a change, the error counter update process can be simplified.

  After executing the error counter update process in step S1506, the second winning detection flag is stored in various flag storage areas 1613h of the RAM 1613 in step S1507, and this signal determination preparation process is terminated. The second winning detection flag is used for counting the number of winnings at a large winning opening 1261 described later, but is not applied to paying out a game ball. Details will be described later.

  In addition, although it was set as the structure which stores a different kind of winning detection flag by the case where determination timer counter JTC is "0", and the case where it is not "0", a 1st winning detection flag is replaced with a 2nd winning detection flag. It can also be configured to store. Further, when the determination timer counter JTC is “0”, it is not always necessary to cancel the various processes related to the winning determination shown in steps S1403 to S1409, and even when the determination timer counter JTC is not “0”, steps S1403 to S1403 are not necessarily canceled. It is possible to omit the storing of the winning detection flag based on the determination result by the second detection counter DC2 by performing various processes shown in S1409. Furthermore, the second detection counter DC2 can be omitted, and an error determination function can be added to the first detection counter DC1. That is, the first detection counter DC1 can be used in the signal determination preparation process.

  The timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 29 again. After executing the signal reading process described in detail above, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S1102. In subsequent step S1103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated, and the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 613.

  In subsequent step S1104, a through winning process is performed in accordance with winning through the through gate. Note that the various processes in steps S1102 to S1104 are the same as the various processes in steps S102 to S104 described in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Thereafter, a start winning process is executed in step S1105. In the start winning process, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for the operating opening is stored in the winning detection flag storing area in the various flag storing areas 1613h of the RAM 1613, so that the game ball wins the operating openings 1083 and 1084 ( It is determined whether or not a start prize has been won. If it is determined that the game ball has won the operating opening 1083, 1084, it is determined whether or not the number N of the operation reserved balls of the first specific lamp unit and the symbol display device is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). . When there is a winning at the operation ports 1083 and 1084 and the number N of operation reservation balls is N <4, the operation reservation ball number N is incremented by one. Thereafter, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 1613f are stored in the first area among the free areas of the reserved ball storage area 1613g of the RAM 1613. After the start winning process, the MPU 1611 once ends this timer interrupt process.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S1601 to S1606 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S1609 and S1610 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S1601, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command (for example, a winning detection flag) is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device. Further, when a game time control command or a game state command is set, it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 1143. Further, when an error detection flag (to be described later) is stored in various flag storage areas 1613h of the RAM 1613, an error notification lamp is output to the sound lamp control device 1143, so that the error display lamp unit or the speaker unit is used. A notification to this effect is executed, and error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 1213.

  Here, the first winning detection flag and the second winning detection flag stored in the signal reading process described above will be supplementarily described. If it is determined in step S1601 that the first winning detection flag is present, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device, and a payout of the game ball is executed by the payout device based on this command. On the other hand, in step S1601, no determination is made regarding the presence or absence of the second winning detection flag. The second winning detection flag is based on an erroneous determination due to an abnormality of the detection signal, and the occurrence of damage in the game hall is suppressed by not paying out the game ball based on this flag.

  In subsequent step S1602, the variation type counter CS is updated, and then in step S1603, a first specific lamp unit control process for switching the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit is executed. Since the update process in step S1602 and the control process in step S1603 are the same as the update process in step S502 and the control process in step S503 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  After the first specific lamp unit control process, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S1604. In the big prize opening / closing process, the big prize opening of the variable prize winning device 1082 is opened or closed in the case of a big hit state. That is, it is determined whether the big winning opening is opened for each round of the big hit state, and whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of game balls have been won in the big winning opening. The details of the special prize opening / closing process will be described later.

  Thereafter, a second specific lamp unit control process is executed in step S1605, and a game ball launch control process is executed in subsequent step S1606. Since the control processing in step S1605 and the control processing in step S1606 are the same as the control processing in step S505 and the control processing in step S506 described in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Thereafter, in step S1607, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is stored in the RAM 1613. If the power failure flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1608 to determine whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, the interrupt criterion in which the timer interrupt processing is set a plurality of times from the start of the previous normal processing. It is determined whether or not the number of times (specifically, twice) has occurred. Specifically, to grasp the number of times of timer interruption, the value of the interruption number counter in the various counter areas 1613e of the RAM 1613 is incremented by 1 every time the timer interruption is started, and immediately before the processing of step S1601 is executed. At the timing, the counter value is cleared to 0 (initialized). If the timer interrupt processing has not occurred for the reference number of times, the process advances to step S1609.

  In step S1609, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in the subsequent step S1610, the variation type counter CS is updated. Since the update processes in steps S1609 and S1610 are the same as the update processes in steps S509 and S510 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1607, and the above-described process is repeated from the start of the previous normal process until the timer interrupt process is generated for the interrupt reference number. When the interrupt reference number is reached, the process returns to step S1601. That is, when the power failure flag is not stored, the various processes in steps S1601 to S1606 are repeatedly executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Note that the period is not limited to 4 msec as long as the progress of the game can be well controlled.

  When the power failure flag is stored, the power failure process after step S1611 is executed. That is, in step S1611, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S1612. After the access to the RAM 1613 is prohibited in step S1613, the power supply is completely shut down and the process is performed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

(Big prize opening / closing process)
Here, with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, supplementary explanation will be given on the special winning opening / closing process shown in step S1604.

  In the big prize opening / closing process, it is first determined in step S1701 whether or not a big win has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a flag indicating a big hit is stored in various flag storage areas 1613h of the RAM 1613. If a negative determination is made in step S1701, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1702.

  In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 1261 (opening / closing door 1270) is being opened. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable winning device 1082.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, that is, if the big prize opening 1261 is being opened, the process proceeds to step S1703 to determine whether or not the value of the open timer counter OTC is “0”. If the value of the open timer counter OTC is not “0”, whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 1261 is stored in the various flag storage areas 1613h in step S1704, and the first detection flag or the second detection flag is stored. Judgment by whether or not. If no winning has occurred, the main prize opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, that is, if the first detection flag or the second detection flag is stored in the various flag storage area 1613h, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1 in step S1705. In S1706, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is “3”. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls assumed to have won in the current round is “7”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1706, that is, if the value of the winning counter PC is “3”, the reading mode switching flag is stored in the various flag storage area 1613h of the RAM 1613 in the subsequent step S1707, and then step S1708. Each of the detection flags is erased at and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. As a result, the signal reading process for the variable winning device 1082 executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) is switched from the first reading mode to the second reading mode. That is, the crime prevention function is temporarily strengthened.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1706, the process proceeds to step S1709. In step S1709, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is “0”. If it is not “0”, each detection flag is erased in step S1708, and then the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1703 that the value of the open timer counter OTC is “0”, or if it is determined in step S1709 that the value of the winning counter PC is “0”, the big prize opening closing condition is satisfied. It means that it was established. In such a case, the solenoid of the variable winning device 1082 is brought into a non-excited state in order to close the special winning opening 1261 in step S1710.

  In the subsequent step S1711, the value of the round counter RC is decremented by "1", and in step S1712, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0". If the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the value of the closing timer counter CTC is updated to “2000” in step S1713, and a closing command is set in the subsequent step S1714.

  The set closing command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 1143 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 34). Based on the received closing command, the sound lamp control device 1143 identifies that the opening of the big winning opening 1261 for one round has been completed. Also, the sound lamp control device 1143 transmits the closing command to the display control device while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 1261 for one round has been completed, and executes processing corresponding thereto.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1712 (when the round counter RC is “0”), or after a close command is set in step S1714, each detection flag is erased in step S1708, and the main prize winning opening The opening / closing process is terminated.

  Next, a case where a negative determination is made in step S1702, that is, a case where the big prize opening 1261 is closed will be described.

  After making a negative determination in step S1702, it is determined in step S1715 whether or not the closing timer counter CTC is “500”. That is, it is determined whether or not 2 seconds have elapsed since the big prize opening 1261 was closed between rounds.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1715, the error determination process in step S1716 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S1717. If a negative determination is made in step S1715, the process proceeds to step S1717 without going through step S1716. The error determination process in step S1716 will be described later.

  In step S1717, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1717, the big win flag is erased in step S1718, and then each detection flag is erased in step S1708, and then the big prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1717, that is, when the big hit is continuing, in subsequent step S1719, whether or not the closing timer counter CTC is “0”, that is, the big prize opening 1261 is opened. It is determined whether it is timing.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1719, each detection flag is deleted in step S1708, and then the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1719, the flow proceeds to subsequent step S1720 to execute a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, the solenoid of the variable winning device 1082 is energized to open the special winning opening 1261 and the open / close door 1270 is moved to the open position.

  In a succeeding step S1721, setting processing for each round is executed. In the setting process for each round, “15000” (that is, 30 sec) is set in the open timer counter OTC. The count value set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 29) is started, that is, every 2 msec. Further, in order to count the number of winning game balls to the big prize opening 1261, “10” is set to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 1613 e of the RAM 1613.

  Thereafter, an opening command is set in step S1722, and each detection flag is erased in subsequent step S1708, and then the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The release command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 1143 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 34). The sound lamp control device 1143 changes the content of the effect in the display lamp part and the speaker part provided in the front door frame based on the received opening command. Also, the sound lamp control device 1143 transmits the release command to the display control device while maintaining the information form. In the display control device, the effect in the symbol display device is switched based on the received release command.

(Error judgment processing)
Here, the error determination processing in step S1716 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the error determination process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the error counter EC of the various counter areas 1613e is greater than 2.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1802, and an error notification flag is stored in various flag storage areas 1613h of the RAM 1613. When the error notification flag is stored in this way, the error display lamp unit or the speaker unit is used by outputting a notification command to the audio lamp control device 1143 in step S1601 in the normal procedure (FIG. 34). Notification to that effect and output error information to the hall computer via the external terminal board 1213.

  After storing the error notification flag in step S1802, the error counter EC is updated to “0” in subsequent step S1803.

  After updating the error counter EC in step S1803, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1804.

  In step S1804, the second detection counter DC2 is reset ("0" is set), and then in step S1805, the determination timer counter JTC is reset ("0" is set). Then, after erasing the reading mode switching flag in step S1806, the error determination process is terminated. As described above, by clearing the reading mode switching flag, the signal reading processing for the variable prize device 1082 executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 29) is switched from the second signal reading mode to the first signal reading mode. It will be.

  Next, specific examples of the winning determination and error determination modes when the game ball passes the detection sensor 1350 (specifically, the detection area DE) will be described based on the timing charts of FIGS. FIG. 37 shows a state where noise is constantly generated while the special winning opening is open, and FIGS. 38 and 39 show a state where noise is locally generated during the opening of the special winning opening. 37A to 39A are schematic diagrams illustrating noise, and FIGS. 37B to 39B are schematic diagrams illustrating signals generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 of the detection sensor 1350. FIGS. 37 (c) to 39 (c) are schematic diagrams showing signals input from the detection sensor 1350 to the main controller 1162, and FIGS. 37 (d) to 39 (d) are determined to have won the big prize opening. 37 (e) to 39 (e) are schematic diagrams showing the state of the variable winning device 1082, and FIGS. 37 (f) to 39 (f) are main controller 1162. Schematic diagram showing detection signal reading mode, FIGS. 37 (g) to 39 (g) are schematic diagrams showing values of determination timer counter JTC, and FIGS. 37 (h) to 39 (h) are values of error counter EC. FIG.

  First, with reference to FIG. 37, a description will be given of a case where noise is constantly generated so as to match the open period of the variable winning device 1082. Specifically, a case where noise having the same frequency and the same amplitude as the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 of the detection sensor 1350 is periodically generated and mixed with the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 will be described. .

  At the timing of ta1 after winning the jackpot and the variable winning device 1082 is switched to the open state, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 of the detection sensor 1350 is attenuated by the game ball reaching the detection area DE. . Thereby, the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 rises from the LOW level to the HI level.

  Thereafter, in the timer interrupt process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at the timing ta2 that the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE. That is, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the special winning opening 1261. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1” and changed from “0” to “1”.

  If noise is mixed at the timing ta3 when 4 msec has elapsed from the timing ta2, the detection signal falls from the HI level to the LOW level in response to the mixed noise. As a result, the passage determination by the detection counter is validated and the next HI level signal input wait state is entered.

  After that, when noise disappears at the timing of ta4 after a period of 2 msec or more, the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 returns from the LOW level to the HI level, and the winning determination using the first detection counter DC1 is executed. Then, it is erroneously determined that a winning game ball has occurred at the timing of ta5. In other words, the detection signal corresponding to one game ball is actually differentiated by noise, so that it is erroneously determined that the second game ball has been won. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1” and changed from “1” to “2”.

  When noise is mixed again at the subsequent ta6 timing, the detection signal temporarily falls to the LOW level in the same manner as at the ta3 timing, and the detection signal returns to the HI level when the noise disappears at the ta7 timing. Then, when it is erroneously determined that a game ball win has occurred again at the timing of ta8, the value of the win counter PC is incremented by "1" and changed from "2" to "3".

  For the subsequent ta9 to ta11, an event similar to the previously described ta4 to ta6 occurs, and as a result, the value of the winning counter PC is further added and changed from “3” to “4”.

  When the game ball finishes passing through the detection area DE of the detection sensor 1350 at the subsequent timing of ta12, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 returns to the original state, and the detection output from the detection sensor 1350 The signal falls to the LOW level.

  After that, the noise continues to be generated before the next game ball reaches the detection sensor 1350 (specifically, the detection area DE), but the detection signal does not change due to the noise during this period.

  Subsequently, at the timing of ta13 when the second game ball that subsequently flows into the variable winning device 1082 reaches the detection area DE, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 of the detection sensor 1350 is attenuated. Thereby, the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 rises from the LOW level to the HI level.

  Thereafter, in the timer interrupt process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at the timing ta14 that the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE. That is, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the special winning opening 1261. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1” and changed from “4” to “5”.

  In the subsequent period from ta15 to ta17 and the period from ta18 to ta20, an event similar to the period from ta4 to ta6 described above occurs. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is “5” → “6” → “7 Are added in this order.

  At the timing ta20, the value of the winning counter PC becomes “7”, so that the detection signal reading mode is switched from the first signal reading mode to the second signal reading mode. Thereby, the crime prevention function is temporarily strengthened.

  If noise is mixed at the timing of ta21 when 2 msec has elapsed from the timing of ta20, the detection signal falls from the HI level to the LOW level in response to the mixed noise. As a result, the passage determination by the detection counter is validated and the next HI level signal input wait state is entered.

  Thereafter, when the noise disappears at the timing of ta22 after a period of 2 msec or more, the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 returns from the LOW level to the HI level, and the winning determination using the first detection counter DC1 is executed. Then, at the timing of the following ta23, it is erroneously determined that a game ball winning has occurred. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1” and changed from “7” to “8”.

  At the timing of ta23, the detection signal reading mode is switched to the second reading mode. Therefore, “9” is set in the determination timer counter JTC based on the winning determination by the first detection counter DC1. As a result, during a period of 18 msec from the timing of ta23, it is possible to monitor whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection signal, and for example, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of erroneous detection due to noise mixing.

  When the game ball finishes passing through the detection area DE of the detection sensor 1350 at the subsequent timing of ta14, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 returns to the original state, and the detection output from the detection sensor 1350. The signal falls to the LOW level.

  Thereafter, the noise is continuously generated until the next game ball reaches the detection sensor 1350 (specifically, the detection area DE), but the detection signal does not fall to the LOW level due to the noise during this period. . That is, no winning determination is made by these noises, and the error counter EC is maintained at 0.

  At the subsequent timing of ta25, the third game ball reaches the detection area DE, and the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 of the detection sensor 1350 is attenuated. Thereby, the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 rises from the LOW level to the HI level. At this timing, the determination timer counter JTC has returned to “0” again, and is in a non-monitoring state in which the abnormality of the detection signal is not monitored, and is in a state of waiting for the next winning.

  Thereafter, in the timer interrupt processing (specifically, signal reading processing), it is confirmed at the timing ta26 that the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, and the game ball passes the detection area DE. That is, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the special winning opening 1261. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1” and changed from “8” to “9”. As a result, “9” is set again in the judgment timer counter JTC, and then it becomes a monitoring state in which it is possible to monitor whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection signal for 18 msec. For example, the occurrence of erroneous detection due to noise mixing is grasped. It becomes possible.

  When noise is mixed at the timing of ta27 when 2 msec has elapsed from the timing of ta26, the detection signal falls from the HI level to the LOW level in response to the mixed noise. As a result, the passage determination by the detection counter is validated and the next HI level signal input wait state is entered.

  After that, when the noise disappears at the timing ta28 after a period of 2 msec or more, the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 returns from the LOW level to the HI level, and the winning determination using the first detection counter DC1 is executed. Then, at the timing of the subsequent ta29, it is erroneously determined that a winning game ball has occurred. In other words, the detection signal corresponding to one game ball is actually differentiated by noise, so that it is erroneously determined that the second game ball has been won. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1” and changed from “9” to “10”.

  When the value of the winning counter PC reaches “10”, it is determined that the current round has ended, and the variable winning device 1082 is switched to the closed state. As a result, the inflow of game balls to the special winning opening 1261 becomes impossible. At this time, error determination using the second detection counter DC2 is also executed. As a result, the occurrence of an error is confirmed, and the error counter EC is incremented by “1”. Specifically, the error counter EC is updated from “0” to “1”.

  In the subsequent period from ta30 to ta32 and the period from ta33 to ta35, an event similar to the period from ta27 to ta29 described above occurs. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is changed from “10” → “11” → “12 Are added in this order.

  The above-described determination timer counter JTC does not return to “0” during the period ta26 to ta35, and the monitoring of the detection signal is continued during the synchronization. Therefore, the value of the error counter EC is incremented by 1 at the timing of ta32 and the timing of ta35 similarly to the winning counter PC, and becomes “3” at the timing of ta35, and “2” as the error notification threshold value. Will be exceeded.

  When the game ball finishes passing through the detection area DE of the detection sensor 1350 at the subsequent timing of ta36, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 returns to the original state, and the detection output from the detection sensor 1350. The signal falls to the LOW level. Thereby, mixing of noise is avoided.

  The timing of ta37 after the timing of ta36, specifically, the timing of ta37 when 2 seconds have elapsed from the timing of ta29 (timing at which the variable winning device 1082 is closed) is a preparation period for transition to the next round. Error judgment is executed at. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the error counter EC exceeds “2”. In this specific example, the value of the error counter EC is “3”, which exceeds the threshold value. For this reason, notification that there is a possibility that harmful noise is mixed is performed using the error display lamp unit and the speaker unit, and error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 1213. It becomes.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a case where noise is locally generated during the opening period of the variable winning device 1082 will be described. Specifically, a case where noise having the same frequency and the same amplitude as the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 of the detection sensor 1350 is periodically generated and mixed with the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 will be described. .

  At the timing of tb1 after the big win is won and the variable winning device 1082 is switched to the open state, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 of the detection sensor 1350 is attenuated by the game ball reaching the detection area DE. . Thereby, the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 rises from the LOW level to the HI level.

  Thereafter, in the timer interrupt process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at the timing tb2 that the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE. That is, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the special winning opening 1261. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1” and changed from “0” to “1”.

  Thereafter, when the game ball finishes passing through the detection area DE of the detection sensor 1350 at the timing of tb3, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 returns to the original state and is output from the detection sensor 1350. The detection signal falls to the LOW level.

  Thereafter, every time a game ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 1082 passes through the detection area DE, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1”, and the same is true when the sixth game ball reaches the detection area DE. The value of the winning counter PC is changed to “6”.

  Thereafter, when the game ball reaches the detection area DE at the timing of tb4, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 of the detection sensor 1350 is attenuated. Thereby, the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 rises from the LOW level to the HI level.

  In the timer interrupt process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at tb5 that the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE. That is, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the special winning opening 1261. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1” and changed from “6” to “7”.

  At the timing of tb5, the value of the winning counter PC becomes “7”, so that the detection signal reading mode is switched from the first signal reading mode to the second signal reading mode. Thereby, the crime prevention function is temporarily strengthened.

  After that, when the game ball finishes passing through the detection area DE of the detection sensor 1350 at the timing of tb6, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 returns to the original state and is output from the detection sensor 1350. The detection signal falls to the LOW level. After this, noise is generated, but the detection signal does not change due to the noise at least until the next game ball reaches the detection area.

  When the eighth game ball reaches the detection area DE at the timing tb7, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 of the detection sensor 1350 is attenuated. Thereby, the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 rises from the LOW level to the HI level.

  In the timer interruption process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at the timing tb8 that the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE. That is, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the special winning opening 1261. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1” and changed from “7” to “8”.

  At the timing tb8, the detection signal reading mode is switched to the second reading mode. Therefore, “9” is set in the determination timer counter JTC based on the winning determination by the first detection counter DC1. As a result, during a period of 18 msec from the timing of tb8, it becomes possible to monitor whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection signal, and for example, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of erroneous detection due to noise mixing.

  When noise is mixed at the timing tb9 when 2 msec has elapsed from the timing tb8, the detection signal falls from the HI level to the LOW level in response to the mixed noise. As a result, the passage determination by the detection counter is validated and the next HI level signal input wait state is entered.

  After that, when the noise disappears at timing tb10 after a period of 2 msec or longer, the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 returns from the LOW level to the HI level, and the winning determination using the first detection counter DC1 is executed. At the subsequent timing of tb11, it is erroneously determined that a winning game ball has occurred. That is, when the detection signal corresponding to the eighth game ball is differentiated by noise, it is erroneously determined that a winning of the ninth game ball has occurred. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1” and changed from “8” to “9”. At this time, error determination using the second detection counter DC2 is also executed. As a result, the occurrence of an error is confirmed, and the error counter EC is incremented by “1”. Specifically, the error counter EC is updated from “0” to “1”.

  When noise is mixed again at the timing of tb12 after 2 msec from the timing of tb11, the detection signal falls from the HI level to the LOW level in response to the mixed noise. As a result, the passage determination by the detection counter is validated and the next HI level signal input wait state is entered.

  After that, when the noise disappears at the timing of tb13 after a period of 2 msec or more, the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 returns from the LOW level to the HI level, and the winning determination using the first detection counter DC1 is executed. At the subsequent timing of tb14, it is erroneously determined that a winning game ball has occurred. In other words, the detection signal corresponding to the eighth game ball is differentiated by noise, so that it is erroneously determined that the winning of the tenth game ball has occurred. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1” and changed from “9” to “10”. At this time, error determination using the second detection counter DC2 is also executed. As a result, the occurrence of an error is confirmed, and the value of the error counter EC is incremented by “1”. Specifically, the value of the error counter EC is updated from “1” to “2”.

  Further, at the timing of tb14, when the value of the winning counter PC reaches “10”, it is determined that the current round has ended, and the variable winning device 1082 is switched to the closed state. As a result, the inflow of game balls to the special winning opening 1261 becomes impossible.

  In the subsequent period from tb15 to tb17, the determination timer counter JTC described above does not return to “0” in the period from tb8 to tb17, and monitoring of error occurrence is continued during the same period. For this reason, during the same period, an event similar to the previously described period tb9 to tb11 occurs. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is added from “10” to “11” and the value of the error counter EC. Is updated from “2” to “3”. As a result, the value of the error counter EC exceeds “2” as the error notification threshold.

  When the game ball finishes passing through the detection area DE of the detection sensor 1350 at the subsequent timing tb18, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 returns to the original state, and the detection output from the detection sensor 1350. The signal falls to the LOW level. Thereby, mixing of noise is avoided.

  At the timing of tb19 after the timing of tb18, specifically, at the timing of tb19 when 2 seconds have elapsed from the timing of tb14 (timing at which the variable winning device 1082 is closed), this is a preparation period for transition to the next round. Error judgment is executed at. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the error counter EC exceeds “2”. In this specific example, the value of the error counter EC is “3”, which exceeds the threshold value. For this reason, notification that there is a possibility that harmful noise is mixed is performed using the error display lamp unit and the speaker unit, and error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 1213. It becomes.

  Next, referring to FIG. 39, during the opening period of the variable winning device 1082, noise is generated locally so as to estimate the timing at which the tenth game ball flows into the variable winning device 1082, in particular. The case will be described. Specifically, a case where noise having the same frequency and the same amplitude as the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 of the detection sensor 1350 is periodically generated and mixed with the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 will be described. .

  At the timing of tc1 after the big win is won and the variable winning device 1082 is switched to the open state, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 of the detection sensor 1350 is attenuated by the game ball reaching the detection area DE. . Thereby, the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 rises from the LOW level to the HI level.

  Thereafter, in the timer interruption process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at the timing of tc2 that the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE. That is, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the special winning opening 1261. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1” and changed from “0” to “1”.

  Thereafter, when the game ball finishes passing through the detection area DE of the detection sensor 1350 at the timing of tc3, the high frequency generated in the oscillation circuit 1660 returns to the original state and is output from the detection sensor 1350. The detection signal falls to the LOW level.

  Thereafter, every time a game ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 1082 passes through the detection area DE, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1”, and the same is true when the sixth game ball reaches the detection area DE. The value of the winning counter PC is changed to “6”.

  Thereafter, when the game ball reaches the detection area DE at the timing of tc4, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 of the detection sensor 1350 is attenuated. Thereby, the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 rises from the LOW level to the HI level.

  In the timer interruption process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at the timing tc5 that the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE. That is, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the special winning opening 1261. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1” and changed from “6” to “7”.

  At the timing of tc5, the value of the winning counter PC becomes “7”, so that the detection signal reading mode is switched from the first signal reading mode to the second signal reading mode. Thereby, the crime prevention function is temporarily strengthened.

  After that, when the game ball finishes passing through the detection area DE of the detection sensor 1350 at the timing of tc6, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 returns to the original state and is output from the detection sensor 1350. The detection signal falls to the LOW level. After this, noise is generated, but the detection signal does not change due to the noise at least until the next game ball reaches the detection area.

  When the tenth game ball reaches the detection area DE at the timing of tc7, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 1660 of the detection sensor 1350 is attenuated. Thereby, the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 rises from the LOW level to the HI level.

  In the timer interruption process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at tc8 that the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE. That is, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the special winning opening 1261. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1” and changed from “9” to “10”.

  At the same timing tc8, when the value of the winning counter PC reaches “10”, it is determined that the current round has ended, and the variable winning device 1082 is switched to the closed state. As a result, the inflow of game balls to the special winning opening 1261 becomes impossible.

  Also, at the timing of tc8, the detection signal reading mode is switched to the second reading mode. Therefore, “9” is set in the determination timer counter JTC based on the winning determination by the first detection counter DC1. As a result, it is possible to monitor whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection signal for 18 msec from the timing of tc8, and for example, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of a false detection due to noise mixing.

  If noise is mixed at the timing of tc9 when 2 msec has elapsed from the timing of tc8, the detection signal falls from the HI level to the LOW level in response to the mixed noise. As a result, the passage determination by the detection counter is validated and the next HI level signal input wait state is entered.

  After that, when the noise disappears at the timing of tc10 after a period of 2 msec or more, the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 returns from the LOW level to the HI level, and the winning determination using the first detection counter DC1 is executed. At the subsequent timing of tc11, it is erroneously determined that a winning game ball has occurred. That is, when the detection signal corresponding to the tenth game ball is differentiated by noise, it is erroneously determined that the eleventh game ball has been won. As a result, the value of the winning counter PC is incremented by “1” and changed from “10” to “11”. At this time, error determination using the second detection counter DC2 is also executed. As a result, the occurrence of an error is confirmed, and the error counter EC is incremented by “1”. Specifically, the error counter EC is updated from “0” to “1”.

  In the subsequent periods tc12 to tc14 and tc15 to tc17, the above-described determination timer counter JTC does not return to “0”, and the monitoring of the detection signal is continued in both periods. Therefore, in each period, an event similar to that of the period tc9 to tc11 described above occurs, and as a result, the value of the winning counter PC is added in the order of “11” → “12” → “13” The value of the error counter EC is updated from “1” → “2” → “3”. As a result, the value of the error counter EC exceeds “2” as the error notification threshold.

  When the game ball finishes passing through the detection area DE of the detection sensor 1350 at the subsequent timing tc18, the high frequency generated in the oscillation circuit 1660 returns to the original state, and the detection output from the detection sensor 1350 is performed. The signal falls to the LOW level. Thereby, mixing of noise is avoided.

  The timing of tc19 after the timing of tc18, specifically, the timing of tc19 when 2 seconds have elapsed from the timing of tc8 (timing at which the variable winning device 1082 is closed) is a preparation period for transition to the next round. Error judgment is executed at. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the error counter EC exceeds “2”. In this specific example, the value of the error counter EC is “3”, which exceeds the threshold value. For this reason, notification that there is a possibility that harmful noise is mixed is performed using the error display lamp unit and the speaker unit, and error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 1213. It becomes.

  According to the second embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  A game ball flowing down the game area PE flows into the big prize opening 1261 and passes through the detection area DE, whereby a predetermined detection signal is output from the detection sensor 1350. Based on this detection signal, the passage determination of the game ball in the detection area DE is executed, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the detection area DE, a privilege (specifically, the payout of the game ball) is given to the player. Is granted. When the number of game balls determined to pass reaches a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment), variable winning device 1082 (specifically, open / close door 1270) is switched from the open state to the closed state. This prevents further game balls from being won. As described above, in a gaming machine that determines whether or not a privilege is granted based on a detection signal, there may be a disadvantage that an excessive privilege is given if an erroneous determination occurs if harmful noise or the like is mixed in the detection signal. This is not preferable because it may cause a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine.

  Regarding the mixing of such noise and the like, it is assumed that there are cases where the noise is accidentally mixed and cases where the detection signal is intentionally mixed in an attempt to falsify the detection signal. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, the abnormality of the detection signal due to the mixing of the noise or the like is monitored by the signal determination preparation process (S1412) and the error determination process (S1716) executed by the MPU 1611 of the main controller 1162. Thus, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of the abnormality at an early stage and suitably suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage caused by the abnormality. Thereby, it can contribute to the reliability improvement and crime prevention improvement of a gaming machine.

  In addition, when a signal is altered for the purpose of fraud, it may be possible to bias the timing at which the fraud is likely to occur by efficiently obtaining as much gain as possible. In particular, in a configuration in which winning of game balls is prevented by reaching the predetermined number of game balls determined to win, it is assumed that the bias is likely to be significant. By mixing noise or the like into the detection signal and dividing the detection signal into a plurality of detection signals, as if a plurality of game balls passed through the detection area DE when one game ball passed through the detection area DE. There is a possibility that fraudulent acts such as pretending to be performed. If one detection signal can be differentiated into a plurality of signals in this way, a specific number of game balls obtained by adding 1 to the number obtained by subtracting the upper limit number that can be differentiated from the predetermined number will pass after the detection area DE. By performing the above differentiation with the target game ball as a target, it is possible that more than a predetermined number of game balls have passed through the detection area DE, and the privilege may be acquired excessively. That is, it is assumed that there is a difference in the ease of being targeted as a target in a predetermined number of game balls that win the big winning opening 1261.

  Here, particularly in the second embodiment, at a timing when a game ball that is likely to be targeted as a target wins, that is, at a timing at which an abnormality is likely to occur in the detection signal due to the above fraud or the like, The security function can be enhanced by enabling the monitoring by the signal determination preparation process (S1412) and the error determination process (S1716). In other words, fraud prevention effects are suitably improved by enhancing the crime prevention function during the period in which fraud is likely to occur and the period in which damage due to the fraud is likely to increase. You can enjoy it.

  For example, the above-described detection signal can be constantly monitored. In this case, it is expected that the crime prevention will be improved, but an increase in the control load due to this will be significant. Therefore, the above-described crime prevention property is ensured by adopting a configuration in which the monitoring state and the non-monitoring state can be switched as described above, and the monitoring is performed in a period during which the possibility of an abnormality due to fraud is high. Thus, it is possible to suppress an increase in the control load caused by it.

  When the above-described fraud (detection signal differentiation) is performed, it is assumed that it is effective to aim at the game ball to be won last in each round. However, the flow path of the game balls is diversified by nails or the like arranged in the game area, and the prize winning opening 1261 is horizontally long. In the prize winning opening 1261, a plurality of game balls are simultaneously used. It is assumed that it is difficult to try to differentiate signals targeting only the last game ball. Therefore, it is assumed that measures are taken such as obtaining illegal game balls efficiently by setting a plurality of game balls to be fraudulent. In other words, as a result of differentiating the detection signals, it is assumed that a countermeasure is taken to increase the number of fraudulent targets to some extent so that the number of game balls to be determined to win exceeds a predetermined number.

  In this regard, according to the present embodiment, a predetermined detection signal is output from the detection sensor 1350 for the number of game balls determined to have passed through the detection area DE after the opening / closing door 1270 is switched to the open state. When the specific number obtained by adding 1 to the number obtained by subtracting the upper limit number of game balls that can be determined to have passed the detection area DE in the period from the predetermined number is reached, signal determination preparation processing (S1412) and error determination processing ( In this configuration, the monitoring according to S1716) is validated. As a result, in a period when there is a possibility that a privilege exceeding the privilege that can normally be obtained by the above-mentioned fraudulent activity may be obtained, the defense function against the fraudulent activity can be suitably exhibited, and the security function is secured. It is possible to suitably achieve both control load suppression.

<Third Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when a detection ball is detected by a detection sensor, a game ball is sent to the player based on the detection information. However, in the present embodiment, the configuration relating to ball detection in the variable winning device is different from the above embodiments. Accordingly, hereinafter, the different configuration will be described supplementally based on FIGS. 40, 41 and 42. FIG. 40 is a rear view showing the configuration of the game board according to the third embodiment, FIG. 41 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in FIG. 40, and FIG. 42 is a view taken in the direction of arrow F in FIG. In FIG. 42, for convenience, a part of the collective plate is broken so that the inside of the collection passage formed in the collective plate is partially visible. Further, in the following description, description regarding the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is simplified or omitted.

(Configuration related to winning detection in variable winning device)
An opening 2099 having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided at a position below the lower operation port 2084 in the game board 2080. The opening 2099 penetrates in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the game board 2080, and the opening cross section is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A variable winning device 2082 is assembled in the opening 2099 from the front side of the game board 2080.

  The variable winning device 2082 includes a guide passage portion 2260 for guiding the game ball flowing into the opening portion 2099 to the back side of the game board 2080, and a forward opening portion of the guide passage portion 2260 (hereinafter referred to as a big prize opening 2261). ) And an open / close door 2270 formed in accordance with the above. The open / close door 2270 has a closed position in which the game ball cannot flow into the prize winning opening 2261 by closing the prize winning opening 2261 and an open position that allows the game ball to flow into the prize winning opening 2261. It is provided to be switchable. Specifically, the opening / closing door 2270 is rotatably provided and biased toward the closed position. Due to this urging force, the opening / closing door 2270 is in a standby state in the closed position.

  The variable winning device 2082 includes a drive unit (specifically, a solenoid) that is electrically connected to the main controller 2162. When a big hit occurs, a drive signal is input from the main controller 2162 to drive the solenoid, and the open / close door 2270 is pushed to the open position by the output shaft of the solenoid. As a result, the opening / closing door 2270 moves to the open position against the urging force (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 41).

  Thus, in a state where the opening / closing door 2270 is opened, the game ball flowing down the game area PE moves along the plate surface of the opening / closing door 2270. Thereby, winning to the big winning opening 2261 is facilitated. In other words, the opening / closing door 2270 is provided with a support function that supports the inflow of game balls to the winning prize opening 2261, and the opening / closing door 2270 is arranged at the open position, thereby enabling the support function.

  Behind the guide passage portion 2260, a prize winning collection passage portion 2310 for collecting game balls flowing out from the guide passage portion 2260 is provided, and is partitioned by the prize winning collection passage portion 2310. A part of the recovery passage 2151 is constituted by the passage.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the winning prize collection passage portion 2310 includes an upstream passage portion 2320 into which a game ball that has flowed out from the guide passage portion 2260 flows, and a downstream passage portion 2330 that continues to the upstream passage portion 2320. have.

  The upstream passage portion 2320 extends in the horizontal direction (specifically, the left-right direction in the pachinko machine) in the same manner as the big prize opening 2261. The upstream side passage portion 2320 faces the front side wall portion 2321 across a front side wall portion 2321 that covers the guide passage 2265 of the guide passage portion 2260 from the rear and a game ball passage area (hereinafter referred to as an upstream passage 2325). And a rear side wall portion 2322.

  The front side wall portion 2321 is formed with a receiving port 2323 that is open to the guide passage portion 2260 side, and a game ball flows from the guide passage 2265 to the upstream passage 2325 through the receiving port 2323.

  In the present embodiment, a device for reducing the momentum of the game ball flowing from the guide passage 2265 into the upstream passage 2325 is provided. Here, the configuration related to the de-energization of game balls will be described.

  The guide passage portion 2260 has a long plate-like bottom portion 2262 provided along the bottom surface of the opening 2099. As shown in FIG. 42, a groove 2263 is formed in a portion of the bottom portion 2262 that is in front of the receiving port 2323 of the collection passage unit 2311 so as to continue to the receiving port 2323. More specifically, a groove 2263 that extends rearward and communicates with the receiving port 2323 is formed on one side of the bottom 2262.

  Further, the upper surface of the bottom portion 2262 is inclined downward toward the groove portion 2263. For this reason, the game ball that has flowed from the special winning opening 2261 flows into the groove portion 2263 along the inclination of the bottom portion 2262. The bottom surface of the groove portion 2263 gently falls rearward, and the game ball that has flowed into the groove portion 2263 moves rearward along the bottom surface and flows into the winning prize collection passage portion 2310 through the receiving port 2323. By passing through the groove portion 2263 in this manner, the movement of the game ball flowing in from the big winning opening 2261 in the passage direction of the upstream passage 2325 is suppressed.

  The game ball that has flowed into the winning prize collection passage portion 2310 collides with the rear side wall portion 2322 of the upstream passage portion 2320. Thereby, the momentum in the front-back direction is weakened.

  In this way, the game ball whose flow force has been weakened moves along the upstream passage 2325 to the downstream side.

  As shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of detection sensors 2350 are arranged in the downstream passage portion 2330. The detection sensor 2350 is integrated with the assembly plate 2150 by being fixed in a state of being accommodated in a sensor housing portion formed on the assembly plate 2150 (see FIG. 40). These detection sensors 2350 detect the passage of the game ball. Thus, if attention is paid to the fact that the game ball is detected in the downstream passage portion 2330, the downstream passage portion 2330 can also be referred to as a ball detection passage portion 2330.

  The downstream passage portion 2330 defines a downstream passage 2335 through which one game ball can pass through the same portion. The downstream passage 2335 has a crank shape that is bent a plurality of times in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine) along the back surface of the game board 2080. Specifically, the downstream passage 2335 includes a first longitudinal passage 2336 and a second longitudinal passage 2338 that extend in the vertical direction, and a lateral passage 2337 that connects both the longitudinal passages 2336 and 2338, and each of these passages 2336. The passage direction changes in the order of the vertical direction → the substantially horizontal direction → the vertical direction at the boundary portion of ˜2338. Thus, by having a plurality of bent portions, variation in the flow speed of the game ball passing through the passage 2335 is suppressed. In other words, the downstream passage 2335 is provided with a function of making the flow velocity of each game ball constant.

  The first vertical passage 2336 communicates with the upstream passage 2325, and the detection sensor 2350 is attached to the upstream portion thereof. A lateral passage 2337 is connected to the first longitudinal passage 2336 from the downstream side, and the game ball that has moved from the first longitudinal passage 2336 to the lateral passage 2337 is guided so that the flow direction is substantially horizontal.

  The horizontal passage 2337 is slightly inclined toward the second vertical passage 2338, and the second vertical passage 2338 is connected to the downstream side thereof. The detection sensor 2350 is attached in the middle of the second vertical passage 2338.

  The detection sensor 2350 has the same configuration as that of the detection sensor 350 shown in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Hereinafter, based on FIG. 42, the relationship between each detection sensor 2350 and the downstream channel | path 2335 is demonstrated supplementarily. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the detection sensor 2350 disposed in the first vertical passage 2336 is referred to as “first detection sensor 2350A”, and the detection sensor 2350 disposed in the second vertical passage 2338 is referred to as “second detection sensor 2350B”. To distinguish.

  The first detection sensor 2350A is disposed in the upstream portion of the first vertical passage 2336, and the second detection sensor 2350B is disposed in the downstream portion of the second vertical passage 2338. The distance L1 from the bottom 2324 that defines the upstream passage 2325 to the first detection region DE1 is set to be smaller than the distance L2 from the bottom 2331 that defines the lateral passage 2337 to the second detection region DE2. ing. More specifically, the distance L1 is set to be approximately 1/4 of the distance L2.

  The vertical movement component of the game medium flowing from the upstream path 2325 to the first vertical path 2336 is set to be substantially zero, and the game medium flowing from the horizontal path 2337 to the second vertical path 2338 The moving component in the vertical direction is also set to be almost zero. For this reason, the game balls that have flowed into the vertical passages 2336 and 2338 are accelerated by their own weight and pass through the detection areas DE1 and DE2. For this reason, the moving speed of the game ball when passing through the first detection area DE1 is approximately half of the moving speed of the game ball when passing through the second detection area DE2. In other words, the period required for the game ball to pass through the first detection area DE1 and the period during which the detection signal is output from the first detection sensor 2350A include the period required for the game ball to pass through the second detection area DE2. This is approximately twice the period in which the detection signal is output from the second detection sensor 2350B.

  The reason why the game ball is configured to flow into the vertical passages 2336 and 2338 via the upstream passage 2325 and the horizontal passage 2337 is as follows. That is, the variation in speed based on the above-described free fall of the game ball is small and is unlikely to cause a variation in the passing speed when passing through the detection area DE. On the other hand, the initial speed variation of the game balls flowing into the vertical passages 2336 and 2338 can be a factor causing the variation in the passing speed as it is. If the drop distance can be set large, it is possible to ignore the variation in the initial speed. However, in consideration of the limited arrangement area of the collection passage 2151, such a response is difficult. It is assumed. Therefore, after passing through the passage extending substantially horizontally, the game balls are caused to flow into the vertical passages 2336 and 2338, so that the initial velocity of the game balls passing through the detection area DE is set to almost zero. Thereby, the initial speed variation becomes dominant, and it is avoided that the moving speed of the game ball greatly varies when passing through the detection area DE.

  Here, the flow of game ball detection as the game progresses will be described.

  The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism reaches the game area PE via the guide rail. When one of the plurality of game balls flows into the upper operation port 83, a jackpot lottery is made. As a result, when the jackpot is won, the opening / closing door 2270 of the variable winning device 2082 is opened, and the prize winning port 2261 is opened. Inflow of game balls is allowed.

  The game ball hitting the open / close door 2270 thus opened is guided along the open / close door 2270 to the big prize opening 2261 and moves rearward along the guide passage 2265. The momentum is weakened by colliding with the front side wall portion 2321 of the winning prize collection passage portion 2310, and flows into the groove portion 2263 along the bottom portion 2262 of the guide passage portion 2260. The game ball that has flowed into the groove 2263 moves rearward along the groove 2263 and flows into the collection passage 2151 through the receiving port 2323. At this time, the game ball collides with the rear side wall portion 2322, and the momentum is weakened again.

  The game ball that has flowed into the recovery passage 2151 (specifically, the upstream passage 2325) flows down along the upstream passage 2325 and flows into the first vertical passage 2336. At this time, by colliding with the wall surface of the passage located on the extension of the upstream passage 2325, the momentum is weakened again. Thereafter, the game ball passes through the detection area DE1 of the first detection sensor 2350A by freely falling through the first vertical passage 2336. A signal obtained by the game ball passing through the detection area DE1 is output to the main controller 2162 via the sensor board → the connector base → the harness.

  The game ball that has flowed down the first vertical passage 2336 collides with a passage wall surface (specifically, the bottom portion 2331) located on the extension of the first vertical passage 2336, and the fall speed obtained by free fall is almost zero. Be defeated. Thereafter, the game ball moves toward the second vertical passage 2338 along the inclination of the horizontal passage 2337.

  The game ball that has reached the second vertical passage 2338 is free-falling along the second vertical passage 2338 and accelerated to a predetermined speed, and then passes through the detection area DE2 of the second detection sensor 2350B. A signal obtained by the game ball passing through the detection area DE2 is output to the main controller 2162 via the sensor board → the connector base → the harness.

(Electrical configuration)
Since the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment, the difference from the first embodiment, more specifically, detection from the detection sensor 2350. The description will focus on the electrical configuration for performing the winning determination based on the information, and the description of the common configuration will be simplified or omitted.

  The MPU 2611 of the main control board 2601 in the main controller 2162 is provided with a first detection counter area 2613a and a second detection counter area 2613b that are used when determining the winning of a game ball. The first detection counter area 2613a is a counter whose maximum value is “2” (hereinafter referred to as a first detection counter DC1 for convenience), and the value is “0” or “1” according to a predetermined condition. , “2”. Specifically, it is reset to “0” by confirming the input of a signal (that is, a LOW level signal) corresponding to the fact that the game ball is not detected in any one process, and then the game ball is When the input of the signal corresponding to the detection (that is, the HI level signal) is continuously confirmed by two processes, “0” → “1” or “1” → “2”. Will be counted up. In this way, when the value of the first detection counter DC1 becomes “2”, it is determined that one game ball has won.

  The second detection counter area 2613b is a counter whose maximum value is “2” (hereinafter referred to as a second detection counter DC2 for convenience), and the value is “0”, “1” according to a predetermined condition. , “2”. Specifically, it is reset to “0” by confirming the input of a signal (specifically, a LOW level signal) corresponding to the fact that the game ball is not detected in any one process, and then the game ball When the input of a signal (specifically, an HI level signal) corresponding to the detection of the signal is continuously confirmed by two processes, the count is incremented so that “1” → “2”. In this way, based on the second detection counter DC2 becoming “2”, it is determined that one game ball has won.

  The check counter area 2613c is a counter (hereinafter referred to as a check counter CC for convenience) having a maximum value “200” and an initial value “100”, and the value is added or subtracted according to a predetermined condition. It is the composition which becomes. Specifically, “1” is incremented when the game ball is won by the first detection counter DC1, and “1” is incremented when the game ball is won by the second detection counter DC2. Subtracted. That is, when the game ball has won normally, the value of the check counter CC settles to the initial value via a temporary change. On the other hand, when the value of the check counter CC remains out of the initial value, it is grasped that the detection signal is not normal. That is, it is understood that there is a possibility that noise or the like is mixed in the detection signal output from one of the detection sensors 2350A and 2350B due to an intentional or accidental factor.

  In addition, the RAM 2613 of the MPU 2611 has an error counter area 2613d and an error counter area 2613d used to determine whether or not the detection signal input from the detection sensor 2350 is normal, that is, whether harmful noise or the like is mixed. A determination timer counter 2613e is provided. The error counter area 2613d is a counter having a maximum value “3” (hereinafter referred to as an error counter EC for convenience), and the value is “0”, “1”, “2” according to a predetermined condition. It becomes the composition which changes with. Specifically, when it is determined in the determination processing for the check counter CC that the value of the check counter CC is out of the initial value, “0” → “1” → “2” → “3” Is counted up by one in the order. In this way, when the value of the error counter EC is “3”, it is understood that the detection signal is not normal. That is, it is understood that noise or the like may be mixed in the detection signal due to intentional or accidental factors.

  The determination timer counter 2613e is a counter that returns to 0 by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the update is performed according to a predetermined update condition (hereinafter referred to as a determination timer counter JTC). The value of the determination timer counter JTC is a timing for executing the update process of the error counter EC described above. Specifically, the counting is started when the opening / closing door 2270 of the variable winning device 2082 is closed, and the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening 2261 when the opening / closing door 2270 is closed is detected by the detection area DE2 of the second detection sensor 2350B. A sufficient value (in this embodiment, “2000”, that is, 4 sec) is set.

  The MPU 2611 includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for jackpot lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining jackpot types such as probability variation jackpots and normal jackpots, and reach when the symbol display device changes and changes. The reach random number counter C3 used for the lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the period for switching the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit, and the symbol in the symbol display device A variation type counter CS for determining a variation display time, and an electric accessory release counter C4 used for lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 89 of the lower working port 2084 is in an electric utility open state are provided. Each counter is used to determine whether or not a big hit has occurred. Since these various counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, and C4 are the same as the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, and C4 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 43 again, an electrical configuration used in various processes when a big hit occurs will be described.

  If it is determined that the jackpot is won as a result of the internal lottery described above, the variable winning device 2082 is switched to the open state. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 2082, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings is defined as one round, and the opening with a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit is repeated.

  The various counter areas 2613f include a round counter RC that counts the rounds that are winning big hits, a winning counter PC that counts the number of winnings, an opening timer counter OTC that counts the opening period during each round, and a closing period between rounds. A closing timer counter CTC for counting is provided.

  The round counter RC is a counter whose maximum value is “15”, and is decremented by 1 every time one round passes. When the round counter reaches “0”, the open mode of the variable winning device 2082 that accompanies the jackpot ends. The winning counter PC is a counter whose maximum value is “10”, and is decremented by one every time it is determined by the first detection counter that the game ball has won. The open timer counter OTC is a counter whose maximum value is “15000”, and is decremented by 1 each time a timer interrupt process described later is performed. When one of the winning counter PC and the open timer counter OTC becomes “0”, one round is completed. Further, the closing timer counter CTC is a counter whose maximum value is “2000”, and is decremented by 1 every time a timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the closing timer counter CTC becomes “0”. It moves to the next round, and the opening / closing door 2270 of the variable winning device 2082 is opened.

(About various processes executed by main controller 2162)
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 2611 of the main controller 2162 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 2611 executes a main process that is activated when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 2611 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec). This period is arbitrary. However, since the timer interrupt processing is set to be executed repeatedly in a short cycle such as confirmation of power interruption signal or fraud detection signal, confirmation of various winnings, etc., other processing is set. It is preferably set shorter than the repetition period of the normal process described later.

  First, in step S2101, signal reading processing is executed. In the signal reading process, the information inputted to the input port is confirmed from the detection sensors provided individually for the general winning opening, the variable winning device 2082, the operation opening 2083, 2084 and the through gate, and each result is confirmed from the confirmation result. The presence or absence of the entrance to the entrance part is specified. Specifically, input of a signal (for example, a LOW level signal) corresponding to not detecting a game ball in any one process is confirmed, and a game ball is detected in the subsequent two processes. When the input of a signal (for example, an HI level signal) corresponding to being performed is continuously confirmed, it is specified that a game ball has entered in the entrance corresponding to the detection sensor. Hereinafter, a part of the signal determination process, specifically, a process based on signals from the detection sensors 2350A and 2350B corresponding to the variable winning device 2082 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Signal reading process)
In the signal reading process, first, a detection signal input process (step S2201 to step S2207) input from the first detection sensor 2350A is performed, and then a detection signal input process (step S2208) input from the second detection sensor 2350B. To Step S2214). Note that the order of reading processing of these detection signals is not limited to this, and the reading processing of the detection signals input from the second detection sensor 2350B may be performed first.

  In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the detection signal input from first detection sensor 2350A is at the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if the detection signal is at the LOW level, the process proceeds to step S2202, where the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated to “0”, and then the second detection sensor. Proceed to signal reading processing for 2350B.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S2201, that is, if the detection signal is at the HI level, the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “1”, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated to “2” in step S2204 (1 After the addition, the process proceeds to step S2205. The affirmative determination in step S2204 indicates that the detection signals are inputted in the order of LOW level → HI level → HI level. Based on the input of such signals, the game ball has passed through the detection area DE1. That is, it is determined that there has been a winning at the big winning opening 2261. In step S2205, the first winning detection flag is set. The first winning detection flag is a flag used when a game ball is paid out based on winning in the big winning opening 2261.

  After the winning detection flag is set in step S2205, the signal reading process for the first detection sensor 2350A is terminated, and the process proceeds to the signal reading process for the second detection sensor 2350B.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “0” or “2”, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “2” in step S2206. It is determined whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2206, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “2”, the signal reading process for the first detection sensor 2350A is terminated, and the second detection sensor 2350B Proceed to signal reading process.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2206, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2207 to update the value of the first detection counter DC1 to “1” (add 1). Thereafter, the process proceeds to a signal reading process for the second detection sensor 2350B.

  Next, a signal reading process for the second detection sensor 2350B will be described.

  After executing the processes of steps S2202, S2205, and S2207, the process proceeds to step S2208 to determine whether or not the detection signal input from the second detection sensor 2350B is at the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, if the detection signal is at the LOW level, the process proceeds to step S2209, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated to “0”, and then the signal reading process is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S2208, that is, if the detection signal is at the HI level, the process proceeds to step S2210. In step S2210, it is determined whether or not the value of the second detection counter DC2 is “1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2210, that is, if the value of the second detection counter DC2 is “1”, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is updated to “2” in step S2211 (1 After the addition, the process proceeds to step S2212. The affirmative determination in step S2210 indicates that the detection signals are input in the order of LOW level → HI level → HI level. Based on the input of such signals, the game ball has passed through the detection area DE2. That is, it is determined that there has been a winning at the big winning opening 2261. In step S2212, the second winning detection flag is set. The second winning detection flag is a flag used when a game ball is paid out based on winning in the big winning opening 2261.

  After the winning detection flag is set in step S2212, the signal reading process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2210, that is, if the value of the second detection counter DC2 is “0” or “2”, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is “2” in step S2213. It is determined whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2213, that is, if the value of the second detection counter DC2 is “2”, the signal reading process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2213, that is, if the value of the second detection counter DC2 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2214 and the value of the second detection counter DC2 is updated to “1” (added by 1). Thereafter, the signal reading process is terminated.

  Referring again to FIG. 44, the timer interrupt process will be described. After executing the signal reading process detailed above, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S2102. In subsequent step S2103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the value of each random number counter is incremented by 1 and it is determined whether or not the added value is an upper limit value. If the added value exceeds the upper limit value, the counter value is set to the initial value. Thereafter, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 2613.

  Here, with respect to the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Since the random number initial value counter CINI is a random value, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 varies. Therefore, the timing at which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 coincides with the winning value is different every time the jackpot random number counter C1 makes a round, so it is difficult to grasp the timing at which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 becomes the winning value. It has become.

  In subsequent step S2104, a through winning process is performed in accordance with winning through the through gate. In the through-winning process, if a winning to the through gate has occurred, it is confirmed that the number of stored item holdings stored in the electronic combination holding area is less than the upper limit number (for example, “4”). As a condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S2103 is stored in the electric utility reservation area. In addition, a process for lighting the on-hold lamp unit corresponding to the number of stored items is stored in the voice lamp control device 2143.

  Thereafter, a start winning process is executed in step S2105. In the start winning process, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for the operating opening is stored in the winning detection flag storing area in the various flag storing areas 2613i of the RAM 2613, whereby the game ball wins the operating openings 2083 and 2084 ( It is determined whether or not a start prize has been won. If it is determined that the game ball has won the operation opening 2083, 2084, it is determined whether or not the number N of the operation holding balls of the first specific lamp unit and the symbol display device is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). . When there is a winning at the operation ports 2083 and 2084 and the number N of operation reservation balls is N <4, the operation reservation ball number N is incremented by one. Thereafter, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 2613g are stored in the first free area of the reserved ball storage area 2613h of the RAM 2613.

  After the start winning process, the MPU 2611 once ends this timer interrupt process.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S2301 to S2306 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S2309 and S2310 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S2301, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device. In addition, when a game time control command or a game state command is set, the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 2143. Furthermore, when an error detection flag (to be described later) is stored in various flag storage areas 2613i of the RAM 2613, the notification command is output to the sound lamp control device 2143, and the error display lamp unit or the speaker unit is used. A notification to this effect is executed, and error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 2213.

  In subsequent step S2302, the variation type counter CS is updated, and in step S2303, a first specific lamp unit control process for switching the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit is executed. In the first specific lamp unit control process, jackpot determination, on / off control of a light source switch of an LED lamp disposed in the first specific lamp unit, and the like are performed. Further, in the first specific lamp unit control process, the variable display setting of the first symbol by the symbol display device is also performed.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 coincides with a winning value that is a predetermined jackpot winning. Further, the type of jackpot is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 (determining whether or not it is a so-called probable big hit). Further, based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the variation type counter CS, the switching display time of the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit and the variation display time of the first symbol are determined. Each time the on-off control of the first specific lamp unit is started in the first specific lamp unit control process, the number of the operation reservation balls N is decremented by 1, and when the operation reservation ball number N is 0, the on / off control is performed. Not started.

  After the first specific lamp unit control process, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S2304. In the big prize opening / closing process, the big prize opening of the variable prize winning device 2082 is opened or closed in the case of a big hit state. That is, it is determined whether the big winning opening is opened for each round of the big hit state, and whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of game balls have been won in the big winning opening. The details of the special prize opening / closing process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S2305, a second specific lamp unit control process for performing a process of switching the color displayed on the second specific lamp unit is executed. In the second specific lamp section control process, switching of the display color in the second specific lamp section is started on the condition that a game ball has won the through gate. At this time, the display color switching time is also set. In addition, the color to be stopped and displayed is set based on the value of the second specific lamp random number counter acquired when the game ball wins the through gate. When a predetermined color is set as the stop-displayed color, the electric accessory attached to the operation ports 2083 and 2084 is opened for a predetermined time after the stop display of the color.

  After step S2305, a game ball launch control process is executed in step S2306. In the game ball launch control process, a game ball is launched toward the game area PE once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply / launch control device. Thus, the game ball launching mechanism 110 is driven. Specifically, the MPU 2611 outputs a firing pulse signal to the power source / launch control device every elapse of a predetermined period. Based on the input of the launch pulse signal, the power supply / launch control device outputs a drive signal (drive voltage) obtained by amplifying the voltage of the launch pulse signal to the solenoid mounted on the game ball launch mechanism. Then, the launch of the game ball is controlled by moving the output shaft of the solenoid to the launch position and the accommodation position.

  Thereafter, in step S2307, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is stored in the RAM 2613. If the power failure flag is not stored, the process advances to step S2308 to determine whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, the interrupt criterion that is set in advance as the timer interrupt processing multiple times from the start of the previous normal processing. It is determined whether or not the number of times (specifically, twice) has occurred. Specifically, the number of timer interruptions is grasped by adding 1 to the value of the interruption number counter in the various counter areas 2613f of the RAM 2613 every time the timer interruption is started, and immediately before the processing of step S2301 is executed. At the timing, the counter value is cleared to 0 (initialized). If the timer interrupt processing has not occurred for the reference number of times, the process advances to step S2309.

  In step S2309, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 (initialized) when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the lottery counter buffer 2613g of the RAM 2613. In step S2310, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared (initialized) to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the lottery counter buffer 2613g of the RAM 2613.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2307, and the above-described process is repeated from the start of the previous normal process until the timer interrupt process occurs for the interrupt reference number. When the interrupt reference number is reached, the process returns to step S2301. That is, when the power failure flag is not stored, various processes in steps S2301 to S2306 are repeatedly executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Note that the period is not limited to 4 msec as long as the progress of the game can be well controlled.

  When the power failure flag is stored, the power failure process after step S2311 is executed. That is, in step S2311, the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, and after that, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S2312, and access to the RAM 2613 is prohibited in step S2313, and then the power supply is completely shut down and processed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

(Big prize opening / closing process)
Here, with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, supplementary explanation will be given for the special winning opening opening / closing process shown in step S2304.

  In the big prize opening / closing process, it is first determined in step S2401 whether or not a big win has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether a flag indicating a big hit is stored in various flag storage areas 2613i of the RAM 2613. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, the process proceeds to an error determination preparation process in step S2402.

  In the error determination preparation process, as shown in FIG. 48A, first, a first winning detection flag indicating that a game ball has passed through the detection area DE1 is stored in various flag storage areas 2613i of the RAM 2613 in S2501. It is determined whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the value of the check counter CC is updated in the subsequent step S2502, specifically, “1” is added. After updating the value of the check counter CC in step S2502, or when a negative determination is made in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2503.

  In step S2503, it is determined whether or not a second winning detection flag indicating that a game ball has passed through the detection area DE2 is stored in various flag storage areas 2613i of the RAM 2613. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the value of the check counter CC is updated, specifically, “1” is subtracted. After the value of the check counter CC is updated in step S2503, or when a negative determination is made in step S2503, the error determination preparation process ends.

  Referring again to FIG. 47, after the error determination preparation process is performed in step S2402, the process proceeds to step S2403 to determine whether or not the special winning opening 2261 (opening / closing door 2270) is open. . Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable winning device 2082.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2403, the process proceeds to step S2404 to execute an error determination process.

  In the error determination process, as shown in FIG. 48B, first, a determination timer counter JTC is updated in step S2601. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the value of the determination timer counter JTC. In the following step 602, it is determined whether or not the value of the determination timer counter JTC is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute error determination after the opening / closing door 2270 is closed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2602, that is, if it is determined that it is not time to perform various processes relating to the following error determination, this error determination process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, that is, if the game ball that has flowed into the big prize opening 2261 at the time when the opening / closing door 2270 is closed will have passed through the detection area DE2, the following steps are performed. In S2603, it is determined whether or not the value of the check counter is a normal value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the check counter CC is out of a predetermined range, specifically, “99” to “101”. As already described, when there is no mixing of noise or the like, the value of the check counter CC in which addition and subtraction are repeated is maintained at “100”. When the value of the check counter CC deviates from “100”, noise or the like may be mixed. However, in this embodiment, an error of 2 or less is allowed by giving a width to the threshold value. doing. This is to consider the possibility that a game ball is passing between the detection areas DE1 and DE2 at the time of executing this error check, and to suppress a sensitive reaction to accidental noise contamination. It is a device.

  If it is determined in step S2603 that the value of the check counter CC is a normal value, that is, “99” to “101”, the error determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the check counter CC is not a normal value, the process proceeds to an error counter update process in step S2604. In the error counter update process, “1” is added to the value of the error counter EC. Thereafter, in step S2605, it is determined whether or not the value of the error counter EC has reached “3”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the value of the error counter EC has not reached “3”, this error determination process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2306, an error notification flag is stored in various flag storage areas 2613i of the RAM 2613 in step S2606, and the error counter EC is updated to “0” in subsequent step S2607. This error determination process ends.

  As shown in FIG. 47, after the error determination process in step S2404 is completed, the process proceeds to step 405, where it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2405, the process proceeds to step S2406 to determine whether or not the value of the closing timer counter CTC is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step 406, a special winning opening opening process is executed in step S2407. Specifically, the solenoid of the variable winning device 2082 is energized to open the special winning opening 2261, and the open / close door 2270 is moved to the open position.

  In a succeeding step S2409, setting processing for each round is executed. In the setting process for each round, “15000” (that is, 30 sec) is set in the open timer counter OTC. The count value set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 44) is started, that is, every 2 msec. Further, in order to count the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 2261, “10” is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 2613f of the RAM 2613.

  Thereafter, an opening command is set in step S2409, and after the first detection flag and the second detection flag are erased in subsequent step S2412, the large winning opening / closing process is ended. The release command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 2143 in step S2301 in the normal process (FIG. 46). The audio lamp control device 2143 changes the effect contents in the display lamp unit and the speaker unit provided in the front door frame based on the received opening command. The sound lamp control device 2143 transmits the release command to the display control device while maintaining the information form. In the display control device, the effect in the symbol display device is switched based on the received release command.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, that is, if the round counter RC is “0”, the value of the error counter EC is updated to “0” in step S2410, and various flags are stored in subsequent step S2411. The jackpot flag stored in the area 2613i is erased and each detection flag is erased in step S2412. Then, the big prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2406, that is, if the closing timer counter CTC is not “0”, each detection flag is deleted in step S2412, and then the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, that is, if the big prize opening is open, the process proceeds to step S2413 to determine whether or not the value of the open timer counter OTC is “0”. If the value of the release timer counter OTC is not “0”, it is determined in step S2414 whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening 2261 based on whether or not the first detection flag is stored. If no winning has occurred, each detection flag is erased in step S2412, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning counter PC in step S2415, and then it is determined in step S2416 whether the value of the winning counter PC is “0” or not. In this case, after erasing each detection flag in step S2412, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2413 that the value of the open timer counter OTC is “0”, or if it is determined in step S2416 that the value of the winning counter PC is “0”, the special winning opening closing condition is It means that it was established. In such a case, in step S2417, the solenoid of the variable winning device 2082 is set to a non-excited state in order to close the special winning opening 2261.

  In subsequent step S2418, "1" is subtracted from the value of round counter RC, and in step S2419, it is determined whether or not the value of round counter RC is "0". If the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the value of the closing timer counter CTC is updated to “2000”, and a closing command is set in the subsequent step S2421.

  The set closing command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 2143 in step S2301 in the normal process (FIG. 46). The sound lamp control device 2143 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 2261 for one round has ended based on the received closing command. Further, the sound lamp control device 2143 transmits the closing command to the display control device while maintaining the information form. The display control device specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 2261 for one round has been completed based on the received closing command, and executes a process corresponding thereto.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2419 (when the round counter RC is “0”), or after setting a close command in step S2421, each detection flag is deleted in step S2412, and the main prize winning opening The opening / closing process is terminated.

  Next, specific examples of the winning determination and signal determination modes when the game ball passes the detection sensors 2350A and 2350B (specifically, the detection areas DE1 and DE2) will be described based on the timing charts of FIGS. FIG. 49 shows a state where noise is not mixed, and FIGS. 50 and 51 show a state where noise is mixed. 49A to 51A are schematic diagrams showing noise, and FIGS. 49B to 51B are generated by the oscillation circuit 2660A of the first detection sensor 2350A (specifically, the seed circuit 2650A). 49 (c) to 51 (c) are schematic diagrams illustrating signals generated by the oscillation circuit 2660B of the second detection sensor 2350B (specifically, the main circuit 2650B), and FIG. 49 (d). ) To 51 (d) are schematic diagrams showing signals input from the first detection sensor 2350A to the main controller 2162, and FIGS. 49 (e) to 51 (e) are the second detection sensor 2350B to the main controller 2162. 49 (f) to FIG. 51 (f) are schematic diagrams showing values of the check counter CC.

  First, a case where noise is not mixed in the detection signal will be described with reference to FIG.

  At the timing ta1, when the game ball reaches the detection area DE1, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 2660A of the first detection sensor 2350A is attenuated. As a result, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 2350A rises from the LOW level to the HI level.

  Thereafter, in the timer interrupt processing (specifically, signal reading processing), it is confirmed at the timing ta2 that the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE1. That is, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the special winning opening 2261. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is incremented by “1” and changed from “100” to “101”.

  Thereafter, at the timing ta3, the game ball passes through the detection area DE1, and the attenuated high frequency returns to the original state. As a result, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 2350A falls from the HI level to the LOW level.

  The game ball that has passed the detection area DE1 flows down the downstream passage 2335 and reaches the detection area DE2 of the second detection sensor 2350B at the timing ta4. Thereby, the high frequency generated in the oscillation circuit 2660B of the second detection sensor 2350B is attenuated, and the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 2350B rises from the LOW level to the HI level.

  Thereafter, in the timer interrupt process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at the timing ta5 that the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE2, that is, It is determined that a winning has occurred at the big winning opening 2261. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is decremented by “1” and returns from “101” to “100”.

  After it is determined that a winning has occurred at the timing ta5, specifically, at the timing ta6 when approximately 30 msec has elapsed from the timing ta4, the gaming ball passes through the detection area DE2, and the attenuated high frequency is the original. Return to the state. As a result, the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 2350B falls from the HI level to the LOW level.

  When the number of game balls determined to have won the grand prize opening 2261 based on the detection signal from the first detection sensor 2350A reaches “10”, the open / close door 2270 of the variable winning device 2082 returns to the closed position. Error determination based on the value of the check counter CC is performed at timing ta7 when 4 seconds have elapsed from this timing. This time, there is no mixing of noise or the like, and the value of the check counter CC is “100”, so the error counter EC is not updated.

  Next, a case where noise is mixed in only one of the detection signals output from both detection sensors 2350A and 2350B will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, a case will be described in which noise having the same frequency and the same amplitude as the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 2660A of the detection sensor 2350A is periodically generated and mixed in the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 2660A. .

  At the timing of tb1, when the game ball reaches the detection area DE1, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 2660A of the first detection sensor 2350A is attenuated. As a result, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 2350A rises from the LOW level to the HI level.

  Thereafter, in the timer interrupt process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at the timing tb2 that the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE1. That is, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the special winning opening 2261. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is incremented by “1” and changed from “100” to “101”.

  If noise is mixed at the timing tb3 when 4 msec has elapsed from the timing tb2, the detection signal falls from the HI level to the LOW level in response to the mixed noise. As a result, the passage determination by the detection counter is validated and the next HI level signal input wait state is entered.

  After that, when noise disappears at timing tb4 after a period of 2 msec or longer, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 2350A returns from the LOW level to the HI level, and the winning determination using the first detection counter DC1 is made. It is executed, and at the timing of the subsequent tb5, it is erroneously determined that a winning game ball has occurred. In other words, the detection signal corresponding to one game ball is actually differentiated by noise, so that it is erroneously determined that the second game ball has been won. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is incremented by “1”, and the value of the check counter becomes “102”.

  When the noise is mixed again at the subsequent timing tb6, the detection signal temporarily falls to the LOW level similarly to the timing tb3, and the detection signal returns to the HI level when the noise disappears at the timing tb7. Then, when it is erroneously determined that a winning of a game ball has occurred again at the timing of tb8, the value of the check counter CC is incremented by “1”. As a result, the value of the check counter becomes “103”.

  In the subsequent period from tb9 to tb11, an event similar to the period from tb4 to tb6 already described occurs, and as a result, the value of the check counter CC is added to “104”.

At the timing of the following tb12, the game ball is detected in the detection area DE1 of the first detection sensor 2350A.
After the signal passes through, the high frequency generated in the oscillation circuit 2660A returns to the original state, and the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 2350A falls to the LOW level.

  Thereafter, the noise continues to occur until the game ball reaches the second detection sensor 2350B (specifically, the detection area DE2), but the detection signal does not fall to the LOW level due to the noise during this period. .

  The game ball that has passed the detection area DE1 flows down the downstream passage 2335 and reaches the detection area DE2 of the second detection sensor 2350B at the timing of tb13. Thereby, the high frequency generated in the oscillation circuit 2660B of the second detection sensor 2350B is attenuated, and the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 2350B rises from the LOW level to the HI level.

  Thereafter, in the timer interruption process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at the timing tb15 that the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE2, that is, It is determined that a winning has occurred at the big winning opening 2261. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is decremented by “1” and updated from “104” to “103”.

  Specifically, after it is determined that the winning is made at tb14, the game ball passes through the detection area DE2 at the timing of tb15 when about 30 msec has elapsed from the timing of tb13, and the attenuated high frequency returns to the original state. . As a result, the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 2350B falls from the HI level to the LOW level.

  Note that, during the period from tb13 to tb15, the above-described noise has already disappeared, so that the differentiation of the detection signal due to noise does not occur unlike the signal output from the first detection sensor 2350A.

  When the number of game balls determined to have won the grand prize opening 2261 based on the detection signal from the first detection sensor 2350A reaches “10”, the open / close door 2270 of the variable winning device 2082 returns to the closed position. Error determination based on the value of the check counter CC is performed at timing tb16 when 4 seconds have elapsed from this timing. Since the value of the check counter CC is “103”, it deviates from the above-described threshold (specifically, “99” to “101”). For this reason, in this round, an erroneous determination occurs due to the influence of noise, and the error counter EC is updated. Here, if the value of the error counter EC becomes “3”, that is, if it is recognized that an erroneous determination due to noise mixing has occurred in at least three rounds, the error notification described above. Will be executed.

  Next, a case where noise is mixed in both detection signals output from both detection sensors 2350A and 2350B will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, noise having the same frequency and the same amplitude as the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuits 2660A and 2660B of the detection sensors 2350A and 2350B is periodically generated, and the same noise is generated at the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuits 2660A and 2660B. The case where it mixes is demonstrated.

  Regarding the timing from tc1 to tc12, it is determined that four winnings are generated by dividing the detection signal indicating the winning of one game ball into four, similarly to the timing from tb1 to tb12. Then, based on the determination result, the value of the check counter CC is added from “100” to “104”.

  In this specific example, since noise is generated so as to cover the detection signal output period of both detection sensors 2350A and 2350B, the detection signal from the second detection sensor 2350B also changes due to noise.

  Specifically, the game ball that has passed the detection area DE1 flows down the downstream passage 2335 and reaches the detection area DE2 of the second detection sensor 2350B at the timing of tc13. Thereby, the high frequency generated in the oscillation circuit 2660B of the second detection sensor 2350B is attenuated, and the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 2350B rises from the LOW level to the HI level.

  Thereafter, in the timer interrupt process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at the timing ta5 that the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE2, that is, It is determined that a winning has occurred at the big winning opening 2261. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is decremented by “1” and updated from “104” to “103”.

  Thereafter, when noise is mixed at the timing of tc15 when 2 msec has elapsed from the timing of tc14, the detection signal falls from the HI level to the LOW level in response to the mixed noise. As a result, the passage determination by the detection counter is validated and the next HI level signal input wait state is entered.

  After that, when the noise disappears at the timing of tb16 after a period of 2 msec or more, the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 2350B returns from the LOW level to the HI level, and the winning determination using the second detection counter DC2 is made. It is executed, and at the timing of the subsequent tc17, it is erroneously determined that a winning game ball has occurred. In other words, the detection signal corresponding to one game ball is actually differentiated by noise, so that it is erroneously determined that the second game ball has been won. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is decremented by “1”, and the value of the check counter becomes “102”.

  After it is determined that a winning has occurred at the timing of tc17, specifically, at the timing of tc18 when approximately 30 msec has elapsed from the timing of tc13, the gaming ball passes through the detection area DE2, and the attenuated high frequency is the original. Return to the state. As a result, the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 2350B falls from the HI level to the LOW level.

  When the number of game balls determined to have won the grand prize opening 2261 based on the detection signal from the first detection sensor 2350A reaches “10”, the open / close door 2270 of the variable winning device 2082 returns to the closed position. From this timing, an error determination based on the value of the check counter CC is performed at the timing of tc19 when 4 seconds have elapsed. Since the value of the check counter CC is “102”, it deviates from the above-described threshold (specifically, “99” to “101”). For this reason, in this round, an erroneous determination occurs due to the influence of noise, and the error counter EC is updated. Here, if the value of the error counter EC becomes “3”, that is, if it is recognized that an erroneous determination due to noise mixing has occurred in at least three rounds, the error notification described above. Will be executed.

  According to the third embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are produced.

  The game balls that have flowed into the big winning opening 2261 are individually detected by the two detection sensors 2350A and 2350B, and the winning determination is made based on the detection signals output from the respective detection sensors 2350A and 2350B. We are trying to improve. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the disadvantage by misdetection can be suppressed and it can contribute to the reliability improvement of a game machine.

  The noise mixed in the signals output from the detection sensors 2350A and 2350B is not only due to an accidental factor, but may be intentionally mixed by an unauthorized person. For example, noise is intentionally generated by emitting high frequencies similar to those generated by the oscillation circuits 2660A and 2660B of the detection sensors 2350A and 2350B to the detection sensors 2350A and 2350B from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Can be mixed. In this regard, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suitably improve the crime prevention function against the fraud by making the output periods of the detection signals output from both the detection sensors 2350A and 2350B different.

  Specifically, since it is configured to detect the passage of the game ball by reducing the amplitude of the high frequency, even if the illegal high frequency is output when the game ball does not flow into the big prize opening 2261, It is difficult to reduce the amplitude of the high frequency. For this reason, it is assumed that the misbehavior emits the above-mentioned fraudulent high frequency in anticipation of the timing at which the game ball flows into the grand prize winning opening 2261. In this way, when noise is mixed in the detection signal, a signal indicating that one game ball has been detected is differentiated into a plurality of signals, and may change as if a plurality of game balls have been detected. As described above, the number of detection signals differentiated can be made different by changing the output period of the detection signals. Thereafter, by comparing the number of game balls detected by each of the detection sensors 2350A and 2350B, it is possible to easily find out the above-described noise contamination.

  In the present embodiment, in particular, when the winning determination is performed based on the detection signals input from the detection sensors 2350A and 2350B, the determination conditions for each determination are the same. As a result, it is possible to distinguish between substantially harmless noise and harmful noise that may affect the progress of the gaming machine. It is not preferable to react sensitively to harmless noise because it hinders the smooth progress of the game, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized by ignoring such noise. In addition, when noise is intentionally mixed by an unauthorized person as described above, such harmful noise can be suitably identified. Thereby, it is possible to facilitate the discovery of fraud.

  In addition, the payout of the game ball based on the winning is executed based on the detection result of the first detection sensor 2350A arranged on the upstream side, and the detection result of the second detection sensor 2350B is not reflected in the payout. Thereby, it is possible to quickly give a privilege at the time of winning a prize.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when a detection ball is detected by a detection sensor, a game ball is sent to the player based on the detection information. However, in the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the ball detection at the operation port is different from that of the first embodiment. In view of this, such a different configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 52 is a rear view showing the configuration of the game board according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 53 is a partial sectional view taken along the line GG of FIG. 52, and FIG. 54 is a view taken in the direction of the arrow H in FIG. In FIG. 54, for convenience, a part of the collective plate is broken so that the inside of the collection passage formed in the collective plate can be partially visually confirmed. Further, in the following description, description regarding the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is simplified or omitted.

(Configuration related to winning detection at the operating port)
As shown in FIG. 52, an upper opening 3098 and a lower opening 3099 are provided below the variable display unit 3086 in the game board 3080 so as to be arranged vertically. Both openings 3098, 3099 are formed so as to penetrate through the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the game board 3080 and have an opening cross-section having a substantially rectangular shape. A working port forming unit 3250 is assembled from the front side of 3080 (see FIG. 53).

  As shown in FIG. 53, the working port forming unit 3250 includes an upper working port forming portion 3260 that forms the upper working port 3083 at the upper opening 3098 and a lower working port 3084 that forms the lower working port 3099. The working port forming portion 3270 is integrated. In addition, it is also possible to provide the upper working port forming portion 3260 and the lower working port forming portion 3270 as separate bodies, and individually attach these working port forming portions 3260 and 3270 to the game board 3080.

  The upper working port forming unit 3260 has an upper intake unit 3261 that takes in a game ball flowing down in the game area PE, and an upper guide that guides the game ball taken in by the upper intake unit 3261 to the back side of the game board 3080. And a passage portion 3262.

  The upper intake portion 3261 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 3080 and is opened upward. Thereby, inflow of game balls from the upper side of the upper intake portion 3261 is allowed, but inflow of game balls from other directions (for example, left and right directions) is disabled. Note that the upper intake portion 3261 may be referred to as an “upper inflow portion 3261” when attention is paid to the point where the game ball flows into the upper intake portion 3261.

  The upper guide passage portion 3262 is open upward and has a bowl shape extending in the thickness direction of the game board 3080, and extends over the front and back surfaces of the game board 3080 by being inserted into the upper opening 3098. . A guide rib 3263 is formed on the bottom surface of the upper guide passage portion 3262 to guide the game ball that has flowed from the upper intake portion 3261 to the back side of the game board 3080. The guide rib 3263 rises upward from the bottom surface of the upper guide passage portion 3262 and forms a protrusion extending from the upper intake portion 3261 to the rear end of the upper guide passage portion 3262.

  The standing tip portion of the guide rib 3263 is inclined downward toward the back side of the game board 3080. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed in from the upper take-in portion 3261 moves toward the back side of the game board 3080 along the inclination of the guide rib 3263. Therefore, the game balls are preferably avoided from staying in the upper guide passage portion 3262.

  The lower working port forming unit 3270 has the same configuration as the upper working port forming unit 3260, that is, a lower capturing unit 3271 that captures a game ball flowing down in the game area PE, and the lower capturing unit 3271. A lower guide passage portion 3272 for guiding the game ball to the back side of the game board 3080.

  The lower intake portion 3271 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 3080 and is opened upward. An upper working port forming portion 3260 is located immediately above the inlet portion of the lower intake portion 3271, and the upper working port forming portion 3260 prevents the inflow of game balls from directly above. Further, the lower working port forming portion 3270 is provided with an electric accessory 3089 so as to sandwich the inlet portion of the lower intake portion 3271 from both the left and right sides, and when the electric accessory 3089 is closed, the electric accessory The clearance dimension between 3089 and the upper working port forming portion 3260 is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. For this reason, as long as the electric combination 3089 is not opened, the inflow of the game ball into the lower operation port formation unit 3270 is blocked by the electric combination 3089 and the upper operation port formation unit 3260. Note that the lower intake portion 3271 may be referred to as a “lower inflow portion 3271” when attention is paid to the point where the game ball flows into the lower intake portion 3271.

  On the bottom surface of the lower guide passage portion 3272, as with the upper guide passage portion 3262, guide ribs 3273 are formed that guide the game balls that have flowed in from the lower intake portion 3271 to the back side of the game board 3080. The guide rib 3273 rises upward from the bottom surface of the lower guide passage portion 3272 and forms a protrusion extending from the lower intake portion 3271 to the rear end of the lower guide passage portion 3272. The standing tip portion of the guide rib 3273 is inclined downward toward the back side of the game board 3080. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed in from the lower intake portion 3271 moves toward the back side of the game board 3080 along the inclination of the guide rib 3273. Therefore, the game balls are preferably avoided from staying in the lower guide passage portion 3272.

  The game balls guided to the rear of the game board 3080 through these guide passage portions 3262 and 3272 reach the collective board 3150. The collective plate 3150 is provided with an upper collection passage portion 3311 for collecting game balls flowing out from the upper guide passage portion 3262 and a lower collection passage portion 3321 for collecting game balls flowing out from the lower guide passage portion 3272. A part of the recovery passage 3151 is constituted by the passages individually formed by the recovery passage portions 3311 and 3321.

  About the upper collection | recovery channel | path part 3311 and the lower side collection | recovery channel | path part 3321, configurations, such as routing of a channel | channel, are a little different. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the lower collection passage portion 3321 and the configuration associated therewith will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, and then the upper collection passage portion 3311 and the accompanying structure will be described in light of the differences from the lower collection passage portion 3321. The structure to perform is demonstrated.

  The lower collection passage portion 3321 has a vertical passage 3322 that extends in a direction intersecting the passage direction of the guide passage 3275 formed by the lower guide passage portion 3272, specifically, in the vertical direction. 3322 communicates with the guide passage 3275.

  The game ball that has flowed in from the lower take-in portion 3271 flows into the vertical passage 3322 through the guide passage 3275 and falls along the vertical passage 3322.

  As shown in FIG. 54, a plurality of detection sensors 3350 are disposed in the middle of the vertical passage 3322. Specifically, two detection sensors 3350 are arranged side by side along the vertical passage 3322. Each of the detection sensors 3350 is integrated with the assembly plate 3150 by being fixed in a state of being accommodated in a sensor housing portion 3326 formed on the assembly plate 3150 (see FIG. 52). These detection sensors 3350 detect the passage of the game ball. In this way, if attention is paid to the fact that the game balls are detected in the lower collection passage portion 3321, the lower collection passage portion 3321 can also be referred to as a “ball detection passage portion 3321”.

  The detection sensor 3350 includes a sensor substrate 3361, a sphere detection unit, a sensor main unit having a connector base, and a case body that accommodates the sensor main unit. Since the configuration is the same as that shown in the embodiment, detailed description is omitted. Note that an oscillation circuit including a capacitor and a coil is formed on the sensor substrate 3361. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the latter is referred to as “detection coil 3364” in order to distinguish the coil and the coil 3364 in the oscillation circuit.

  Here, based on FIG. 53, the relationship between each detection sensor 3350 and the vertical path 3322 is supplementarily demonstrated. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the detection sensor 3350 disposed on the upstream side of the both detection sensors 3350 is referred to as “first detection sensor 3350A”, and the detection sensor 3350 disposed on the downstream side is referred to as “second detection sensor 3350B”. To distinguish.

  As already described, the first detection sensor 3350 </ b> A and the second detection sensor 3350 </ b> B are arranged side by side along the vertical passage 3322. In particular, since both the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B employ a configuration in which a game ball is detected using a change in the magnetic field, a slight amount of interference between the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B may be avoided. It arrange | positions through the clearance gap. For this reason, there may be a time lag before the game ball detected by the first detection sensor 3350A is detected by the second detection sensor 3350B.

  The gap dimension L2 between the first detection sensor 3350A (specifically, its detection area DE1) and the second detection sensor 3350B (specifically, the detection area DE2) is such that the difference in the number of detections caused by the time lag is at most two. Is set to How to set the difference in the number of detections is arbitrary, but it is preferable to set it as small as possible in consideration of the improvement in the response of noise detection described later. Details of the set number will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 again, the upper collection passage portion 3311 and the configuration associated therewith will be described.

  The upper recovery passage portion 3311 is disposed so as to avoid interference with the lower recovery passage portion 3321. Specifically, the upper recovery passage portion 3311 is the same as the horizontal passage 3312 that guides the game balls that have flowed out from the guide passage 3265 defined by the upper guide passage portion 3262 to the side away from the lower recovery passage portion 3321. The vertical passage 3315 communicates with the downstream end of the passage 3312 and extends in a direction intersecting the horizontal passage 3312 (specifically, the vertical direction). A detection sensor 3350 is disposed in the vertical passage 3315. Yes.

  That is, in the lower operation port 3084, the game ball that has passed through the lower guide passage portion 3272 flows directly into the vertical passage 3322 in which the detection sensor 3350 is disposed, whereas in the upper operation port 3083, Is configured such that the game ball that has passed through the upper guide passage portion 3262 flows into the vertical passage 3315 via the horizontal passage 3312.

  The lateral passage 3312 communicates with the guide passage 3265 of the upper guide passage portion 3262 and is inclined downward toward the side away from the communicating portion. A projecting portion 3314 that protrudes upward is formed on the bottom surface of the lower collection passage portion 3321 that forms the horizontal passage 3312, specifically, at a position that is in the middle of the horizontal passage 3312 on the bottom surface. The protrusion 3314 has a function similar to that of the protrusion 3274 of the lower guide passage portion 3272. That is, when a plurality of game balls flow into the lateral passage 3312, it is possible to suppress the game balls from moving in a row and to separate each game ball.

  As described above, when the upper collection passage portion 3311 is routed so as to avoid interference with the lower collection passage portion 3321, the passage distance from the inlet at the upper working port 3083 to the detection sensor 3350 is the lower distance at the lower working port 3084. There is a concern that the responsiveness of the ball detection at the time of winning the upper working port 3083 is lowered by becoming longer than the passage distance from the side taking-in portion 3271 to the detection sensor 3350. That is, it is assumed that a period from when the game ball flows into the upper guide passage portion 3262 to when the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 3350 becomes longer. Such a decrease in responsiveness is not preferable because it can hinder smooth game progress.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, the degree of inclination of the guide rib 3263 of the upper guide passage portion 3262 is increased at a portion closer to the inlet of the upper intake portion 3261, that is, a portion located immediately below the inlet. did. That is, since the upper take-in portion 3261 assumes the inflow of game balls from above, the upper take-in portion can be obtained by diverting the momentum of the fall of the game balls to the movement toward the upper collection passage portion 3311. The arrival time from 3261 to the upper recovery passage portion 3311 is shortened. In this way, even if the game ball is vigorously made to reach the upper collection passage portion 3311, the momentum is weakened by passing through the lateral passage 3312 of the upper collection passage portion 3311. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rampaging at the boundary portion between the horizontal passage 3312 and the vertical passage 3315, and to suppress variations in the falling speed of the game ball in the vertical passage 3315.

  Note that in the lower guide passage portion 3272, the game ball flows directly from the lower guide passage portion 3272 into the vertical passage 3322. Since the protrusion 3274 is disposed in the lower guide passage portion 3272, if excessive momentum is applied to the game ball, the game ball is lifted by passing through the protrusion 3274, and the vertical position is not stabilized. It can flow into the passage 3322. It is assumed that this makes it difficult to adjust the falling speed of the game ball. Therefore, as described above, an attempt to use the momentum of the fall for the backward movement by increasing the inclination of the guide rib around the receiving entrance is stopped at the upper guide passage portion 3262 and the lower guide passage portion 3272. It is better to refrain from applying.

  Incidentally, the detection sensor disposed in the upper collection passage portion 3311 has the same configuration as the detection sensor disposed in the lower collection passage portion 3321. In other words, the sensor accommodation portion 318 of the upper collection passage portion 3311 contains a plurality of detection sensors 3350, and the game ball passes through the detection area DE defined by the cylindrical portion 3362a of the sensor main portion. The signal output from the detection sensor 3350 changes (see FIG. 54). More specifically, the first detection sensor 3350A and the second detection sensor 3350B are arranged side by side along the vertical passage 3315 so that the former is located upstream of the latter, but these detection sensors 3350A and 3350B are related to each other. Detailed description is omitted.

  Here, the flow of game ball detection as the game progresses will be described.

  The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism reaches the game area PE via the guide rail. When one of the plurality of game balls flows into the upper operation port 3083, the game ball collides with the guide rib 3263 of the upper guide passage portion 3262 to use the momentum of the fall to the rear of the pachinko machine 10, That is, it moves toward the upper recovery passage portion 3311.

  The game ball that has reached the upper collection passage portion 3311 collides with the rear side wall surface of the horizontal passage 3312, and its momentum is weakened, and moves toward the vertical passage 3315 along the inclination of the horizontal passage 3312. The game ball that has moved along the bottom surface of the horizontal passage 3312 collides with the passage wall surface of the vertical passage 3315, and its momentum is reduced again, and then falls along the vertical passage 3315 due to its own weight.

  Thus, the game ball falling in the vertical passage 3315 first passes through the detection area DE1 of the first detection sensor 3350A. A signal obtained by the game ball passing through the detection area DE1 is output to the main controller 3162 via the sensor board 3361A → the connector base → the harness.

  The game ball that has passed through the detection area DE1 passes through the detection area DE2 of the second detection sensor 3350B. A signal obtained by the game ball passing through the detection area DE2 is output to the main controller 3162 via the sensor board 3361B → connector base → harness.

  In addition, when a part of the game balls that have reached the game area PE pass through the through gate, an internal lottery is executed. As a result, when the lottery is won, the electric combination 3089 is released for a predetermined period. The game ball that has flowed into the lower operation port 3084 at the timing when the electric accessory 3089 is released in this way has a moving component in the left-right direction and a moving component in the up-down direction. When it flows into 3271, the moving component of the game ball in the left-right direction is absorbed by colliding with the side wall of the lower guide passage portion 3272, and the downward moving component is absorbed by the guide rib 3273 of the lower guide passage portion 3272. It is absorbed by colliding with. The game ball whose momentum has been weakened in this way slowly moves rearward along the guide rib 3273 of the lower guide passage portion 3272. The game balls that have reached the lower collection passage portion 3321 are dropped along the longitudinal passage 3322 by their own weight after the momentum is weakened by colliding with the passage wall surface of the longitudinal passage 3322.

  The game ball falling in the vertical passage 3322 in this way first passes through the detection area DE1 of the first detection sensor 3350A. A signal obtained by the game ball passing through the detection area DE1 is output to the main controller 3162 via the sensor board 3361A → the connector base → the harness.

  The game ball that has passed through the detection area DE1 passes through the detection area DE2 of the second detection sensor 3350B. A signal obtained by the game ball passing through the detection area DE2 is output to the main controller 3162 via the sensor board 3361B → connector base → harness.

  Since the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, the difference from the first embodiment, more specifically, detection from the detection sensor 3350. The description will focus on the electrical configuration for performing the winning determination based on the information, and the description of the common configuration will be omitted.

  First, an electrical configuration for performing winning determination based on detection information from the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B will be described with reference to a block diagram of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 55, an integrated circuit including a main circuit 3650A and an output circuit 3690A is provided on the sensor substrate 3361A of the first detection sensor 3350A.

  The main circuit 3650A has an oscillation circuit 3660A that oscillates a high frequency. The oscillation circuit 3660A includes a coil and a capacitor, and oscillates at a constant frequency (1 MHz in this embodiment) when a constant voltage is applied. The main circuit 3650A includes a detection circuit 3670A to which the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 3660A is input.

  The detection circuit 3670A detects the passage of the sphere by turning on / off the high frequency output by the change in impedance of the detection circuit 3670A accompanying the passage of the sphere, and specifically, the detection coil 3364A and the capacitor 3671A are connected in parallel. It is a connected LC circuit. A signal (analog signal) that has passed through the detection circuit 3670A is input to the processing circuit 3680A that constitutes the main circuit 3650A together with the oscillation circuit 3660A and the detection circuit 3670A. The processing circuit 3680A has a function of converting (binarizing) the signal input from the detection circuit 3670A into either the HI level or the LOW level, and the amplitude of the signal oscillated at the above frequency is a predetermined value. When the threshold value is exceeded (when the sphere is not passing), an HI level signal is output. The signal binarized through the processing circuit 3680A in this way is output to the main control board 3601 through the output circuit 3690A.

  Similarly to the first detection sensor 3350A, an integrated circuit including a main circuit 3650B and an output circuit 3690B is provided on the sensor substrate 3361B of the second detection sensor 3350B.

  The main circuit 3650B includes an oscillation circuit 3660B that oscillates a high frequency. The oscillation circuit 3660B includes a coil and a capacitor, and oscillates at a constant frequency (1 MHz in this embodiment) when a constant voltage is applied. The main circuit 3650B includes a detection circuit 3670B to which the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 3660B is input.

  The detection circuit 3670B detects the passage of the sphere by turning on / off the high-frequency output by the change in impedance of the detection circuit 3670B accompanying the passage of the sphere, and specifically, the detection coil 3364B and the capacitor 3671B are connected in parallel. LC circuit. The signal (analog signal) that has passed through the detection circuit 3670B is input to the processing circuit 3680B that constitutes the main circuit 3650B together with the oscillation circuit 3660B and the detection circuit 3670B. The processing circuit 3680B has a function of converting (binarizing) the signal input from the detection circuit 3670B into either the HI level or the LOW level, and the amplitude of the signal oscillated at the above frequency is a predetermined value. When the threshold value is exceeded (when passing the sphere), an HI level signal is output. The signal binarized through the processing circuit 3680B in this way is output to the main control board 3601 through the output circuit 3690B.

  The first detection sensor 3350A and the second detection sensor 3350B are different in various configurations provided in the detection circuit 3670. And the detection accuracy of a game ball is improved by using these different configurations together. Here, based on FIG.55 and FIG.56, the characteristic structure (difference of both) of 1st detection sensor 3350A and 2nd detection sensor 3350B is demonstrated. 56 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a detection mode in the first detection sensor 3350A, FIG. 56 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a detection mode in the second detection sensor 3350B, and FIG. 56 (1) is a detection circuit 3670. FIG. 56 (2) is a schematic diagram showing a high frequency input to the processing circuit 3680. FIG.

  First, the first detection sensor 3350A will be described. As shown in FIG. 56 (a1), the oscillation circuit 3660A outputs a high-frequency signal having a predetermined frequency F1 (1 MHz), and the resonance frequency f1 determined by the detection coil 3364A and the capacitor 3671A of the detection circuit 3670A is , Which is equivalent to the predetermined frequency F1. Therefore, when the game ball does not pass through the detection area DE1 (hereinafter referred to as “normal time” for convenience), the value of the impedance Z of the detection circuit 3670A is maximized, and the high frequency output from the detection circuit 3670A is high. The amplitude (voltage) is also maximized.

  When the game ball passes through the detection area DE1, the game ball passes through the magnetic field formed by the detection coil 3364A. When the game ball passes through the magnetic field in this way, the inductance in the detection coil 3364A increases, and the resonance frequency f1 in the detection circuit 3670A decreases. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1), the characteristic waveform of the impedance Z with respect to the frequency f in the detection circuit 3670A shifts to the low frequency side (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 56). In this case, the impedance (resistance) with respect to a high frequency of 1 MHz is reduced, and the amplitude of the high frequency is reduced. More specifically, as shown in the timing t1 to the timing t2 in FIG. 56 (a2), the amplitude of the high frequency becomes almost 0 and changes as if the oscillation is temporarily stopped.

  When the amplitude of the high frequency is thus reduced and falls below a predetermined threshold, the change is reflected in the binary signal by the processing circuit 3680A. That is, the detection coil 3364A and the capacitor 3671A of the first detection sensor 3350A are set so that the change in the resonance frequency when the game ball passes through the detection area DE1 is reflected in the signal output from the processing circuit 3680A. Yes. In other words, the threshold value of the processing circuit 3680A described above is set so that the amplitude of the high frequency decreases below the threshold value when the amplitude of the high frequency decreases with the passing of the game ball, and thus the amplitude is the threshold value. If it falls below (that is, during detection), a LOW level signal is input from the processing circuit 3680A to the output circuit 3690A.

  After that, at the timing t2 when the game ball passes the detection area DE1, the resonance frequency in the detection circuit 3670A returns to the original value, so that the impedance of the detection circuit 3670A becomes maximum again, and the high frequency output from the detection circuit 3670A. Has the maximum amplitude (voltage). Accordingly, the high-frequency oscillation that has been temporarily suppressed is resumed, and the HI level signal is input from the processing circuit 3680 to the output circuit 3690 when the amplitude again exceeds the threshold value.

  The binary signal that has passed through the output circuit 3690A of the first detection sensor 3350A is output to the main controller 3162 after HI / LOW is inverted.

  On the other hand, the second detection sensor 3350B has a configuration opposite to that of the first detection sensor 3350A. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (b1), the detection coil 3364B and the capacitor 3671B constituting the detection circuit 3670B of the second detection sensor 3350B have a resonance frequency f2 in the detection circuit 3670B from the oscillation circuit 3660A. It is set to be larger (for example, 1.2 MHz) than the input high frequency F2. Therefore, when the game ball does not pass through the detection area DE2 (hereinafter referred to as “normal time” for the sake of convenience), the value of the impedance Z is kept small, and the amplitude (voltage) of the high frequency output from the detection circuit 3670A is reduced. ) Is almost zero.

When the game ball passes through the detection area DE2, the game ball passes through the magnetic field formed by the detection coil 3364B. When the game ball passes through the magnetic field in this way, the inductance in the detection coil 3364B increases and the resonance frequency f2 in the detection circuit 3670B decreases. The resonance frequency f2 is equivalent to the frequency F2. More specifically,
As shown in FIG. 56 (b1), the characteristic waveform of the impedance Z with respect to the frequency f in the detection circuit 3670B shifts to the low frequency side (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 56). In this case, the impedance (resistance) for a high frequency of 1 MHz increases (maximum), and the amplitude of the high frequency increases (maximum).

  As a result, as shown in the timing t3 to the timing t4 in FIG. 56 (b2), a high frequency (a high frequency whose amplitude is larger than the threshold value) is oscillated with the passing of the game ball. When the amplitude of the high frequency becomes large and exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the change is reflected in the binary signal by the processing circuit 3680B. That is, the detection coil 3364B and the capacitor 3671B of the second detection sensor 3350B are set so that the change in the resonance frequency when the game ball passes through the detection area DE2 is reflected in the signal output from the processing circuit 3680B. Yes. In other words, the threshold value of the processing circuit 3680B described above is set so that the amplitude exceeds the threshold value when the amplitude increases as the game ball passes, and thus the amplitude exceeds the threshold value. In the case (that is, at the time of detection), the HI level signal is input from the processing circuit 3680B to the output circuit 3690B.

  After that, at the timing t4 when the game ball passes the detection area DE2, the impedance of the detection circuit 3670B is reduced again by the return of the resonance frequency to the original value, and the amplitude (voltage) of the high frequency output from the detection circuit 3670B is reduced. ) Becomes smaller. As a result, high-frequency oscillation is suppressed, and the LOW level signal is input from the processing circuit 3680B to the output circuit 3690B when the amplitude falls below the threshold value again.

  The binary signal that has passed through the output circuit 3690B of the second detection sensor 3350B is output to the main controller 3162 while maintaining HI / LOW.

  In this way, the MPU 3611 of the main control board 3601 analyzes the signals input from the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B, thereby performing a winning determination described later. An audio lamp control device 3143 (specifically an audio lamp control board 3624) is connected to the output side of the main control board 3601 (specifically the main control circuit 3602) via a relay terminal board 3623, and an external terminal board 3213. The hall computer is connected through. If an error due to the influence of noise or the like is confirmed in the winning determination, a notification command is output to the sound lamp control device 3143 to notify that the error has occurred, and the error information is stored in the hall. Will be transmitted to the computer.

  Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the electrical configuration for performing the winning determination in the MPU 3611 of the main controller 3162.

  The RAM 3613 of the MPU 3611 is provided with a first detection counter area 3613a and a second detection counter area 3613b that are used when determining the winning of a game ball. More specifically, a first detection counter area 3613a is provided for determining a detection signal from the first detection sensor 3350A, and a second detection counter area 3613b is provided for determining a detection signal from the second detection sensor 3350B.

  The first detection counter area 3613a is a counter whose maximum value is “2” (hereinafter referred to as a first detection counter DC1 for convenience), and the value is “0”, “1” according to a predetermined condition. , “2”. Specifically, it is reset to “0” by confirming the input of a signal (that is, a LOW level signal) corresponding to the fact that the game ball is not detected in any one process, and then the game ball is When the input of the signal corresponding to the detection (that is, the HI level signal) is continuously confirmed by two processes, “0” → “1” or “1” → “2”. Will be counted up. When the value of the first detection counter DC1 becomes “2” in this way, it is determined that one game ball has been won.

  The second detection counter area 3613b is a counter whose maximum value is “2” (hereinafter referred to as a second detection counter DC2 for convenience), and the value is “0”, “1” according to a predetermined condition. , “2”. Specifically, it is reset to “0” by confirming the input of a signal (specifically, a LOW level signal) corresponding to the fact that the game ball is not detected in any one process, and then the game ball When the input of a signal (specifically, an HI level signal) corresponding to the detection of the signal is continuously confirmed by two processes, the count is incremented so that “1” → “2”. In this way, based on the second detection counter DC2 becoming “2”, it is determined that one game ball has won.

  The number of counts of the first detection counter DC1 and the second detection counter DC2 is arbitrary. For example, when the detection signal changes in the order of LOW level → HI level → HI level → HI level, the winning of the game ball has occurred. In the determination configuration, the maximum value may be changed to “3”.

  The check counter area 3613c is a counter (hereinafter referred to as a check counter CC for convenience) having a maximum value “200” and an initial value “100”, and the value is added or subtracted according to a predetermined condition. It is the composition which becomes. Specifically, “1” is incremented when the game ball is won by the first detection counter DC1, and “1” is incremented when the game ball is won by the second detection counter DC2. Subtracted. That is, when the game ball is won normally, the value of the check counter CC settles to the initial value after a temporary change. On the other hand, when the value of the check counter CC remains out of the initial value, it is grasped that the detection signal is not normal. That is, it is understood that there is a possibility that noise or the like is mixed in the detection signal output from one of the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B due to an intentional or accidental factor.

  Next, an electrical configuration for determining the occurrence of a jackpot in the MPU 3611 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 3611 uses various counter information (specifically, information on various counter areas 3613d of the RAM 3613 shown in FIG. 55) in the game to set the jackpot lottery, setting the emission color of the first specific lamp unit, and setting the symbol display of the symbol display device. And so on. Specifically, as in the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot, Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device fluctuates and changes, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of jackpot random number counter C1, and switching of colors displayed on the first specific lamp unit And a variation type counter CS that determines a symbol variation display time in the symbol display device. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 3089 of the lower operating port 3084 is in the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS are provided in various counter areas 3613d of the RAM 3613. Since these various counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, and C4 are the same as the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, and C4 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

(About various processes executed by main controller 3162)
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 3611 of the main controller 3162 will be described. In the MPU 3611, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, a main process started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. Description of these processes is omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 3611 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec). This period is arbitrary. However, since the timer interrupt processing is set to be executed repeatedly in a short cycle such as confirmation of power interruption signal or fraud detection signal, confirmation of various winnings, etc., other processing is set. It is preferably set shorter than the repetition period of the normal process described later.

  First, in step S3101, a signal reading process is executed. In the signal reading process, the information input to the input port from the detection sensors individually provided for the general winning opening, the variable winning device 3082, the operation opening 3083, 3084 and the through gate is confirmed. The presence or absence of the entrance to the entrance part is specified. Specifically, the input of a signal (for example, LOW level signal) corresponding to not detecting a game ball is confirmed, and a signal (for example, HI level signal) corresponding to detecting a game ball is detected. When the input is confirmed twice in succession, it is determined that a game ball has entered in the ball entry unit corresponding to the detection sensor. Hereinafter, a part of the signal reading process, specifically, a process based on a signal from the detection sensor 3350 corresponding to the operation ports 3083 and 3084 will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG. In the present embodiment, the reading process of the signal output from the detection sensor 3350 for the working port 3083 and the reading process of the signal output from the detection sensor 3350 for the working port 3084 are the same. In the following description, the signal reading process for the operation port 3083 will be described, and the description of the signal reading process for the operation port 3084 will be omitted.

(Signal reading process)
In the signal reading process, first, a detection signal input process from the first detection sensor 3350A (steps S3201 to S3208) is performed, and then a detection signal input process from the second detection sensor 3350B (step S3209). To step S3215), and finally, a signal determination process based on the detection result (step S3216 to step S3218) is performed. The order of reading processing of each detection signal is not limited to this, and the reading processing of the detection signal input from the second detection sensor 3350B may be performed first.

  In step S3201, it is determined whether or not the detection signal input from first detection sensor 3350A is at the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3201, that is, if the detection signal is at the LOW level, the process proceeds to step S3202, where the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated to “0”, and then the second detection sensor. Proceed to signal reading processing for 3350B.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, that is, if the detection signal is at the HI level, the process proceeds to step S3203. In step S3203, it is determined whether or not the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3203, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “1”, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated to “2” in step S3204 (1). After the addition, the process proceeds to step S3205. The affirmative determination in step S3204 indicates that the detection signals are inputted in the order of LOW level → HI level → HI level, and based on the input of such signals, the game ball has passed through the detection area DE1. That is, it is determined that a winning is made to the operation port 3083. In step S3205, the value of the check counter CC is updated (specifically, “1” is added). Then, in step S3206, a first winning detection flag is set in various flag storage areas 3613g of the RAM 3613. The first winning detection flag is a flag used when a game ball is paid out based on winning in the operation port 3083.

  After the first winning detection flag is set in step S3206, the signal reading process for the first detection sensor 3350A is terminated, and the process proceeds to the signal reading process for the second detection sensor 3350B.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3203, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “0” or “2”, the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “2” in step S3207. It is determined whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3207, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “2”, the signal reading process for the first detection sensor 3350A is terminated, and the second detection sensor 3350B Proceed to signal reading process.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3207, that is, if the value of the first detection counter DC1 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S3208 and the value of the first detection counter DC1 is updated to “1” (added by 1). Then, the process proceeds to a signal reading process for the second detection sensor 3350B.

  Next, a signal reading process for the second detection sensor 3350B will be described.

  After executing the processes of steps S3202, S3206, and S3208, the process proceeds to step S3209, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal input from the second detection sensor 3350B is at the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3209, that is, if the detection signal is at the LOW level, the process proceeds to step S3210, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is updated to “0”, and then the signal determination process is performed. move on.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S3209, that is, if the detection signal is at the HI level, the process proceeds to step S3211. In step S3211, it is determined whether or not the value of the second detection counter DC2 is “1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3211, that is, if the value of the second detection counter DC2 is “1”, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is updated to “2” in step S3212 (1 After the addition, the process proceeds to step S3213. The affirmative determination in step S3211 indicates that the detection signals are input in the order of LOW level → HI level → HI level. Based on the input of such signals, the game ball has passed through the detection area DE2. That is, it is determined that a winning is made to the operation port 3083. In subsequent step S3213, the value of the check counter CC is updated (specifically, “1” is subtracted), and the process proceeds to signal determination processing.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3211, that is, if the value of the second detection counter DC2 is “0” or “2”, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is “2” in step S3214. It is determined whether or not. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3214, that is, when the value of the second detection counter DC2 is “2”, the process proceeds to a signal determination process.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3214, that is, if the value of the second detection counter DC2 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S3215 and the value of the second detection counter DC2 is updated to “1” (added by 1). Thereafter, the process proceeds to a signal determination process.

  After executing the processes of steps S3210, S3213, and S3215, the process proceeds to the signal determination process of steps S3216 to S3218 to determine whether or not the detection signals input from the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B are normal. .

  In the signal determination process, first, in step S3216, it is determined whether or not the value of the check counter CC is a normal value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the check counter CC is within the range of “97” to “103”. When it is determined that the value of the check counter CC is within the normal value range, that is, the check counter CC is “97”, “98”, “99”, “100”, “101”, “102”, “103”. (If the difference from the median “100” is within “3”), the signal reading process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3216, that is, if it is determined that the value of the check counter CC is not normal, the process proceeds to subsequent step S3217, in which an error notification flag is stored in various flag storage areas 3613g of the RAM 3613, and in step S3218. Proceed to In step S3218, update processing of the check counter CC is executed. Specifically, the value of the check counter CC is updated to “100”. Then, after updating the value of the check counter CC in step S3218, the signal reading process is terminated.

  Referring again to FIG. 57, the timer interrupt process will be described. After executing the signal reading process detailed above, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S3102. In subsequent step S3103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the value of each random number counter is incremented by 1 and it is determined whether or not the added value is an upper limit value. If the added value exceeds the upper limit value, the counter value is set to the initial value. Thereafter, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 3613.

  Here, with respect to the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Since the random number initial value counter CINI is a random value, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 varies. Therefore, the timing at which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 coincides with the winning value is different every time the jackpot random number counter C1 makes a round, so it is difficult to grasp the timing at which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 becomes the winning value. It has become.

  In subsequent step S3104, a through winning process is performed in accordance with winning through the through gate. In the through-winning process, if a winning to the through gate has occurred, it is confirmed that the number of stored item holdings stored in the electronic combination holding area is less than the upper limit number (for example, “4”). As a condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S3103 is stored in the electric utility reservation area. Moreover, the process for making the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 3143 light the holding | maintenance lamp part corresponding to the number of articles | goods holding | maintenance memory | storage is performed.

  Thereafter, a start winning process is executed in step S3105. In the start winning process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 59, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for the operation port is stored in the winning detection flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 3613g of the RAM 3613. Thus, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start prize) in the operation ports 3083 and 3084.

  If it is determined that the game ball has won the operating holes 3083 and 3084, in the following step S3402, whether the number N of the operation reserved balls of the first specific lamp unit and the symbol display device is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine whether or not. The process proceeds to step S3403 on the condition that there is a winning at the operation ports 3083 and 3084 and the number N of operation reservation balls is smaller than 4, and the operation reservation ball number N is incremented by one. Note that the operation port flag is deleted after the process of step S3403. In the subsequent step S3404, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 3613e are stored in the first area of the reserved ball storage area 3613f of the RAM 3613. Store.

  Then, after the start winning process, the MPU 3611 once ends the timer interrupt process.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S3501 to S3506 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S3509 and S3510 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S3501, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device. In addition, when a game time control command or a game state command is set, it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 3143. Further, when the error notification flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 3613g of the RAM 3613, an error notification lamp is output to the sound lamp control device 3143, thereby using an error display lamp unit or a speaker unit. And the error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 3213.

  In subsequent step S3502, the variation type counter CS is updated, and in step S3503, a first specific lamp unit control process for switching the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit is executed. In the first specific lamp unit control process, jackpot determination, on / off control of a light source switch of an LED lamp disposed in the first specific lamp unit, and the like are performed. Further, in the first specific lamp unit control process, the variable display setting of the first symbol by the symbol display device is also performed.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 coincides with a winning value that is a predetermined jackpot winning. Further, the type of jackpot is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 (determining whether or not it is a so-called probable big hit). Further, based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the variation type counter CS, the switching display time of the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit and the variation display time of the first symbol are determined. Each time the on-off control of the first specific lamp unit is started in the first specific lamp unit control process, the number of the operation reservation balls N is decremented by 1, and when the operation reservation ball number N is 0, the on / off control is performed. Not started.

  After the first specific lamp unit control process, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S3504. In the big prize opening / closing process, the big prize opening of the variable prize winning device 3082 is opened or closed in the case of the big hit state. That is, it is determined whether the big winning opening is opened for each round of the big hit state, and whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of game balls have been won in the big winning opening. The determination as to whether or not the prescribed number has been won is made by checking the big winning counters in the various counter areas 3613d of the RAM 3613. When either of these conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening is closed.

  Thereafter, in step S3505, a second specific lamp unit control process for performing a process of switching the color displayed on the second specific lamp unit is executed. In the second specific lamp section control process, switching of the display color in the second specific lamp section is started on the condition that a game ball has won the through gate. At this time, the display color switching time is also set. In addition, the color to be stopped and displayed is set based on the value of the second specific lamp random number counter acquired when the game ball wins the through gate. When a predetermined color is set as the color to be stopped and displayed, the electric accessory 3089 associated with the operation ports 3083 and 3084 is opened for a predetermined time after the stop display of the color.

  After step S3505, game ball launch control processing is executed in step S3506. In the game ball launch control process, a game ball is launched toward the game area PE once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply / launch control device. Thus, the game ball launching mechanism is driven. Specifically, the MPU 3611 outputs a firing pulse signal to the power source / launch control device every elapse of a predetermined period. Based on the input of the launch pulse signal, the power supply / launch control device outputs a drive signal (drive voltage) obtained by amplifying the voltage of the launch pulse signal to the solenoid mounted on the game ball launch mechanism. Then, the launch of the game ball is controlled by moving the output shaft of the solenoid to the launch position and the accommodation position.

  Thereafter, in step S3507, it is determined whether a power failure flag is stored in the RAM 3613. If the power failure flag is not stored, the process advances to step S3508 to determine whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, the interrupt criterion in which the timer interrupt processing is set as a plurality of times from the start of the previous normal processing. It is determined whether or not the number of times (specifically, twice) has occurred. Specifically, the number of timer interrupts is grasped by adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter in the various counter areas 3613d of the RAM 3613 every time the timer interrupt is activated, and immediately before executing the process of step S3501. At the timing, the counter value is cleared to 0 (initialized). If timer interrupt processing has not occurred for the number of times of interrupt reference, the process advances to step S3509.

  In step S3509, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 (initialized) when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the lottery counter buffer 3613e of the RAM 3613. In step S3510, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared (initialized) to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the lottery counter buffer 3613e of the RAM 3613.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3507, and the above-described process is repeated from the start of the previous normal process until the timer interrupt process is generated for the interrupt reference number. When the interrupt reference number is reached, the process returns to step S3501. That is, when the power failure flag is not stored, various processes in steps S3501 to S3506 are repeatedly executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Note that the period is not limited to 4 msec as long as the progress of the game can be well controlled.

  When the power failure flag is stored, the power failure process after step S3511 is executed. That is, in step S3511, the timer interrupt process is prohibited from being generated, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S3512. After the access to the RAM 3613 is prohibited in step S3513, the power is completely shut off and the process is performed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

  Next, specific examples of the winning determination and signal determination modes when the game ball passes through the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B (specifically, the detection areas DE1 and DE2) will be described based on the timing charts of FIGS. FIG. 61 shows a state in which no noise is mixed, and FIGS. 62 to 64 show a state in which noise is mixed. 61 (a) to 64 (a) are schematic diagrams illustrating noise, and FIGS. 61 (b) to 64 (b) are schematic diagrams illustrating signals input to the processing circuit 3680A of the first detection sensor 3350A. 61 (c) to 64 (c) are schematic views showing signals input to the processing circuit 3680B of the second detection sensor 3350B, and FIGS. 61 (d) to 64 (d) are main controls from the first detection sensor 3350A. 61 (e) to 64 (e) are schematic diagrams illustrating signals input from the second detection sensor 3350B to the main controller 3162, and FIGS. 61 (f) to 61 (f). FIG. 64F is a schematic diagram showing the value of the check counter CC. In FIGS. 61 to 64, for the sake of convenience, an arrow is added to the noise mixed portion in order to distinguish the signal generated by the oscillation circuits 3660 </ b> A and 3660 </ b> B from the mixed noise.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration related to winning determination and signal determination at the operating port 3083 and the configuration related to winning determination and signal determination at the operating port 3084 are the same, so in the following description, the upper operating port A description will be given of aspects of winning determination and signal determination in 3083, and description of the winning determination and signal determination in the lower operation port 3084 will be omitted.

  First, a case where noise is not mixed in the detection signal will be described with reference to FIG.

  At the timing of ta1, when the game ball reaches the detection area DE1 of the first detection sensor 3350A, high-frequency output from the detection circuit 3670 to the processing circuit 3680 in the first detection sensor 3350A is stopped. As a result, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A is switched from the LOW level to the HI level.

  Thereafter, in the timer interrupt processing (specifically, signal reading processing), it is confirmed at the timing ta2 that the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE1. That is, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the operation port 3083. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is incremented by “1” and updated from “100” to “101”.

  Thereafter, at the timing ta3, the game ball passes through the detection area DE1, and the suppressed high-frequency amplitude returns to the original state. As a result, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A is switched (falls) from the HI level to the LOW level.

  The game ball that has passed the detection area DE1 flows down the vertical passage 3315 and reaches the detection area DE2 of the second detection sensor 3350B at the timing ta4. Accordingly, high-frequency output from the detection circuit 3670 to the processing circuit 3680 in the second detection sensor 3350B is started, and the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is switched (rises) from the LOW level to the HI level.

  After that, it is confirmed at the timing ta5 that the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is LOW level → HI level → HI level in the timer interrupt processing (specifically, signal reading processing). It is determined that the ball has passed the detection area DE2, that is, a winning has occurred at the operation port 3083. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is decremented by “1” and the initial value returns to “100” from “101”.

  At the timing ta6 after it is determined that a winning has occurred at the timing ta5, the game ball finishes passing through the detection area DE2, and the high-frequency output to the processing circuit 3680 stops. As a result, the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is switched from the HI level to the LOW level.

  As described above, when the value of the check counter CC changes within the range of the normal value, the detection information included in the detection signals from the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B is normal, and noise or the like to the detection signals is detected. It will be recognized that mixing is not allowed.

  As already described, both detection sensors 3350A and 3350B are arranged along the path. Therefore, a certain time lag (that is, the period from the timing ta3 to the timing ta5) occurs until the game ball that has passed through the first detection sensor 3350A is detected by the second detection sensor 3350B. For example, when a large number of game balls continuously flow into the operation port 3083 and flow down through the collection passage in a state where the game balls are connected, two more game balls are added to the first detection sensor 3350A at the time lag. A signal (LOW level → HI level → HI level) indicating the winning of the game can be generated. That is, there is a difference of “3” at the maximum between the number of winnings determined based on the detection signal from the first detection sensor 3350A and the number of winnings determined based on the detection signal from the second detection sensor 3350B. Can occur. In this regard, the normal value range of the check counter CC is set to allow such maximum difference. Thereby, it is avoided that error notification is excessively performed although noise is not mixed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a description will be given of a case where noise occurs during a period including the timing at which the game ball passes through the first detection area DE1. Specifically, a case will be described in which noise having the same frequency and the same amplitude as the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 3660A of the detection sensor 3350A is periodically generated and mixed in the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 3660A. .

  When the game ball that has flowed into the operation port 3083 has not reached the detection areas DE1, DE2, a high frequency is input to the processing circuit 3680A of the first detection sensor 3350A, and a LOW level signal is output from the first detection sensor 3350A. Is output. In addition, high frequency input to the processing circuit 3680B of the second detection sensor 3350B is stopped, and an HI level signal is output from the second detection sensor 3350B.

  When noise (high frequency) having the same waveform as the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuits 3660A and 3660B is generated at the timing tb1, the noise is mixed into the main circuits 3650A and 3650B through the detection coils 3364A and 3364B. It becomes. Particularly in the present embodiment, both detection sensors 3350A and 3350B are arranged adjacent to each other. For this reason, it is assumed that the same noise is likely to be mixed into both the main circuits 3650A and 3650B as shown in FIG. 62 regardless of whether the cause of the noise is accidental or artificial.

  However, since a high frequency exists in the signal input to the processing circuit of the first detection sensor 3350A, even if noise is mixed, the signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A does not change. Absent. On the other hand, no high frequency exists in the signal input to the processing circuit of the second detection sensor 3350B. For this reason, when the noise is mixed, the signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is temporarily switched from the LOW level to the HI level.

  At the subsequent timing tb2, noise disappears, and the signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B returns to the LOW level. The width of the noise shown in this specific example is 2 msec (the same period as the timer interrupt processing cycle), and it is not determined that a game ball win has occurred due to a change in the signal based on the noise mixture. That is, this noise is harmless, and the value of the check counter CC is not updated by the mixing of the noise.

  At the timing tb2, when the game ball reaches the detection area DE1, the high-frequency output from the detection circuit 3670 to the processing circuit 3680 in the first detection sensor 3350A is stopped. As a result, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A is switched from the LOW level to the HI level.

  After that, in the timer interruption process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at the timing of tb3 that the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE1. That is, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the operation port 3083. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is updated. Specifically, the check counter CC is incremented by “1” and counted up from “100” to “101”.

  At the timing of tb4 that follows, specifically, at the timing of t4 when a period (5 msec in this specific example) that is longer than the period required to execute the timer interrupt processing twice from the timing of tb2 has elapsed, the input to the processing circuit 3680 Noise (high frequency) is mixed in the signal to be detected, and the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A is switched from the HI level to the LOW level.

  Further, the noise generated at the timing tb4 is mixed in the signal input to the processing circuit 3680B of the second detection sensor 3350B, and the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is LOW similarly to the timing tb1. Switch from level to HI level. At the timing tb4, the detection signal from the second detection sensor 3350B is switched to the LOW level while the second detection counter DC2 is updated from “0” to “1”. Therefore, the second detection counter DC2 is updated to “0” again before being counted up to “2”, and it is not determined that a winning has occurred based on the mixed noise. That is, the noise mixed in the output signal from the second detection sensor 3350B is treated as harmless noise, not harmful as the game ball wins. Therefore, it is avoided that the value of the check counter CC is updated due to such noise contamination.

  At the timing of tb5 when the same period (specifically 2 msec) as the timer interrupt processing cycle has elapsed from the timing of tb4, the noise disappears, so that the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A changes from LOW level to HI. Return to level. At this time, when the detection signal temporarily becomes LOW level, the first detection counter DC1 is reset to “0”, and the input of the HI level signal is awaited.

  After that, in the timer interruption process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at the timing tb6 that the detection signal is HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE1, that is, the operation port In 3083, it is determined that a winning has occurred. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is updated. Specifically, the value of the check counter CC is incremented by “1” and counted up from “101” to “102”.

  At the timing of the subsequent tb7, specifically, at the timing when 5 msec (more specifically, the period longer than the time required for executing the timer interrupt processing twice) has elapsed from the timing of tb5, noise is again added to the signal input to the processing circuit 3680A. (High frequency) is mixed, and the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A is switched from the HI level to the LOW level.

  At the same timing tb7, noise is also mixed in the output signal from the second detection sensor 3350B. However, the noise is harmless noise similar to the noise mixed at the timing tb4. The value of the check counter CC is not updated due to noise contamination.

  At the timing of tb8 when 2 msec (the same period as the timer interrupt processing cycle) has elapsed from the timing of tb7, the noise disappears, so that the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A returns from the LOW level to the HI level. . At this time, when the detection signal temporarily becomes LOW level, the first detection counter DC1 is reset to “0”, and the input of the HI level signal is awaited.

  Thereafter, in the timer interruption process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at the timing tb9 that the detection signal is HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE1, that is, the operation port In 3083, it is determined that a winning has occurred. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is updated. Specifically, the value of the check counter CC is incremented by “1” and counted up from “102” to “103”.

  At the timing of tb10 that follows, in detail, at the timing of tb10 when a period (5 msec in this specific example) that is longer than the period required for executing the timer interrupt processing twice has elapsed, the signal input to the processing circuit 3680 Noise (high frequency) is mixed again, and the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A is switched from the HI level to the LOW level.

  At the same timing tb10, noise is mixed into the output signal from the second detection sensor 3350B. However, the noise is harmless noise similar to the noise mixed at the timing tb4. The value of is never updated.

  At the timing of tb11 when the same period (specifically 2 msec) as the timer interrupt processing cycle has elapsed from the timing of tb10, the noise disappears, so that the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A changes from LOW level to HI. Return to level. At this time, when the detection signal temporarily becomes LOW level, the first detection counter DC1 is reset to “0”, and the input of the HI level signal is awaited.

  After that, in the timer interruption process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at the timing tb12 that the detection signal is HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE1, that is, the operation port In 3083, it is determined that a winning has occurred. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is updated. Specifically, the value of the check counter CC is incremented by “1” and counted up from “103” to “104”. At this time, when it is determined that the value of the check counter CC is out of the normal value range in the timer interrupt process, an error notification is instructed and the value of the check counter CC is updated again (details). The check counter CC counted up to “104” is reset to the initial value “100”). As a result, the error display lamp unit notifies that there is an abnormality in the detection signal, and also notifies the hall computer through the external terminal board 3213. Further, the check counter CC returns to the initial value. By doing so, the preparation for determining the next occurrence of abnormality is completed.

  At the subsequent timing tb13, the game ball finishes passing through the detection area DE1, and high-frequency output to the processing circuit 3680A is resumed. As a result, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A is switched from the HI level to the LOW level.

  Note that noise is mixed in the output signal from the second detection sensor 3350B at the timing tb13, but the noise is harmless noise similar to the noise mixed in the timing tb4. Does not update the value of the check counter CC.

  Further, the noise is periodically generated in a period of time after the timing of tb13, specifically, in a period until the game ball reaches the second detection area DE2. At this time, since a high frequency is continuously input to the processing circuit 3680A of the first detection sensor 3350A, the output signal from the first detection sensor 3350A is not changed by the mixed noise. On the other hand, since the high frequency generated in the oscillation circuit 3660B is not input to the processing circuit 3680B of the second detection sensor 3350B, the signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B changes due to the mixing of noise. However, as already described, since the noise does not have a sufficient width to indicate the winning of the game ball, it is not erroneously determined that the game ball has won due to the change.

  Thereafter, when the game ball (the game ball that has passed through the detection area DE1) reaches the second detection area DE2 at the timing of tb14, a high frequency is output to the processing circuit 3680B of the second detection sensor 3350B. As a result, the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. By the timer interruption process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at the timing tb15 that the detection signal is HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE2, that is, the operation port 3083. It is determined that a win has occurred. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is decremented by “1” and changed from “100” to “99”.

  As described above, in the specific example illustrated in FIG. 62, the case where noise is mixed into the first detection sensor 3350A and the second detection sensor 3350B has been described. However, the noise is mixed only into the first detection sensor 3350A. Even if it is not mixed in the second detection sensor 3350B, the same result is obtained. That is, there is a difference between the number of winnings determined based on the signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A and the number of winnings determined based on the signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B, and the difference is acceptable. Error notification is performed when the range is exceeded.

  Next, referring to FIG. 63, when the mixed noise can affect the winning determination based on the detection signals from both detection sensors 3350A and 3350B, that is, harmful noise is present in the detection signals from the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B. The case where it mixes is demonstrated. Note that the noise in this specific example has the same frequency and the same amplitude as the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuits 3660A and 3660B of the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B, similarly to the noise in the specific example described with reference to FIG. doing. However, the noise shown in this specific example is different from the specific example described with reference to FIG. 62, and the length (width) of the period in which each noise occurs is required to execute the timer interrupt process twice. The period is longer than the period (more specifically, 5 msec).

  When the game ball that has flowed into the operation port 3083 has not reached the detection areas DE1, DE2, a high frequency is input to the processing circuit 3680A of the first detection sensor 3350A, and the first detection sensor 3350A A LOW level signal is output. In addition, high-frequency input to the processing circuit 3680B of the second detection sensor 3350B is stopped, and an HI level signal is output from the second detection sensor 3350B.

  When noise (high frequency) having the same waveform as the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuits 3660A and 3660B is generated at the timing tc1, the noise is mixed into the main circuits 3650A and 3650B through the detection coils 3364A and 3364B. It becomes. At this time, since the signal input to the processing circuit of the first detection sensor 3350A has a high frequency, even if noise is mixed, the signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A changes accordingly. There is no. On the other hand, no high frequency exists in the signal input to the processing circuit of the second detection sensor 3350B. For this reason, when the noise is mixed, the signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is switched from the LOW level to the HI level.

  Thereafter, when it is confirmed at the timing of tc2 that the detection signal from the second detection sensor 3350B is LOW level → HI level → HI level in the timer interrupt processing (specifically, signal reading processing), the game ball However, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the operation port 3083 even though it has not passed through the detection area DE2. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is updated. Specifically, the value of the check counter CC is decremented by “1” and counted down from “100” to “99”. However, since the detection signal from the second detection sensor 3350B is not used for granting benefits such as paying out game balls, there is no disadvantage caused by this erroneous determination.

  Thus, after erroneously determining that the game ball has been won, the signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is switched to the LOW level due to the disappearance of the noise. As a result, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is updated to “0”, and the input of the next HI level signal is awaited.

  Thereafter, noise is generated again at the timing of tc3, so that the value of the second detection counter DC2 is added in the order of “0” → “1” → “2”, and a game ball win is generated at the timing of tc4. Is erroneously determined. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is further subtracted by “1” and counted down from “99” to “98”.

  At the timing of tc3, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 660 is constantly input to the processing circuit 3680A of the first detection sensor 3350A, and the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A due to the generated noise is generated. There is no switching. That is, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A is maintained at the LOW level.

  Thus, after erroneously determining that the game ball has been won, the signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is switched to the LOW level due to the disappearance of the noise. As a result, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is updated to “0”, and the input of the next HI level signal is awaited.

  At the subsequent timing of tc5, the game ball that has flowed into the operation port 3083 reaches the detection area DE1. As a result, high-frequency output from the detection circuit 3670A to the processing circuit 3680A is stopped, and the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A is switched from the LOW level to the HI level.

  Thereafter, it is confirmed at the timing of tc7 that the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A is LOW level → HI level → HI level in the timer interruption process (specifically, the signal reading process), and the game ball Pass through the detection area DE1, that is, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the operation port 3083. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is incremented by “1”, counted up from “98” to “99”, and benefits such as paying out game balls are given to the player.

  At the timing of tc7 after the privilege is given, high frequency is present in both the signal input to the processing circuit 3680A of the first detection sensor 3350A and the signal input to the processing circuit 3680B of the second detection sensor 3350B. Does not exist. If noise occurs again at the timing of tc7, the noise is mixed into the main circuits 3650A and 3650B of the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B, and affects the detection signals output from the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B. Become. That is, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A is switched to the LOW level even though the game ball is passing through the detection area DE1, and the signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is tc1. Similar to the timing and the timing of tc3, the LOW level is switched to the HI level.

  After the timing of tc7, at the timing of tc8 when the timer interrupt processing is executed twice, the first detection counter DC1 updated to “0” in the previous timer interrupt processing (specifically, signal reading processing) is set to “0”. ”And is in a state of waiting for input of the next HI level signal. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt process (specifically, the signal reading process) confirms that the detection signal from the second detection sensor 3350B is LOW level → HI level → HI level at the timing tc8, Although the ball does not pass through the detection area DE2, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the operation port 3083. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is decremented by “1” and counted down from “99” to “98”. However, since the detection signal from the second detection sensor 3350B is not used for granting benefits such as paying out game balls, there is no disadvantage caused by this erroneous determination.

  Thereafter, when the noise disappears at the timing of tc9, the gaming signal is still passing the detection area DE1 at the timing of tc9, so that the detection signal from the first detection sensor 3350A returns to the HI level. Further, since the game ball has not reached the detection area DE2, the detection signal from the second detection sensor 3350B returns to the LOW level.

  At the timing of tc10 when the timer interrupt process is executed twice after the timing of tc9, the detection signal from the first detection sensor 3350A is changed from the LOW level to the HI level in the timer interrupt process (specifically, the signal reading process). → Confirmed to be at HI level. For this reason, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the operation port 3083 even though other game balls have not passed through the detection area DE1. That is, although one game ball is actually passing through the detection area DE1, it is erroneously determined as if another game ball has passed through the detection area DE1. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is incremented by “1” and counted up from “98” to “99”. At this time, the second detection counter DC2 is maintained updated to “0”, and enters a state of waiting for the input of the next HI level signal.

  At the timing of tc11 after the timing of tc10, there is a high frequency in the signal input to the processing circuit 3680A of the first detection sensor 3350A and the signal input to the processing circuit of the second detection sensor 3350B. Absent. For this reason, the noise generated at the timing tc11 is mixed into the main circuits 3650A and 3650B of the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B. As a result, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A is switched to the LOW level even though the game ball is passing through the detection area DE1. In addition, the signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, similarly to the timing of tc1 and the timing of tc3.

  After the timing of tc11, at the timing of tc12 when the timer interrupt processing is executed twice, the first detection counter DC1 updated to “0” in the previous timer interrupt processing (specifically, signal reading processing) is set to “0”. ”And is in a state of waiting for input of the next HI level signal. On the other hand, when it is confirmed at the timing tc12 that the detection signal from the second detection sensor 3350B is LOW level → HI level → HI level by the timer interrupt processing (specifically, signal reading processing), the game ball is It is determined that a winning has occurred at the operation port 3083 even though it has not passed the detection area DE2. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is decremented by “1” and counted down from “99” to “98”. However, since the detection signal from the second detection sensor 3350B is not used for granting benefits such as paying out game balls, there is no disadvantage caused by this erroneous determination.

  Thereafter, when the noise disappears at the timing of tc13, the gaming signal is still passing the detection area DE1 at the timing of tc13, so that the detection signal from the first detection sensor 3350A returns to the HI level. Further, since the game ball has not reached the detection area DE2, the detection signal from the second detection sensor 3350B returns to the LOW level.

  After the timing of tc13, at the timing of tc14 when the timer interrupt processing is executed twice, the detection signal from the first detection sensor 3350A is LOW level → HI level → HI by the timer interrupt processing (specifically, signal reading processing). It is determined that the level is reached, and it is determined that a winning has occurred at the operation port 3083 even though other game balls have not passed through the detection area DE1. That is, although one game ball is actually passing through the detection area DE1, it is erroneously determined as if another game ball has passed through the detection area DE1. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is incremented by “1” and counted up from “98” to “99”. At this time, the second detection counter DC2 is maintained updated to “0”, and enters a state of waiting for the input of the next HI level signal.

  At the subsequent timing tc15, the game ball finishes passing through the detection area DE1, and the high-frequency output to the processing circuit 3680 is resumed. As a result, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A is switched from the HI level to the LOW level.

  Thus, while the game ball is passing through the detection area DE1, that is, the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuit 3660A is input to the processing circuit 3680A in the first detection sensor 3350A, and the game ball is transmitted from the first detection sensor 3350A. If noise is mixed while a signal (specifically, an HI level signal) indicating that the signal is detected is output, the HI level signal is differentiated into a plurality of signals. Thereby, although only one game ball has been won, it can be erroneously determined as if a plurality of game balls have won. In this case, the number of game balls determined to have won based on the detection signal from the second detection sensor 3350B during the same period is the game determined to have won based on the detection signal from the second detection sensor 3350B. It will be different from the number of spheres. One less for details. Such a difference is that, in the first detection sensor 3350A, a signal in which the detection signal is differentiated by noise is subject to erroneous determination, whereas in the second detection sensor 3350B, noise mixed in the detection signal is erroneously detected. This is caused by being a target of determination.

  It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the abnormality determination of the detection signal is performed based on the difference in the number of winnings during the above period. As a result, it is possible to discover fraudulent acts such as intentionally mixing noise aiming at only the above period.

  However, in reality, if noise is intentionally mixed, it is assumed that it is difficult to generate noise by pinpointing the timing at which the game ball passes the detection area DE1. In particular, if attention is paid to the fact that the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B (specifically, the detection areas DE1 and DE2) are arranged behind the game board 3080, it becomes difficult to estimate the timing, and the illegal act becomes extremely difficult. It is assumed that Therefore, when trying to obtain profits illegally by intentionally mixing noise, the output period of the HI level signal described above should be included, that is, a margin should be provided before and after the output period. By generating noise, it is assumed that fraudulent acts can be made more efficient. That is, as shown in this specific example, the generation of the noise can be continued even after the game ball has passed through the detection area DE1 at the timing of tc15. For example, as shown in FIG. 63, noise occurs at the timing of tc16 and the timing of tc17 after the timing of tc15. If the signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is changed by these noises, an erroneous determination is caused thereby. Thereby, the value of the check counter CC is decremented by “1” each time and updated from “99” → “98” → “97”.

  Thereafter, when the game ball (game ball that has passed through the detection area DE1) reaches the second detection area DE2 at the timing of tc18, a high frequency is output to the processing circuit 3680B of the second detection sensor 3350B. As a result, the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. By the timer interruption process (specifically, the signal reading process), it is confirmed at the subsequent timing tc19 that the detection signal is HI level → HI level, and the game ball has passed the detection area DE2, that is, the operation port 3083. It is determined that a win has occurred. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is decremented by “1” and counted down from “97” to “96”.

  At this time, when it is determined that the value of the check counter CC is out of the normal value range in the timer interrupt process, an error notification is instructed and the value of the check counter CC is updated again (details). Is reset to the initial value “100”). As a result, the fact that the detection signal is abnormal is notified by the error display lamp unit 27, and is also notified to the hall computer through the external terminal board 3213. Further, the check counter CC is set to the initial value. By returning, preparation for determining the next occurrence of abnormality is completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a description will be given of a case where noise is mixed in at a timing after the game ball that has flowed into the operation port 3083 passes through the detection area DE1. Note that the noise in this specific example has the same frequency and the same amplitude as the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuits 3660A and 3660B of the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B, similarly to the noise in the specific example described with reference to FIG. However, the length (width) of the period in which each noise is generated is longer than the period required to execute the timer interrupt process twice (specifically, 5 msec).

  From the timing td1 to the timing td3, it is determined that the game ball has passed through the detection area DE1 of the first detection sensor 3350A, similarly to the timing ta1 to ta3, and the player is determined based on the determination result. On the other hand, benefits such as paying out game balls are given, and the value of the check counter CC is incremented by “1”. That is, the value of the check counter CC is updated from “100” to “101”.

  A high frequency is input to the processing circuit 3680A of the first detection sensor 3350A at the timing td4 after the game ball passes through the first detection area DE1 and before reaching the detection area DE2 of the second detection sensor 3350B. At the same time, a LOW level signal is output from the first detection sensor 3350A. In addition, high-frequency input to the processing circuit 3680B of the second detection sensor 3350B is stopped, and a LOW level signal is output from the second detection sensor 3350B.

  When the noise (high frequency) is generated at the timing td4, the noise is mixed into the main circuits 3650A and 3650B through the detection coils 3364A and 3364B. Since the signal input to the processing circuit of the first detection sensor 3350A has a high frequency, even if noise is mixed, the signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A does not change. On the other hand, no high frequency exists in the signal input to the processing circuit of the second detection sensor 3350B. For this reason, when the noise is mixed, the signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is switched from the LOW level to the HI level.

  Thereafter, when it is confirmed at the timing of td5 that the detection signal from the second detection sensor 3350B is LOW level → HI level → HI level by the timer interrupt process (specifically, signal reading process), the game ball is detected. It is determined that a winning has occurred at the operation port 3083 even though the region DE2 has not been passed. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is decremented by “1” and counted down from “101” to “100”.

  Thereafter, when the noise disappears, the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B returns to the LOW level. As a result, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is updated to “0”, and the input of the next HI level signal is awaited.

  At the subsequent timing of td6, noise is mixed in the same way as the timing of td4. After that, at the timing of td7, an erroneous determination is made as if a winning has occurred even though no winning has occurred. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is decremented by “1” and counted down from “100” to “99”. However, since the detection signal from the second detection sensor 3350B is not used for granting benefits such as paying out game balls, there is no disadvantage on the hall side due to erroneous determination at the timing of td5 and the timing of td7. .

  The game ball that has passed through the detection area DE1 flows down the vertical passage 3315, and reaches the detection area DE2 of the second detection sensor 3350B at the subsequent timing td8. Accordingly, high-frequency output from the detection circuit 3670 to the processing circuit 3680 in the second detection sensor 3350B is started, and the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is switched from the LOW level to the HI level.

  Thereafter, it is confirmed at the timing of td9 that the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is LOW level → HI level → HI level by the timer interrupt process (specifically, signal reading process), and the game ball is It is determined that the detection area DE2 has been passed, that is, a winning has occurred at the operation port 3083. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is decremented by “1” and counted down from “99” to “98”.

  Noise is generated during the determination process, that is, while a high frequency is being input to the processing circuit 3680B of the second detection sensor 3350B. No change occurs in the signal output from the 2 detection sensor 3350B. In other words, since the second detection sensor 3350B is configured to output a high level signal indicating the passage of the game ball in the detection area DE2 when a high frequency is input to the processing circuit 3680B, noise is further increased with respect to the high frequency. Even if is added, the HI level signal is not switched to the LOW level signal, and the influence of noise is avoided.

  After it is determined that a winning has occurred at the timing of td9, at the timing of td10, the game ball finishes passing through the detection area DE2, and high-frequency output to the processing circuit 3680 is stopped. As a result, the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is switched from the HI level to the LOW level.

  When noise is generated at the subsequent timing td11, the noise is mixed into the main circuits 3650A and 3650B through the detection coils 3364A and 3364B. Since the signal input to the processing circuit of the first detection sensor 3350A has a high frequency, even if noise is mixed, the signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A does not change. On the other hand, no high frequency exists in the signal input to the processing circuit of the second detection sensor 3350B. For this reason, when the noise is mixed, the signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B is switched from the LOW level to the HI level.

  Thereafter, when it is confirmed at the timing of td12 that the detection signal from the second detection sensor 3350B is LOW level → HI level → HI level in the timer interrupt processing (specifically, signal reading processing), the game ball However, it is determined that a winning has occurred at the operation port 3083 even though it has not passed through the detection area DE2. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is decremented by “1” and counted down from “98” to “97”.

  Thereafter, when the noise disappears, the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B returns to the LOW level. As a result, the value of the second detection counter DC2 is updated to “0”, and the input of the next HI level signal is awaited.

  At the subsequent timing of td13, noise is mixed similarly to the timing of td11, and then, at the timing of td14, an erroneous determination is made as if a winning has occurred even though no winning has occurred. As a result, the value of the check counter CC is decremented by “1” and counted down from “97” to “96”. At this time, when it is determined that the value of the check counter CC is out of the normal value range in the timer interrupt process, an error notification is instructed and the value of the check counter CC is updated again (details). Is reset to the initial value “100”). As a result, the error display lamp unit notifies that there is an abnormality in the detection signal, and also notifies the hall computer through the external terminal board 3213. Further, the check counter CC returns to the initial value. By doing so, the preparation for determining the next occurrence of abnormality is completed.

  According to the fourth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

  When the game balls flow into the operation ports 3083 and 3084, detection signals are individually output from the first detection sensor 3350A and the second detection sensor 3350B, and a winning determination is performed based on these detection signals. The number of game balls determined to have won based on the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A and the number of game balls determined to have won based on the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B And the abnormality determination is performed, the winning detection accuracy can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantage due to erroneous detection and contribute to the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

  Further, the noise mixed in the signals output from the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B is not only due to an accidental factor, but may be intentionally mixed by an unauthorized person. For example, noise may be intentionally mixed by injecting high frequency similar to the high frequency generated by the oscillation circuits 3660A and 3660B of the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B to the detection sensor 3350 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. . In this respect, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suitably enhance the crime prevention function against such illegal acts.

  Especially in the above embodiment, since the detection methods of the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B are different, one detection means reacts excessively to external factors (for example, noise, dirt, vibration), etc. Even so, it is possible to suppress an excessive reaction of the other detection means for the same factor. Specifically, when the game ball is not detected, the amplitude of the high frequency input to the processing circuit 3680A of the first detection sensor 3350A is set to be larger than the threshold, and the processing circuit 3680B of the second detection sensor 3350B is set. The amplitude of the input high frequency is set to be smaller than the threshold when the game ball is not detected. For this reason, when noise is mixed during non-detection of the game ball, the first detection sensor 3350A causes noise to be mixed into the high frequency, and no particular change occurs in the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A. On the other hand, in the second detection sensor 3350B, the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B changes due to noise (more specifically, the LOW level is temporarily switched to the HI level). Thus, since a difference occurs in the influence on the detection signal, a difference may occur in the result of the winning determination with each detection signal. Then, by determining whether or not the difference is within a normal value range by error determination, it is possible to grasp the fact that noise is mixed. Therefore, the effect of improving the detection accuracy can be further improved.

  The first detection sensor 3350A for granting benefits to the player is configured to detect the passage of the game ball by reducing the amplitude of the high frequency when the game ball is detected. Even if the illegal high frequency is output when the game ball does not flow into the operation ports 3083 and 3084, it is difficult to reduce the amplitude of the high frequency. , 3084 is expected to emit the above-mentioned fraudulent high frequency. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if noise is mixed at the time of game ball detection, a contrivance that causes a difference in the influence on each detection signal is made. Specifically, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A is differentiated into a plurality by mixing noise, whereas the noise itself is detected in the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B. It is converted as if it were a signal indicating the passage of. That is, there is a difference in the pseudo detection signal that is generated when noise is mixed.

In particular, when the detection signal is LOW level → HI level → HI level, it is determined that there is a winning. While the LOW level only needs to be confirmed once, the HI level needs to be confirmed twice. If an illegal act is performed efficiently, it is preferable to mix a plurality of noises in accordance with the entrance to the operation ports 3083 and 3084. Furthermore, in order to maximize the number of differentiated signals, It is preferable to shorten the output period of each noise as much as possible. Here, when the noise output period becomes extremely short, although a HI level portion indicating noise appears in the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 3350B, it is avoided that the winning determination is made by the HI level signal. . That is, when the noise output period is reduced to a level that does not satisfy the winning determination execution, the difference between the winning determination number in the first detection sensor 3350A and the winning determination number in the second detection sensor 3350B increases. As a result, it is possible to make the efficient fraud as described above difficult, and to increase the effect of suppressing the fraud.

  Both the first detection sensor 3350A and the second detection sensor 3350B are high-frequency oscillation type proximity sensors, and are configured to detect the game ball by passing the magnetic field generated in the detection coils 3364A and 3364B. As described above, in the configuration using the change of the magnetic field, when the magnetic fields generated in the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B interfere with each other, stability at the time of detection may be lowered. Therefore, the interference is suppressed by arranging both detection sensors 3350A and 3350B side by side along the path.

  When the detection accuracy is improved by using a plurality of detection sensors in combination, it is not preferable that the responsiveness at the time of granting the privilege is lowered (the waiting time for granting the privilege is increased). In this regard, by utilizing the first detection sensor 3350A located on the upstream side for privilege provision and the second detection sensor 3350B located on the downstream side specialized for error checking, such responsiveness can be obtained. The decrease is preferably avoided.

  Further, as already described, since the detection methods are different in each of the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B, it is possible to suitably suppress a reduction in the security function due to the close proximity of the two. Specifically, when a fraudulent person intentionally mixes noise, a high frequency oscillation device is disposed in front of the glass panel 23, and a high frequency is oscillated from the high frequency oscillation device toward the detection coils 3364A and 3364B. An act of letting go is assumed. In the configuration in which the two detection sensors are arranged apart from each other, the output timings of the detection signals in both detection sensors are shifted. That is, when performing error determination, it is necessary to consider such a shift in detection timing. It is assumed that the error detection function will not sufficiently function if such an action is used to match the bottom of the difference in the number of winning determinations using such a deviation. Since it becomes easy to irradiate illegal high frequencies together by arranging the detection sensors close to each other, such inconvenience is likely to occur.

  In this respect, the detection methods of the two detection sensors are different from each other, and the first detection sensor 3350A is less susceptible to noise except when the game ball is detected, and the second detection sensor 3350B has a first detection sensor 3350A. By making it easy to be affected by noise at the time of game ball detection and before and after the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to adjust the number of winning determinations described above. Thereby, it can accept | permit suitably arrange | positioning both detection sensors close, and can contribute to the improvement of the arrangement | positioning freedom of a sensor.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination with each other.

  (A1) In the first embodiment, 18 msec from the timing when it is determined that the game ball has won, more specifically, the period during which the HI level signal is output when the game ball passes through the detection area DE (details) Is set to cancel the next game ball winning determination process until a period obtained by subtracting the time required for game ball winning determination (2 msec) from 20 msec) is not limited to this. is not. As long as it is possible to avoid the determination result during the period in which the detection signal is maintained at the HI level due to the passing of the game ball through the detection area from affecting the progress of the game, the avoidance method is arbitrary.

  For example, as described above, the game ball winning determination is continued even during the period in which the HI level signal is output, and if it is determined that the next game ball has won during that period, the determination is made. It is good also as a structure which invalidates a result, ie, the structure which makes payout of a game ball based on the determination result, or a lottery of lottery impossible.

  In addition, the period (specifically 18 msec) measured by the timer counter TC and the determination timer counter JTC in the first embodiment and the second exemplary embodiment is not necessarily different from the detection signal output period (specifically 20 msec). There is no need. For example, in a configuration in which it is determined that a winning of a game ball has occurred due to the rising of the detection signal to the HI level, the time lag from the rising of the HI level signal to the completion of the determination can be reduced. In this case, the period counted by the timer counter TC is preferably 20 msec.

  Furthermore, the timing when the timer counter TC or the determination timer counter JTC becomes “0” and the timing when the detection signal falls to the LOW level are not necessarily matched. For example, the timing at which the timer counter TC or the determination timer counter JTC becomes “0” may be delayed from the timing at which the detection signal falls to the LOW level. However, when such a configuration is adopted, when the game ball is continuously detected, the determination regulation by the timer counter TC or the determination timer counter JTC corresponding to the preceding game ball is determined by the determination of the subsequent game ball. It is not preferable to affect the above. Therefore, the timer counter TC is set so that the values of the timer counter TC and the determination timer counter JTC are “0” between the detection signal indicating the passage of the preceding game ball and the detection signal indicating the passage of the subsequent game ball. Or a period of time measured by the determination timer counter JTC.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the timer counter TC and the determination timer counter JTC are provided as “period measurement means”, and the timer counter TC and the determination timer counter JTC are subtracted by subtraction. The period is measured, but it is also possible to change the measurement period and add it until the timer counter TC or the determination timer counter JTC reaches a predetermined value.

  (A2) In the first embodiment, when a game ball as a “game medium” flows into the operation ports 83 and 84, a winning determination is made based on a detection signal output from the detection sensor 350. did. In other words, the detection sensor 350 as the “detection means” and the signal reading process as the “passage determination means” (specifically, each process of S201 to S210) are applied to the operation ports 83 and 84 as the “entrance portion”. It is not limited to this. It is also possible to apply the technical idea related to the detection accuracy improvement shown in the first embodiment other than the winning determination.

  For example, in a slot machine or the like, by inserting a predetermined number of game media (medals), a lottery such as a big win becomes possible. This game media is detected by “detection means” and the detection information is “determined”. It is also possible to adopt a configuration for determining whether or not the charging can be performed by determining by “means”. As a result, it is possible to avoid making a determination as if a game medium has been inserted even though no game medium has been inserted due to the influence of noise or the like.

  (A3) It is also possible to apply the technical idea related to the detection accuracy improvement shown in the first embodiment other than the operation port 83, 84 winning determination. That is, it is also possible to employ the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, etc. as the “pick-up part”.

  For example, when a game ball that has passed through the general winning opening 81 passes a detection sensor (specifically, a detection area) for the general winning opening 81, a “period adjusting means” is provided to adjust the passing speed to a specified value. At the same time, detection of a plurality of game balls may be restricted within the same length of time as the passage period.

  In particular, an upper limit is set on the number of game balls that can be won, such as the variable winning device 82 (big prize opening), and it is restricted that it becomes difficult to win more game balls when the upper limit is reached. In the configuration, it is assumed that the act of tampering with the detection signal is performed just before the variable winning device 82 is switched to the closed state, that is, at the timing when the last game ball reaching the upper limit is won. The In such a configuration, a configuration that is practically preferable can be realized by applying the configuration related to winning detection and monitoring the winning.

  For example, an error determination is performed during a period in which the variable winning device 82 is closed between rounds. As a result, if it is determined that an error has occurred, the next variable winning device 82 is opened. What is necessary is just to make processing impossible.

  (A4) The detection sensor 350 and the upper recovery passage portion 311 for the upper operation port 83 and the detection sensor 350 and the lower recovery passage portion 321 for the lower operation port 84 may be shared. That is, a common passage through which game balls that flow into the upper working port 83 and the lower working port 84 pass may be provided, and the detection sensor may be provided in the common passage.

  However, in consideration of the constant of “passing speed and passing period”, which is one of the technical features shown in the first embodiment, when a configuration in which game balls merge from a plurality of routes is adopted, It is assumed that the flow velocity of these game balls is likely to vary depending on the mode of merging. Such variation can be reduced by setting a long passage length from the joining portion of the passage to the detection area as the “game medium detection position” and arranging a configuration corresponding to the “wall portion” therebetween. However, when such measures are taken, there is a concern that the distance from the entrance to the “entering part” to the “game medium detection position” increases and the responsiveness at the time of detection decreases. Therefore, preferably, as shown in the first embodiment, one “guide passage” and one “detecting means” may be provided for one “entering portion”.

  (A5) In the first embodiment, the period (specifically, 18 msec) is measured by the timer counter TC, starting from the timing at which it is determined that a winning game ball has occurred. In other words, the “regulation period” for restricting the determination of winning of a plurality of game balls is set in association with the winning timing of the game balls. It is also possible to change this as follows. The measurement of the regulation period may be performed periodically regardless of the game ball winning determination timing.

  For example, as shown in the first embodiment, in a configuration in which a detection signal (specifically, a HI level signal) indicating a winning is output for 20 msec when a game ball passes through the detection area DE, a loop is generated. By using a counter or the like, the above-mentioned period is repeatedly measured with 20 msec as one section, and a determination result that one game ball win has occurred for each section is permitted, and other results are included in one section. When it is determined that a winning has occurred, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the result is invalidated.

  However, when such a change is made, a detection signal (specifically, an HI level signal) indicating a winning of a game ball is output so as to straddle a plurality of sections, and further, the signal is differentiated for each section by noise or the like. If this is done, it can be mistaken that a winning has occurred in each section individually. Therefore, from the viewpoint of improving detection accuracy and crime prevention, it is preferable to start measuring the period from the timing when it is determined that the game ball has won a prize.

  (A6) In the first embodiment, the signal input from the detection sensor 350 in the signal reading process performed periodically is recognized as LOW level → HI level → HI level, so that the game ball is won. However, this determination condition is arbitrary. For example, it may be configured that it is determined that a winning of a game ball has occurred by recognizing LOW level → HI level → HI level → HI level, or by recognizing the LOW level → HI level, It may be configured to determine that a winning has occurred.

  (A7) In the first embodiment, the longitudinal passages 315 and 322 as the “downstream passage portions” are formed to extend in the vertical direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to form the “downstream passage portion” so as to be inclined with respect to the horizontal plane. That is, it is possible to move the game ball passing through the “downstream passage portion” in the inclination direction of the “downstream passage portion” instead of dropping vertically. However, when such a change is made, the passing speed of the game ball passing through the detection area DE as the “game medium detection position” due to the influence of the positional accuracy of the game board 80, the installation variation of the pachinko machine 10, and the like. And a “regulation period” measured by the timer counter TC. Therefore, it is preferable that the “downstream passage portion” is configured to extend in the vertical direction, and the game ball passing through the “downstream passage portion” is dropped vertically.

  (A8) In the first embodiment, the notification is made when the number of error determinations during the “regulation period” is three. More specifically, the maximum number assumed in advance (in the first embodiment) in a number that can generate a signal similar to the winning of a game ball in a pseudo manner when noise is mixed during the “regulation period”. Is set more than 2 times), but the number of error determination times for performing notification is arbitrary. For example, the set number may be equal to the maximum number.

  When noise is illegally mixed by a fraudulent person, it is assumed that it is difficult to put only one noise during the passage period. That is, it is assumed that noise is continuously mixed during the passage period at least during that period. Therefore, by setting a long “regulation period, output period” and increasing the number of contamination during that period, accidental noise and intentional noise (noise that is improperly mixed) can be reduced. It can be easily distinguished and can contribute to strengthening the crime prevention function.

  (A9) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the determination condition for error (noise) determination in the signal determination process is the same as the determination condition for normal winning determination. That is, it is determined that an error has occurred by recognizing that the signal input from the detection sensor 350 is LOW level → HI level → HI level. The determination conditions for the error determination are arbitrary, and are not necessarily the same as the determination conditions for the winning determination. However, if both determination conditions are the same, it is possible to distinguish harmless noise from harmful noise, which is excellent in that an improvement in crime prevention can be expected. Therefore, it is desirable to unify both judgment conditions.

  (A10) In the first embodiment, the game ball passing through the detection area DE is devised by devising the shape of the lower guide passage portion 272 and the lower recovery passage portion 321 constituting the “guide passage”. It was set as the structure adjusted so that speed may become constant. In other words, the lower guide passage 272 and the lower recovery passage 321 are provided with a function as “period adjusting means”. It is also possible to change this and provide the “period adjusting means” separately from the lower guide passage portion 272 and the lower recovery passage portion 321. A specific example will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the period adjusting means.

  As shown in FIG. 65, a ball feeding mechanism 810 is provided at an intermediate position of the upper collection passage 801 (specifically, a position upstream of the detection sensor 350). The ball feed mechanism 810 has a function of sending the game ball that has flowed out of the guide passage 275 to the detection sensor 350 side at a predetermined speed.

  Specifically, the ball feeding mechanism 810 includes a rotating body 811 and a driving motor as a driving unit that drives the rotating body 811. Specifically, the rotating body 811 has a substantially disc shape, and its center is fixed to the output shaft of the drive motor.

  The drive motor is constituted by a stepping motor, and always rotates at a constant speed by the power supplied from the power supply / launch control device 243. By driving the drive motor in this way, the rotator 811 rotates in the predetermined direction at a constant speed.

  Concave portions 812 are formed on the periphery of the rotating body 811 at a plurality of locations (in this variation, two locations at intervals of 180 °). Only game balls that have entered these recesses 812 are guided downstream.

  In other words, no matter how the moving speed of the game ball varies on the upstream side of the rotating body 811, the moving speed is made constant by moving to the detection sensor 830 side through the rotating body 811. Adjusted to Thereby, the variation in the passing speed when passing through the detection area DE3 of the detection sensor 830 is suppressed.

  When the configuration having such a ball feeding means is adopted, further improvement in detection accuracy and improvement in crime prevention can be expected by adopting the following configuration. In the above modification, it is possible to adjust the ball feed speed according to the rotation speed of the drive motor, and to change the period in which the detection signal (HI level signal) is output from the detection sensor periodically or irregularly. The value input to the timer counter may be changed in accordance with such a change in period. For example, the voltage applied to the drive motor can be switched between HI and LOW, the detection signal output period is 20 msec when the voltage is at the HI level, and the detection signal output period is set when the voltage is at the LOW level. Set to 30 msec. When the output period is 20 msec (ie, applied voltage = HI level), “9” is set in the timer counter TC, and when 30 msec (ie, applied voltage = LOW level) is selected, the timer counter TC is set. Is set to “14”. As described above, the configuration in which the output period and the count period are switched can make it difficult to grasp the output period of the detection signal.

  Furthermore, the output period switching condition can be associated with noise detection. For example, the output period is set to be 20 msec in a normal state in which noise is not mixed, and the output period is set to be switched from 20 msec to 30 msec when noise is mixed. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp | ascertain suitably mixing of noise. In addition, when the responsiveness at the time of detection is taken into consideration, it is assumed that it is preferable that the ball feeding speed is high. Therefore, when noise is detected as described above, the output period is temporarily extended, so that it is possible to make it difficult to hinder the smoothness of the game progress while enhancing the noise detection function, which is practically preferable. The configuration can be realized.

  (A11) In the first embodiment, the guide passage 275 and the longitudinal passage 322 form a “guide passage”, and the guide passage 275 and the longitudinal passage 322 are connected in a crank shape. Although it is configured to weaken the momentum of the game ball, it is not limited to this. Hereinafter, a modified example of the guide passage will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a), the guide passage 850 is connected to a deceleration passage portion 861 that leads to the winning opening, and a ball detection passage portion 852 that is connected to the downstream side of the deceleration passage portion 861 and in which a detection sensor 880 is disposed. And have.

  The deceleration passage portion 861 uses a centrifugal force generated by the movement of the game ball to generate a frictional force between the game ball and the inner wall of the passage when the game ball passes, thereby reducing the speed of the game ball. It is the channel | path formation part for. Specifically, the speed reduction passage portion 861 is formed to extend in an arc shape, and the game ball passes through the speed reduction passage portion while being in contact with the inner wall of the passage, so that the speed reduction can be effectively performed. It is also possible to further enhance the deceleration effect by making the inner wall surface of the passage a high friction part. For example, in a configuration in which only the side portion of the inner wall of the passage is a high friction portion and the bottom portion of the inner wall of the passage is not a high friction portion, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of clogging.

  In particular, the passing position of the game ball on the wall surface of the passage can be made different by the centrifugal force. In other words, the passage position in the passage wall surface portion changes due to the initial speed variation of the game ball when flowing into the deceleration passage portion 861. Therefore, it is preferable to set the friction level of the passage wall surface portion to be high at a portion where a game ball having a high initial speed passes and to be low at a portion through which a game ball having a low initial speed passes. Thereby, the degree of deceleration can be changed according to the speed of the game ball, and the above-described initial speed variation can be suppressed before the game ball moves from the deceleration path portion 861 to the ball detection path portion 852.

  Hereinafter, the guide passage 850 will be described more specifically. The guide passage 850 is formed so that the cross section of the passage has a circular shape, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. That is, the guide passage 850 is configured such that one game ball passes through the same portion of the guide passage 850 one by one.

  The deceleration passage portion 861 includes a vertical passage portion 862 extending in the vertical direction, a horizontal passage portion 863 extending along a horizontal plane, and a connecting passage portion 864 that smoothly connects the vertical passage portion 862 and the horizontal passage portion 863. Become. The horizontal passage portion 863 and the connecting passage portion 864 are gently curved and are formed in an arc shape when viewed from the passage direction of the vertical passage portion 862. In addition, it is desirable that the curvatures of the lateral passage portion 863 and the connection passage portion 864 are formed to be small on the downstream side. Moreover, although it is formed with the semicircular length of the circular arc part (namely, horizontal passage part 863 and connecting passage part 864) of deceleration passage part 861, it is formed with the length for one round or two rounds or more. The longer the arc portion, the higher the deceleration effect can be expected.

  When the game ball that has flowed into the guide passage 850 moves from the longitudinal passage portion 862 to the connection passage portion 864, the game ball moves along a portion of the inner wall surface of the connection passage portion 864 that is on the outer side in the bending direction. Rampage within 850 is suppressed. Even in the process of moving from the connecting passage portion 864 to the lateral passage portion 863, the movement of the guide passage 850 in contact with the inner wall surface of the guide passage 850 can suppress variation in the flow path. In particular, since the connecting passage portion 864 and the lateral passage portion 863 have a lower height difference than the longitudinal passage portion 862, the movement component in the vertical direction is substantially reduced by passing through the connecting passage portion 864 and the lateral passage portion 863. It is limited to be zero. Further, since the curvature of the connecting passage portion 864 and the lateral passage portion 863 gradually decreases toward the downstream side, the horizontal movement component is also reduced before reaching the entrance portion to the downstream side passage portion 871. It has become easier.

  In the lower guide passage portion 272 shown in the first embodiment, the game ball is configured to suppress lifting from the guide rib 273 of the lower guide passage portion 272 depending on the weight of the game ball. However, in this modified example, the floating of the game ball can be suppressed by using the momentum of the game ball, so that the variation in the vertical position when the game ball flows into the downstream-side passage portion 871 can be preferably suppressed. Thereby, when it flows in into the downstream channel | path part 871, it can suppress that a game ball jumps in downstream. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress variations in the passing speed when passing through the detection sensor 880 (specifically, the detection region) provided in the middle of the downstream passage portion 871.

  (A12) In the first embodiment, the flow velocity of the game ball is made constant by forming the “guide passage” in a crank shape. That is, the momentum of the flow is reduced by causing the game ball to collide with the passage wall portion of the “guide passage”. By changing this, similarly to the technical idea shown in the modified example (a11), it is possible to weaken the momentum of the game ball by friction and to make the passing speed of the game ball passing through the detection area constant. Hereinafter, a specific example thereof will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66B is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the “guide passage” and the “period adjusting means”.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (b), the guide passage 900 is divided into an upstream passage portion 911 and a downstream passage portion 921. The downstream-side passage portion 921 extends in the vertical direction, and a ball receiving portion 923 that extends in the radial direction of the downstream-side passage portion 921 is formed at the inlet portion. The ball receiving portion 923 has a bowl shape that opens upward, and an entrance portion to the downstream side passage portion 921 is formed at the center portion thereof.

  The upstream passage portion 911 is formed to be inclined obliquely, and the outlet portion thereof is located above the end portion of the ball receiving portion 923. For this reason, the game ball that has flowed out of the upstream-side passage portion 911 gradually approaches the inlet portion 922 while moving in the circumferential direction of the ball receiving portion 923. After the momentum of the game ball rolling on the ball receiving portion 923 is sufficiently weakened, the game ball flows into the inlet portion 922 and is provided with a detection sensor 930 (specifically, a detection region provided in the middle of the downstream passage portion 921). ). As described above, after the momentum of the flow is sufficiently weakened, it flows into the inlet portion, so that it is possible to suitably suppress variation in the passing speed when passing through the detection region.

  Note that the modified examples (a10) to (a12) described in detail above can be applied to the second embodiment.

  (A13) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the game ball collides with the ball collision surfaces 325 and 1332, thereby reducing the moving speed toward the detection sensors 350 and 1350 (details are substantially the same). 0) was adopted. It is also possible to attach a buffer member such as a silicon pad to the ball collision surfaces 325 and 1332. Further, it is not always necessary to have the ball collision surface 325, and a buffer member may be disposed at a portion where the ball collision surfaces 325 and 1332 are formed. When the game ball flowing down along the passage collides with the buffer member, the momentum can be weakened, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized. Note that it is preferable to suppress the rebound of the game ball by using a low-repulsive material as the buffer member.

  (A14) The value (specifically, “9”) set in the timer counter TC or the determination timer counter JTC may be changed instead of a fixed value. A further improvement in detection accuracy can be expected by adjusting the detection signals output from the detection sensors 350 and 1350, specifically the value set in the timer counter TC in accordance with the output period of the HI level signal.

  Specifically, the actual value of the length of the output period of the game ball detection signal (HI level signal) output from the detection sensors 350 and 1350 is the initial set value of the length of the output period or the current state is grasped. When there is a difference with respect to the length of the output period (current grasp value), the length of the regulation period is changed within a change width corresponding to the difference. In this case, if the actual measured value of the output period is longer than the initial set value or the current grasp value, the restriction period is lengthened by a corresponding amount.

  More specifically, when it is determined that a winning game ball has occurred, a measurement means (such as a timer counter) is provided for measuring a period from the determination timing until the detection signal falls to the LOW level. A storage means for storing the results is provided, and a plurality of the above-mentioned periods stored in the storage means are selected in order from the newest, and the timer counter TC and the determination timer counter JTC are calculated based on values calculated by averaging the measured periods. It is preferable that the value to be set in is determined.

  In addition, a configuration is adopted in which a threshold is set based on the value calculated in the previous average value calculation, and the average value is calculated by excluding those greatly deviating from the threshold value at the time of selection (smoothing processing, etc.) Thus, even when noise is mixed in, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the average value from being lowered due to the influence of the noise. In addition, the calculation method mentioned above is not limited to an average, but is arbitrary.

  (A15) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, detection information from the detection sensors 350 and 1350 as “detection means” is input to the main control devices 162 and 1162, and “passage determination means” is input. Although the MPUs 611 and 1611 of the main control devices 162 and 1162 execute the signal reading processing and signal determination processing that constitute the above, it is also possible to change this as follows. That is, the detection information from the detection sensors 350 and 1350 may be input to another control device such as the payout control devices 242 and 1242, and the control device may execute the signal reading process and the signal determination process. It is. Furthermore, the signal input process and the signal determination process are not necessarily executed by the same control device, and both processes can be executed by separate control devices.

  (A16) In the first embodiment, the “notification means” has a function of transmitting error information to the error display lamp unit 27, the speaker unit 29, and the hall computer, so that it is easy to grasp when an error occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which notification using the error display lamp unit 27 and the speaker unit 29 performed in the pachinko machine 10 is not performed, and the information is transmitted only to the hall computer when an error occurs.

  Furthermore, a lock means for interrupting the game progress when the frequency of occurrence of errors increases is provided, and the game is resumed by releasing the lock state by the lock means based on the operation of the state return switch 245 or the like. A configuration is also possible.

  (A17) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the high-frequency oscillation type magnetic sensor is used as the “detecting means”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an optical proximity sensor such as a photo sensor may be employed, or a contact sensor such as a push sensor may be employed.

  (A18) In the first embodiment, a part of the longitudinal passages 315 and 322 constituting the “guide passage” is defined by the detection sensor 350 (specifically, the cylindrical portion 362a) as the “detection means”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, it is not necessary to partition a part of the guide passage by the detection sensor. Particularly in the first embodiment, since the detection sensor 350 is a magnetic sensor, it is also possible to arrange the detection sensor outside the passage wall of the guide passage.

  (A19) The error counter EC may be omitted, and an error detection flag may be set when it is determined that noise is detected in the detection signal.

  (A20) In the first embodiment and the first embodiment described above, the HI level signal is output from the detection sensor when the passage of the game ball is detected. However, the passage of the game ball is detected. In this case, a LOW level signal may be output.

  (B1) In the second embodiment, when the number of game balls determined to have won the big prize opening 1261 as the “pick-up part” reaches a specific number (specifically, seven), Although the signal determination preparation process constituting the “abnormality monitoring means” is executed, the execution condition of the signal determination preparation process is not limited to the “number” of game balls. For example, the signal determination preparation process may be executed when a predetermined “period” has elapsed since the opening / closing door 1270 as the “variable means” is opened. As described above, when the “period” is set as the execution condition, the calculation timing is arbitrary in the period, but it is preferable to match the opening timing of the door 1270 as described above.

  Further, for example, a period from when the open / close door 1270 is opened until a specific number of game balls are won may be calculated in advance, and the calculated period may be set as the execution condition. However, when making such changes, it is desirable to consider the following points. The game balls flowing down the game area PE have a minimum interval (specifically 0.6 msec) fired from the game ball launching mechanism in advance, but the game area PE is provided with a number of nails and the like. Since the flow paths of the balls are various, the timing at which the game ball reaches the variable winning device 1082 (specifically, the big winning opening 1261) can be various. If such diversity is allowed, the desired crime prevention effect is obtained when the “period” is set as the execution condition, as compared with the case where the execution condition is determined by the “number” of the game balls as described above. Therefore, it becomes necessary to set a longer monitoring period. This can be a factor causing an increase in control load.

  Therefore, in view of coexistence of security of security and suppression of control load, it is preferable to use the “number” of game balls as an execution condition for abnormality monitoring.

  (B2) In the second embodiment, the upper limit number of game balls that can be determined to have been won during the output period of the detection signal from the number of game balls won (10) that will trigger the closing of the grand prize winning opening 1261 ( The specific number (7) obtained by adding 1 to the number obtained by subtracting 4) is used as the execution condition of the signal determination preparation process (S1412), but is not limited thereto. For example, a signal determination is made by subtracting the upper limit number (4) of game balls that can be determined to have been won during the output period of the detection signal from the number of game balls won (10) that will trigger the closing of the grand prize opening 1261. It is good also as an execution condition of a preparation process (S1412).

  In addition, it is assumed that it is preferable that the tenth game ball be a target for fraud if a large amount of game balls are to be paid out. Therefore, in view of the timing of entering a game ball that is assumed to cause the greatest damage in this way, for example, the “predetermined number” that triggers the closing of the winning number may be set as the execution condition of the signal determination preparation process (S1412). Is possible.

  However, it may be difficult to target only the tenth game ball as an illegal target. Therefore, there is a possibility that the illegal act is executed at a timing after the winning number exceeds half of the predetermined number in consideration of the efficiency of the illegal act. With such a case in mind, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the signal determination preparation process is executed when the number of winnings exceeds half of the “predetermined number”. Even when such a change is made, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in control load while ensuring crime prevention, as compared with the configuration in which the signal determination preparation process is executed from the initial opening of the big winning opening 1261. It becomes possible.

  (B3) In the second embodiment, the signal determination preparation process is validated in the middle of reaching the predetermined number (10) of the winning prize opening 1261. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something. For example, the signal determination preparation process may be validated according to the switching timing of the open / close door 1270 to the open state, and invalidated according to the timing when the open / close door 1270 is switched to the closed state.

  If attention is paid to the fact that a part of the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism reaches a position outside the grand prize winning opening 1261 and is discharged through the outlet, these extra balls become a wasteful investment. If this point is taken into consideration, it becomes possible to win a predetermined number of game balls quickly by performing the above-described differentiation of the detection signals for all the game balls that have won the grand prize opening 1261, which is a wasteful investment. It becomes possible to reduce. In other words, it is possible to obtain a substantial number of game balls by suppressing the investment that is originally required. Here, such an illegal act can be suppressed by making the above-described change.

  (B4) In the second embodiment, the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 serving as the “detection unit” is set to switch on / off monitoring of occurrence of abnormality due to noise mixing or the like. It is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to set the monitoring level to be switched step by step. A configuration that increases the control load by allowing an increase in control load when the possibility of occurrence of an abnormality increases, and reduces the control load by reducing the monitoring level when the possibility of occurrence of an abnormality decreases. By doing so, it is possible to suitably achieve both security of the crime prevention function and suppression of the control load.

  For example, what is necessary is just to set it as the following structures by combining with said each modification. When the number of wins is less than half of the predetermined number, the setting is made so that monitoring is not performed, and the upper limit number (4) of game balls that can be determined to have won during the detection signal output period is the predetermined number (10). When the number obtained by adding 1 to the number subtracted from () is reached (7), the monitoring level is set to “low”, and when the number of winnings reaches the predetermined number, the monitoring level is set to “high”. At this time, the control load at the monitoring level “low” can be reduced by making the value of the determination timer counter at the monitoring level “low” smaller than the value of the determination timer counter at the monitoring level “high”.

  (B5) In the second embodiment described above, the first detection counter DC1 used when performing the winning determination and the second detection counter DC2 used when performing the abnormality determination are used in combination. It is also possible to omit the detection counter DC2 and reflect the detection result by the first detection counter DC1 in abnormality monitoring (specifically, error determination).

  (B6) In the second embodiment, the detection signal from the detection sensor 1350 disposed in the big prize opening 1261 as the “ball entry portion” is monitored. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a detection signal from a detection sensor provided in the ball entrance is monitored. However, since the winning prize opening 1261 is configured such that the number of winnings is limited by the opening / closing door 1270 as “variable means”, it is possible to estimate a period during which fraud etc. is likely to be performed. In addition, it was possible to monitor the monitoring period. On the other hand, at the operation port 1083 and the like, it is unclear at which timing fraud is likely to be performed. Therefore, the operation ports 1083 may be configured to switch between the monitoring state and the non-monitoring state regularly or irregularly. As a result, an increase in the control load can be suppressed at least as compared with the configuration in which the constantly monitoring state is maintained. In particular, by adopting a configuration in which the monitoring state and the non-monitoring state are switched irregularly, and the configuration in which the switching timing is difficult to grasp, it is possible to suitably exhibit the effect of suppressing illegal acts.

  In the second embodiment, the winning determination is made based on the detection signal output from the detection sensor 1350 when a game ball as a “game medium” flows into the big winning opening 1261. That is, the detection sensor 1350 as the “detection means”, the signal reading process as the “passage determination means”, the signal determination preparation process as the “abnormality monitoring means”, etc. Although applied, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to apply the technical idea relating to the reliability improvement of the detection signal shown in the second embodiment other than the winning determination.

  For example, in a slot machine or the like, a lottery such as a big win can be made by inserting a predetermined number of game media (medals). This game media is detected by “detection means” and the detection signal is “determined”. It is possible to determine whether or not the charging can be performed by determining by “means”, and to monitor the abnormality of the detection signal by “monitoring means”. As a result, it is possible to avoid making a determination as if a game medium has been inserted even though no game medium has been inserted due to the influence of noise or the like. In particular, by enabling the “monitoring means” to be switched between a monitoring state and a non-monitoring state, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in control load accompanying an improvement in reliability.

  (B7) In the second embodiment, after the opening / closing door 1270 is switched to the closed state, the monitoring state is switched to the non-monitoring state after 2 sec. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the monitoring state is switched to the non-monitoring state when the closing timer counter CTC for measuring the closing period of the opening / closing door 1270 becomes zero.

  (B8) In the second embodiment, the error notification threshold is set to the maximum value (specifically, three times) at which erroneous detection may occur when the detection signal is differentiated due to noise. Specifically, the error notification is made when the number of false detections detected by the second detection counter DC2 reaches three. The threshold for error notification is arbitrary, but in order to allow the accidental noise mixing while positively observing intentional noise mixing, the second implementation regarding the threshold setting is performed. It is preferable to apply the device shown in the form.

  Further, the value of the error counter EC is reset to “0” by executing error notification, but is not limited to this. For example, the value of the error counter EC can be cleared between rounds.

  Furthermore, although it was set as the structure which performs an error determination between rounds, the execution timing of an error determination is arbitrary. For example, an error determination may be performed at the timing when the error counter EC is updated.

  (B9) In the second embodiment described above, the signal input from the detection sensor 1350 in the signal reading process performed periodically is recognized as LOW level → HI level → HI level. However, this determination condition is arbitrary.

  For example, it may be configured that it is determined that a game ball win has been generated by recognizing LOW level → HI level, or a game ball win is obtained by recognizing LOW level → HI level → HI level → HI level. It is good also as a structure which determines with having generate | occur | produced. However, if the judgment condition is changed to be stricter as in the latter case, it is assumed that the chance of mixing noise increases, and the possibility of invalidating the game ball detection signal increases due to the mixing of the noise. . This is not preferable because it can increase the possibility of a disadvantage to the player. On the other hand, when the judgment condition is changed to be looser as in the former case, it is not preferable because it may increase the chance of intentionally mixing noise or the like and increase the fraud effect due to noise mixing. Therefore, as shown in the second embodiment, if a configuration for providing a detection signal abnormality determination function is provided, occurrence of such inconvenience is suppressed, and disadvantages are generated in both the player and the game hall. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the determination condition while suitably suppressing.

  (B10) In the second embodiment described above, the winning determination at the big winning opening 1261 is performed only when the jackpot is generated. However, the winning determination is similarly performed even at the normal time when the jackpot is not generated. It is also possible.

  (B11) In the second embodiment, the conditions for closing the open / close door 1270 in each round are the same. However, this can be changed as follows. That is, the number of winnings that trigger the closing of the open / close door 1270 in each round may be different. However, when making such changes, it is desirable to make the following changes. That is, it is desirable to change the execution condition of the signal determination preparation process in accordance with the closing condition (specifically, the number of winnings) of each round.

  (C1) In the third embodiment, the first detection sensor 2350A as the “first detection means” and the second detection as the “second detection means” By applying the sensor 2350B and the configuration associated with the detection sensors 2350A and 2350B and comparing the detection results of the detection sensors 2350A and 2350B, the winning determination accuracy is improved. Three or more “detecting means” may be provided. In this case, a storage unit that individually stores determination results based on detection signals from the respective detection units (for example, the number of game balls determined to have won a prize) may be adopted, and the determination results may be compared. . For example, in the case of a configuration having three detection sensors, a determination result is individually output based on an output signal from each detection sensor, and when one of the determination results is different from the other two, It may be configured to determine that noise has occurred.

  (C2) In the third embodiment, the game ball winning is determined based on the determination result of the “determination means”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to apply the technical idea related to the detection accuracy improvement shown in the third embodiment other than the winning determination.

  For example, in a slot machine or the like, a lottery such as a jackpot can be made by inserting a predetermined number of game media. The game media is detected by the “detection means” and the detection information is detected by the “determination means”. It is also possible to adopt a configuration for determining whether or not the charging is possible by determining. As a result, it is possible to avoid making a determination as if a game medium has been inserted even though no game medium has been inserted due to the influence of noise or the like.

  (C3) It is also possible to apply the technical idea relating to the improvement of detection accuracy shown in the third embodiment to the operation ports 2083, 2084, the general winning port 2081, and the like. That is, it is also possible to adopt the general winning port 2081, the operation ports 2083, 2084, etc. as the “ball-entering portion”. Furthermore, the “entering part” does not necessarily have to be a part that causes the game ball to be detached from the game area PE, and includes a configuration in which the entered game ball does not leave the game area PE, such as a through gate. When such a change is made, the timing for performing the error determination is arbitrary. For example, at the timing when it is determined that a winning has occurred based on the detection signal of one of the detection sensors, It is also possible to make an error judgment by referring to the judgment result.

  Since the opening period and the closing period are set at the big prize opening 2261, the timing at which the game ball does not stay in the downstream passage 2335 as the “guide passage”, that is, the detection areas DE1, 2 of the detection sensors 2350A and 2350B. It was possible to make an error determination at the timing of passing DE2. However, there is a possibility that game balls will always flow into the operation ports 2083, 2084 and the like. For this reason, depending on the timing of error determination, the determination result (the number of game balls determined to have won a prize) may differ even though no noise is generated. Therefore, when adopting such a configuration, the following changes may be made together.

  That is, the difference between the determination results of both the detection sensors 2350A and 2350B (winning) is set with the threshold value being the number of game balls that can stay in the passage from the detection area DE1 of the first detection sensor 2350A to the detection area DE2 of the second detection sensor 2350B. The difference between the number of game balls determined to be greater than the threshold value may be determined as an error. In the case of adopting such a configuration, it is possible to set a strict threshold for error determination by reducing the number of game balls that can stay between the detection area DE1 and the detection area DE2. The error notification pattern is not limited to 1. For example, if the threshold is set in two stages and the threshold of one stage is exceeded, a message that commends the player such as “GOOD JOB” by exchanging the possibility that many game balls are flowing in at once A configuration that displays a message suggesting that a problem such as “Please call a staff member” occurs when the threshold value of the two-stage surface (that is, the above-described realistic maximum value) is exceeded. It is good.

  Furthermore, when comparing the determination results, the determination results at the same timing do not necessarily have to be compared. For example, there is provided a stabilizing means for stabilizing the period of the game ball from the detection area DE1 to the detection area DE2, and is defined by the above-mentioned stabilization means from the timing when it is determined that a winning has occurred in the detection area DE2 located on the downstream side. It is also possible to compare the past determination result in the detection area DE1 retroactively with the current determination result in the detection area DE2.

  (C4) In the third embodiment, the output period of the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 2350A is longer than the output period of the detection signal output from the second detection sensor 2350B. It is also possible to reverse this. In this case, the passing speed of the game ball in the first detection sensor 2350A (specifically, the detection area DE1) can be increased, and an improvement in the response of winning determination can be expected.

  (C5) In the third embodiment, the player is given a privilege (specifically, a game ball is paid out) according to the winning determination result based on the detection signal from the first detection sensor 2350A. Although 2 detection sensor 2350B was utilized as a sensor for error determination, it is not limited to this. For example, according to the winning determination result based on the detection signal from the second detection sensor 2350B, it is possible to give a privilege to the player, and the first detection sensor 2350A can be used as an error determination sensor. . Moreover, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the above-described privilege is given only when the winning determination results based on the detection signals of both the detection sensors 2350A and 2350B match.

  However, when these modifications are adopted, it is assumed that the waiting period from when the player visually confirms the winning until the privilege is granted becomes longer. That is, there is a concern that the responsiveness at the time of winning a prize will be reduced. Therefore, preferably, the first detection sensor 2350A located on the upstream side is used as a privilege-giving sensor, and the second detection sensor 2350B located on the downstream side is used as an error detection sensor.

  (C6) In the third embodiment, the first detection sensor 2350A is disposed in the first vertical passage 2336, and the second detection sensor 2350B is disposed in the second vertical passage 2338. That is, the passage direction of the downstream passage 2335 constituting the “guide passage” is changed between the two detection sensors 2350A and 2350B. It is also possible to change this and arrange both detection sensors 2350A and 2350B in a passage extending in one direction.

  (C7) In the third embodiment, the game balls pass through the passages 2325 and 2335 defined by the prize winning collection passage portion 2310, so that the moving speed is constant, A difference was made in the passing speed. The method for adjusting the output period is not limited to this. For example, a difference may be caused in the output period by making the widths (length dimensions in the passage direction) of the detection areas DE1, DE2 different, or the output periods may be set in the control circuits 2670A, 2670B of the detection sensors 2350A, 2350B. An adjustment circuit for adjustment may be provided.

  (C8) In the third embodiment, the passing speed of the game ball passing through the detection area DE2 is made constant. However, this can be changed arbitrarily. A specific example will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the output period adjusting means.

  As shown in FIG. 67, in the midway position of the downflow passage 2802 (specifically, a position between the first detection sensor 2350A and the second detection sensor 2350B) partitioned by the prize winning collection passage portion 2801, Is provided with a ball feeding mechanism 2810. The ball feed mechanism 2810 is provided with a function of sending the game ball that has flowed out of the guide passage 2265 to the second detection sensor 2350B side at a predetermined speed.

  Specifically, the ball feeding mechanism 2810 includes a rotating body 2811 and a driving motor as a driving unit that drives the rotating body 2811. Specifically, the rotating body 2811 has a substantially disc shape, and the center thereof is fixed to the output shaft of the drive motor.

  The drive motor is constituted by a stepping motor, and always rotates at a constant speed by the power supplied from the power supply / launch control device 243. When the drive motor is driven in this way, the rotating body 2811 rotates in the predetermined direction at a constant speed.

  On the periphery of the rotating body 2811, concave portions 2812 are formed at a plurality of locations (in this variation, two locations at intervals of 180 °). Only the game balls that have entered these recesses 2812 are guided downstream.

  In other words, no matter how the moving speed of the game ball varies on the upstream side of the rotating body 2811, the moving speed is constant by moving to the second detection sensor 2350B side through the rotating body 2811. It is adjusted to become. That is, by adopting the ball feed mechanism 2810, the passing speed when passing through the second detection sensor 2350B (detection area DE4) can be adjusted to an arbitrary speed, and the output period can be adjusted. .

  Moreover, when the structure having such a ball feeding means is adopted, further improvement in crime prevention can be expected by adopting the following structure together. In the above modification, it is possible to adjust the ball feed speed according to the rotation speed of the drive motor, and to change the period in which the detection signal (HI level signal) is output from the detection sensor periodically or irregularly. The value input to the timer counter may be changed in accordance with such a change in period. For example, the voltage applied to the drive motor can be switched between HI and LOW, the detection signal output period is 20 msec when the voltage is at the HI level, and the detection signal output period is set when the voltage is at the LOW level. Set to 30 msec. The output period switching condition is associated with noise detection. For example, the output period is set to be 20 msec in a normal state in which noise is not mixed, and the output period is set to be switched from 20 msec to 30 msec when noise is mixed. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp | ascertain suitably mixing of noise. In addition, when the responsiveness at the time of detection is taken into consideration, it is assumed that it is preferable that the ball feeding speed is high. Therefore, when noise is detected as described above, the output period is temporarily extended, so that it is possible to make it difficult to hinder the smoothness of the game progress while enhancing the noise detection function, which is practically preferable. The configuration can be realized.

  (C9) In the third embodiment, the game ball is allowed to fall freely to suppress the speed variation when the game ball passes through the detection area DE. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, it is possible to have a configuration in which a game ball flows down along a passage extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and a detection region DE may be provided at an intermediate position in the passage.

  (C10) In the third embodiment, the movement period from the detection area DE1 to the detection area DE2 is fixed, but both movement periods can be variable. In this case, for example, it is possible to change the movement period by changing the passage length. However, with such a configuration, it may be difficult to ensure smooth flow of the game ball. Therefore, for example, a conveyor may be provided on the upper surface of the horizontal passage 2337 and the game balls may be transported to the second vertical passage 2338 by this conveyor. By adjusting the transport speed by the conveyor, the moving periods can be made different. As a result, it is possible to make difficult the act of mixing noise at the timing when the game ball passes the detection area.

  (C11) In the third embodiment, the signal inputted from the detection sensor 2350 in the signal reading process performed periodically is recognized as LOW level → HI level → HI level, so that the game ball is won. However, this determination condition is arbitrary. For example, it may be configured that it is determined that a winning of a game ball has occurred by recognizing LOW level → HI level → HI level → HI level, or by recognizing the LOW level → HI level, It may be configured to determine that a winning has occurred.

  (C12) In the third embodiment, the determination condition for error (noise) determination in the signal determination process is the same as the determination condition for normal winning determination. That is, it is determined that an error has occurred by recognizing that signals input from the detection sensors 2350 and 450 are LOW level → HI level → HI level. The determination conditions for the error determination are arbitrary, and are not necessarily the same as the determination conditions for the winning determination. However, if both determination conditions are the same, it is possible to distinguish harmless noise from harmful noise, and it is excellent in that it can be expected to improve crime prevention. Therefore, it is desirable to unify both judgment conditions.

  (C13) In the third embodiment, detection information from the detection sensor 2350 as “detection means” is input to the main controller 2162, and signal reading processing and signal determination processing constituting the “passage determination means” are performed. Although it is configured to be executed by the MPU 2611 of the main control device 2162, it can be changed as follows. That is, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which detection information from the detection sensor 2350 is input to another control device such as a payout control device, and the signal reading processing and signal determination processing are executed by the control device. Furthermore, the signal input process and the signal determination process are not necessarily executed by the same control device, and both processes can be executed by separate control devices.

  (C14) In the third embodiment, the “notification unit” has a function of transmitting error information to the error display lamp unit, the speaker unit, and the hall computer, thereby facilitating grasping when an error occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which notification using an error display lamp unit or a speaker unit performed in a pachinko machine is not performed, and that information is transmitted only to the hall computer when an error occurs.

  Further, there is provided a lock means for interrupting the game progress when the frequency of occurrence of errors increases, and the game is resumed by releasing the lock state by the lock means based on the operation of the state return switch or the like. It is also possible.

  (C15) In the third embodiment, a high-frequency oscillation type magnetic sensor is employed as the “detecting means”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an optical proximity sensor such as a photo sensor may be employed, or a contact sensor such as a push sensor may be employed.

  (C16) In the third embodiment, the detection sensor 2350 (specifically, the cylindrical portion 2362a) as the “detection means” is configured to partition a part of the longitudinal passages 2336 and 2338 constituting the “guide passage”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, it is not necessary to partition a part of the guide passage by the detection sensor. Particularly in the third embodiment, since the detection sensor 2350 is a magnetic sensor, it is also possible to arrange the detection sensor outside the passage wall of the guide passage.

  (C17) In the third embodiment, the abnormality determination is performed by comparing the numbers of detected game balls by the respective detection sensors 2350. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is abnormal by comparing the number of times that the first detection sensor 2350A detects that the detection signal is HI level with the number of times that the second detection sensor 2350B detects that the detection signal is HI level signal. It is good also as a structure which performs determination. However, when such a change is made, it is assumed that a difference occurs in the number of times of detection because the output periods of the detection signals are different. This difference is assumed to increase or decrease due to variations in the passing speed of game balls. Therefore, it is preferable to set a margin for allowing a certain amount of error in the abnormality determination in consideration of such variation.

  In addition, the number of times that the first detection sensor 2350A detects that the detection signal is at the LOW level during the period in which the game ball detection signal is output, and the detection signal is the LOW level signal at the second detection sensor 2350B. It is good also as a structure which compares the frequency | count detected as there being. In this case, the margin can be reduced as compared with the case of referring to the number of times of detection of the HI level signal, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

  (C18) The configuration relating to the abnormality monitoring of the detection signal shown in the second embodiment, more specifically, the configuration for switching the “abnormality monitoring means” between “monitoring state” and “non-monitoring state” is described in the third embodiment. It is also possible to apply to. When applying such a change, when the number of winnings determined based on the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 2350A becomes a “specific number”, monitoring using the second detection sensor 2350B is performed. A configuration for switching to a state is preferable. The “specific number” may be set by referring to the second embodiment or the modification shown in the second embodiment.

  (D1) In the fourth embodiment, high-frequency oscillation type proximity sensors are employed for the first detection sensor 3350A as the “first detection means” and the second detection sensor 3350B as the “second detection means”. . The first detection sensor 3350A has a configuration in which a high frequency with the maximum amplitude is input to the processing circuit 3680A as the “first output unit” when the game ball is not detected, and the high frequency amplitude is suppressed when the game ball is detected. In the 2 detection sensor 3350B, the high frequency with the maximum amplitude is input to the processing circuit 3680B as the “second output unit” when the game ball is detected, and the high frequency amplitude is suppressed when the game ball is not detected. It is also possible to do. That is, the first detection sensor 3350A has a configuration in which a high frequency with the maximum amplitude is input to the processing circuit 3680A as the “first output unit” when the game ball is detected, and the high frequency amplitude is suppressed when the game ball is not detected. In the 2 detection sensor 3350B, the high-frequency wave with the maximum amplitude is input to the processing circuit 3680B as the “second output unit” when the game ball is not detected, but this can be reversed.

  Further, the detection method of the first detection sensor 3350A as the “first detection means” and the second detection sensor 3350B as the “second detection means” is changed to the processing circuits 3680A and 680B in the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B. However, it is also possible to change this as follows.

  While adopting a contact type sensor (for example, a push sensor) as one detection sensor and adopting a non-contact type sensor (for example, a photosensor) as the other detection sensor, it is possible to make the detection method different. It is also possible to employ non-contact type proximity sensors for both detection sensors, but when making such a change, one of these detection sensors is an optical sensor and the other is not an optical sensor. (For example, a high-frequency oscillation type sensor) may be employed. When such a detection method is changed, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of each detection sensor.

  For example, when an optical sensor and a high-frequency oscillation sensor are used in combination, it is possible to suppress the magnetic field generated by the high-frequency oscillation detection sensor from being affected when a ball is detected by the optical sensor. In this case, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by arranging the detection regions in both detection sensors at the same location and setting the output timing of the detection signals to be synchronized. Specifically, in the fourth embodiment, since both detection sensors 3350A and 3350B are high frequency oscillation sensors, the detection positions of both detection sensors 3350A and 3350B are passed through to avoid mutual interference of magnetic fields. The configuration is shifted in the direction. For this reason, the timing at which a game ball is detected by each of the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B is shifted, resulting in a time lag in the passage determination. In this case, a difference occurs in the result of game ball passage determination (specifically, the number of winning game balls), and a margin for allowing the difference is set as a threshold for error determination. In this regard, if the detection positions can be aligned as described above, it is not necessary to set a margin for the threshold value, the time lag from the timing when noise is mixed to the time when the error determination is made is reduced, and the response of the error determination It is possible to contribute to improvement.

  As already described, harmful noise that can affect the winning determination can be generated intentionally as well as accidentally. When noise is intentionally generated in this way, error detection may become difficult if the winning judgment number is adjusted using the above difference. In this regard, if the detection signals are output at the same timing as described above, it is difficult to perform such book alignment and further improvement of the crime prevention function can be expected.

  As described above, aligning the detection positions of a plurality of high-frequency oscillation detection sensors can cause the magnetic fields generated in the detection sensors to interfere with each other, so it is difficult to stabilize the detection function of the game ball. It is assumed. However, from the viewpoint of strengthening the crime prevention function, it is possible to adopt such a configuration. Hereinafter, based on the timing chart of FIG. 68, an aspect of error determination when this modification is adopted will be described.

  When the game ball reaches the detection area, the amplitude of the high frequency input to the processing circuit of the first detection sensor becomes almost 0 at the timing of te1, and is output from the first detection sensor by falling below a predetermined threshold. The detected signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Further, at the same timing, the amplitude of the high frequency input to the processing circuit of the second detection sensor is maximized and exceeds a predetermined threshold value, so that the detection signal output from the second detection sensor is changed from the LOW level. Switch to HI level.

  After that, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor at the timing of te2 when the timer interrupt process is executed twice is LOW level → HI level → HI level, so that the game is based on the detection signal. It is determined that a ball win has occurred. As a result, the value of the check counter is incremented by “1” and counted up from “100” to “101”.

  Similarly, when the detection signal output from the second detection sensor at the timing of te2 is LOW level → HI level → HI level, it is determined that a winning of the game ball has occurred based on the detection signal. . As a result, the value of the check counter is decremented by “1” and counted down from “101” to “100”. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the check counter is “100”. At this time, since the value of the check counter has returned to “100”, it is determined that the detection signal is normal.

  After that, when noise is generated at the timing of te3 while the game ball is passing through the detection area, and the noise is mixed into the processing circuit via the detection coil or the like, the detection signals output from both detection sensors One of them changes. Specifically, since the amplitude of the high frequency input to the processing circuit of the first detection sensor is suppressed to almost zero, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor is temporarily caused by the mixing of the noise. Thus, the HI level is switched to the LOW level. On the other hand, since the amplitude of the high frequency input to the processing circuit of the second detection sensor is kept at the maximum, the detection signal output from the second detection sensor changes due to the noise (switches to the LOW level). There is nothing to do.

  When the noise disappears at the subsequent timing te4, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor is switched to the HI level. Thereafter, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor at the timing of te5 at which the timer interrupt process is executed twice is LOW level → HI level → HI level, so that the game is performed based on the detection signal. It is determined that a ball win has occurred. As a result, the value of the check counter is incremented by “1” and counted up from “100” to “101”. At this time, since the output signal from the second detection sensor does not change due to noise, the value of the check counter is maintained at “101” without being subtracted. When it is confirmed in the timer interrupt processing that the value of the check counter is “101”, that is, out of the initial value “100”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the detection signal, and error notification is executed. The That is, if even one harmful noise is mixed, error notification is immediately executed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of te6 when the game ball has finished passing through the detection area, the amplitude of the high frequency input to the processing circuit of the first detection sensor is maximized and exceeds the threshold value, and is output from the first detection sensor. The detection signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level. Further, at the timing of te6, the detection signal output from the second detection sensor is changed from the HI level because the amplitude of the high frequency input to the processing circuit of the second detection sensor is suppressed to substantially zero and falls below the threshold value. Switch to LOW level.

  When the noise is generated again at the timing of te7 after the game ball passes the detection area, and the noise is mixed in the signal input to each processing circuit, it changes to one of the detection signals output from both detection sensors. Occurs. Specifically, since the amplitude of the high frequency input to the processing circuit of the first detection sensor is kept at the maximum, the detection signal output from the first detection sensor is changed by the noise. No. On the other hand, since the amplitude of the high frequency input to the processing circuit of the second detection sensor is maintained at almost zero, the detection signal output from the second detection sensor due to the mixing of the noise is temporarily at the HI level. Switches from LOW to LOW level.

  Thereafter, the detection signal output from the second detection sensor at the timing of te8 at which the timer interrupt process is executed twice is LOW level → HI level → HI level, so that the game is performed based on the detection signal. It is determined that a ball win has occurred. As a result, the value of the check counter is decremented by “1” and counted down from “100” to “99”. At this time, since the output signal from the first detection sensor does not change due to noise, the value of the check counter is maintained at “99” without being added. When it is confirmed in the timer interrupt processing that the value of the check counter is “99”, that is, out of the initial value “100”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the detection signal, and error notification is executed. The That is, if even one harmful noise is mixed, error notification is immediately executed. When the noise disappears at the subsequent timing te9, the detection signal output from the second detection sensor is switched to the LOW level.

  As described above, in the modification described based on FIG. 68, the high-frequency amplitude in one detection sensor is always kept above the detection signal switching threshold at any timing, and the high-frequency in the other detection sensor. Is held below the detection signal switching threshold. In other words, no matter what timing the noise mixing occurs, there is always a difference between the two detection signals, and it is possible to quickly detect the noise mixing.

  (D2) In the fourth embodiment, the first detection sensor 3350A as the “first detection means” and the second detection sensor 3350B as the “second detection means” are provided separately. It is not limited to this. For example, one detection sensor may include a first detection unit and a second detection unit.

  When making such changes, the following changes may be made. In other words, the oscillation circuits may be integrated and a high frequency generated by one oscillation circuit may be supplied to each detection unit.

  (D3) In the fourth embodiment, the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B have the oscillation circuits 3660A and 3660B as “oscillation units”. However, the “oscillation unit” can be provided outside the detection sensor. It is. For example, in consideration of the fact that AC is generally supplied to gaming machines, a configuration is provided in which a conversion unit that converts the frequency of the AC is provided separately, and the high frequency converted by the conversion unit is supplied to the detection sensor. Also good.

  Further, it is not always necessary to employ an LC circuit for the generation of a high frequency. For example, a circuit having a crystal resonator or the like can be employed.

  (D4) The detection signals output from the output circuits 3690A and 3690B of the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B may be binary signals that are different between when the game ball is detected and when it is not detected. That is, it is not always necessary to output the HI level signal when detecting the game ball, and a LOW level signal may be output when detecting the game ball.

  In the fourth embodiment, the signals output from both detection sensors 3350A and 3350B at the time of game ball detection are both set to the HI level. However, either one of them is changed to the LOW level at the time of game ball detection. It is also possible to have a configuration that outputs a signal, and the detection signals output from the respective detection sensors 3350A and 3350B at the time of game ball detection can be made different at the HI level / LOW level.

  (D5) The first detection sensor 3350A as the “first detection means” is configured to change the amplitude of the high frequency by changing the resonance frequency of the detection circuit 3670A. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the high-frequency amplitude is larger than the threshold when the game ball is not passing, and the high-frequency amplitude is smaller than the threshold when the game ball is passing, using the loss change of the coil that occurs when the game ball approaches the coil, It is also possible to temporarily suppress the amplitude of the high frequency. In this case, the game ball may be configured to pass the magnetic field generated in the coil of the oscillation circuit.

  (D6) In the fourth embodiment, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a game ball based on the detection signal output from the first detection sensor 3350A as the “first detection means”. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which provides the said privilege based on the detection signal of the 2nd detection sensor 3350B located in the downstream rather than the 1st detection sensor 3350A, or both detection signals output from both detection sensors 3350A and 3350B It is good also as a structure which provides the said privilege based on.

  However, when these changes are made, the period from when the game ball flows into the operation port 3083 until the game ball is paid out may be prolonged, and the responsiveness of privilege provision may be reduced. Therefore, it is preferable to differentiate the functions to be given to each detection sensor, preferably by using the upstream detection sensor for privilege provision and the downstream detection sensor for error check. Thereby, improvement in detection accuracy and improvement in responsiveness can both be suitably achieved.

  (D7) In the fourth embodiment, when a game ball as a “game medium” flows into the operation ports 3083 and 3084, the winning determination is performed based on the detection signals output from the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B. The configuration. In other words, the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B as “detection means” and the signal reading process (specifically, each process of S3201 to S3215) as “passage determination means” are applied to the operation ports 3083 and 3084 as “entrance portions”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to apply the technical idea related to the detection accuracy improvement shown in the fourth embodiment other than the winning determination.

  For example, in a slot machine or the like, by inserting a predetermined number of game media (medals), a lottery such as a big win becomes possible, and while this game media is detected by two detection sensors as “detection means”, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which whether or not the input is possible is determined by determining the detection signals output from these detection sensors by “determination means”. As a result, it is possible to avoid making a determination as if a game medium has been inserted even though no game medium has been inserted due to the influence of noise or the like.

  In addition, it is possible to apply the technical idea related to the detection accuracy improvement described in the fourth embodiment other than the operation opening 3083, 3084 winning determination. That is, it is also possible to employ the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 3082, etc. as the “pick-up part”.

  For example, when a game ball that has passed through the general winning opening 81 passes a detection sensor (specifically, a detection area) for the general winning opening 81, a “period adjusting means” is provided to adjust the passing speed to a specified value. At the same time, detection of a plurality of game balls may be restricted within a specific period having the same length as the passage period.

  (D8) The detection sensor 3350 and the upper recovery passage portion 3311 for the upper operation port 3083 and the detection sensor 3350 and the lower recovery passage portion 3321 for the lower operation port 3084 may be shared. That is, a common passage through which game balls that have flowed into the upper operation port 3083 and the lower operation port 3084 pass may be provided, and each detection sensor may be provided in the common passage.

  (D9) In the fourth embodiment described above, the signal input from the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B in the signal reading process performed periodically is recognized as LOW level → HI level → HI level, so that the game ball However, this determination condition is arbitrary. For example, it may be configured that it is determined that a winning of a game ball has occurred by recognizing LOW level → HI level → HI level → HI level, or by recognizing the LOW level → HI level, It may be configured to determine that a winning has occurred.

  (D10) In the fourth embodiment, the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B are arranged in the vertical passages 3315 and 3322 constituting the “guide passage”, but the arrangement locations of the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B are arbitrary. . For example, in a configuration having a passage extending substantially in the horizontal direction, each of the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B can be disposed in the passage.

  (D11) In the fourth embodiment, the first detection sensor 3350A and the second detection sensor 3350B are arranged one above the other. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to arrange the first detection sensor 3350A and the second detection sensor 3350B side by side.

  (D12) In the fourth embodiment, the high-frequency frequencies generated by the oscillation circuits 3660A and 3660B of the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B are unified, and the HI / LOW in the processing circuit 3680A of the first detection sensor 3350A. The threshold value for switching and the threshold value for switching HI / LOW in the processing circuit 3680B of the second detection sensor 3350B are unified, but the frequency of the high frequency generated in each oscillation circuit 3660A, 3660B and the threshold value in each processing circuit 3680A, 3680B. Is optional.

  (D13) In the fourth embodiment, a single check counter CC is used to compare the number of game balls determined to be won based on detection signals from the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a first prize counter that counts the number of prizes detected by the first detection sensor 3350A and a second prize counter that counts the number of prizes detected by the second detection sensor 3350B are provided, and the value of each prize counter is provided. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an abnormality determination is performed by comparing.

  (D14) In the fourth embodiment, the LC parallel circuit is employed as the detection circuits 3670A and 3670B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Any circuit may be employed as long as it has at least a coil and can change the resonance frequency when a game ball approaches the coil. For example, an LC series circuit, an LCR parallel circuit, or the like can be employed.

  (D15) In the fourth embodiment, detection information from the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B as “detection means” is input to the main control device 3162, and signal reading processing and signal determination constituting the “passage determination means” are performed. Although the processing is executed by the MPU 3611 of the main control device 3162, this can be changed as follows. That is, the detection information from the detection sensors 3350A and 3350B may be input to another control device such as the payout control device 242, and the control device may execute the signal reading process and the signal determination process. . Furthermore, the signal input process and the signal determination process are not necessarily executed by the same control device, and both processes can be executed by separate control devices.

  (D16) In the fourth embodiment, the “notification means” has a function of transmitting error information to the error display lamp unit, the speaker unit, and the hall computer, so that it is easy to grasp when an error occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which notification using an error display lamp unit or a speaker unit performed in a pachinko machine is not performed, and that information is transmitted only to the hall computer when an error occurs.

  Further, there is provided a lock means for interrupting the game progress when the frequency of occurrence of errors increases, and the game is resumed by releasing the lock state by the lock means based on the operation of the state return switch or the like. It is also possible.

  (D17) In the fourth embodiment, the detection sensor 3350 (specifically, the cylindrical portion 3362a) as the “detection means” is configured to partition a part of the longitudinal passages 3315 and 3322 that constitute the “guide passage”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, it is not necessary to partition a part of the guide passage by the detection sensor. Particularly in the present embodiment, since the detection sensor 3350 is a magnetic sensor, it is also possible to dispose the detection sensor outside the passage wall of the guide passage.

  (D18) The configuration related to the abnormality monitoring of the detection signal shown in the second embodiment, more specifically, the configuration in which “abnormality monitoring means” is switched between “monitoring state” and “non-monitoring state” is described in the fourth embodiment. It is also possible to apply to. When such a change is applied, when the number of winnings determined based on the output signal from the detection sensor 3350 becomes a “specific number”, the configuration is configured to switch from the non-monitoring state to the monitoring state. Good. The “specific number” may be set by referring to the second embodiment or the modification shown in the second embodiment.

  (E1) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start the rotation of the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

Feature A1. A guide passage for guiding the game medium (for example, the lower guide passage portion 272 and the lower collection passage portion 321);
Detection means (detection sensor 350) for detecting a game ball passing the game medium detection position in the guide passage and outputting a predetermined detection signal;
Passing determination means for determining whether or not a game medium has passed through the gaming medium detection position based on the detection signal (function of executing steps S203 to S208 of signal reading processing in the MPU 611 of the main controller 162). Prepared,
A game machine that executes a predetermined process (step S501 of the normal process in the MPU 611 of the main controller 162) based on the determination result when it is determined by the passage determination means that the game medium has passed through the gaming medium detection position. In
A period in which an output period during which a game medium detection signal is output as the detection signal is set to a predetermined period by adjusting the passing speed of each game medium at the game medium detection position to be constant. Adjusting means (for example, the guide rib 273 of the lower guide passage 272 and the ball collision surface 325 of the vertical passage 322);
The passage determination means for the second and subsequent gaming media by the passage determination means within the same length of time as the output period, and the execution of the predetermined process based on the result of the passage determination for the second and subsequent gaming media. A gaming machine comprising: restriction means for restricting at least one of them (function of executing signal reading processing in the MPU 611 of the main controller 162).

  According to the feature A1, when the game medium moving in the guide passage passes the game medium detection position in the guide passage, the game medium is detected by the detecting means. Based on the detection signal from the detection means, the game medium passage determination at the game medium detection position is executed. When it is determined by the passage determination means that the game medium has passed the game medium detection position, a predetermined process is executed. For example, this process may be configured to give a player a privilege such as payout of game media or a lottery right such as jackpot.

  When noise or the like is mixed in the detection signal from the detection means, it is assumed that erroneous determination occurs due to such noise or the like. For example, when noise is mixed in the detection signal, when one game medium passes the game medium detection position, it can be determined as if a plurality of game media have passed through the game medium detection position.

  In this regard, in this feature, the period during which the game medium detection signal is output is adjusted so as to be a predetermined period, and the passage determination means 2 within the time having the same length as the adjusted output period. The influence of noise can be suppressed by restricting at least one of the passage determination of the first and subsequent gaming media and the execution of the predetermined processing based on the passage determination result of the second and subsequent gaming media. That is, even if noise indicating the passage of a plurality of game media is mixed in the detection signal, it is restricted that the game media has passed based on such an erroneous signal, or the predetermined processing described above is performed. Can be restricted from being executed. In this way, it is possible to improve the determination accuracy by validating only the passage of one game medium within the same length of time as the output period. In particular, in this feature, since the output period of the detection signal can be a period of a known length, it is possible to accurately grasp the erroneous detection of the game medium due to noise or the like within the same length of time as the output period. That is, if the output period of the detection signal is unknown, it becomes difficult to correctly determine whether it is a valid detection or a false detection if a plurality of game media are detected. According to this, such inconvenience can be solved. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the disadvantage by misdetection can be suppressed and it can contribute to the reliability improvement of a game machine.

Feature A2. A guide passage for guiding the game medium (for example, the lower guide passage portion 272 and the lower collection passage portion 321);
Detection means (detection sensor 350) for detecting a game ball passing the game medium detection position in the guide passage and outputting a predetermined detection signal;
Passage determination means for determining whether or not a game medium has passed through the game medium detection position based on the detection signal (function of executing steps S203 to S208 of signal reading processing in the MPU 611 of the main control device 162);
When the passage determination unit determines that the game medium has passed through the game medium detection position, a privilege grant unit that grants a privilege to the player based on the determination result (for example, normal processing in the MPU 611 of the main control device 162) Of executing step S501)
A period in which an output period during which a game medium detection signal is output as the detection signal is set to a predetermined period by adjusting the passing speed of each game medium at the game medium detection position to be constant. Adjusting means (for example, the guide rib 273 of the lower guide passage 272 and the ball collision surface 325 of the vertical passage 322);
Restriction means for restricting the provision of the privilege based on a detection signal indicating the passage of the second and subsequent gaming media within the same length of time as the output period (signal reading processing is executed in the MPU 611 of the main control device 162) A gaming machine characterized by having a function).

  According to the feature A2, when the game medium moving in the guide passage passes the game medium detection position in the guide passage, the game medium is detected by the detection means. When it is determined that the game medium has passed the game medium detection position based on the detection signal from the detection means, a privilege (for example, a lottery right such as payout of game medium or jackpot) is given to the player. The

  When noise or the like is mixed in the detection signal from the detection means, it is assumed that erroneous determination occurs due to such noise or the like. For example, when noise is mixed in the detection signal, when one game medium passes the game medium detection position, it can be determined as if a plurality of game media have passed through the game medium detection position. If such a misjudgment is made, a privilege will be unfairly given to the player, and it is assumed that the soundness of the game is impaired.

  In this regard, in this feature, the period during which the game medium detection signal is output is adjusted to be a predetermined period, and the second and subsequent times within the same length of time as the output period thus adjusted are used. It was set as the structure which controls privilege provision based on the detection signal which shows passage of a game medium. Even if noise indicating the passage of a plurality of game media is mixed in the detection signal, provision of a privilege based on such an erroneous signal can be avoided, and the accuracy of determining the passage of the game media can be improved. In particular, in this feature, since the output period of the detection signal can be a period of a known length, it is possible to accurately grasp the erroneous detection of the game medium due to noise or the like within the same length of time as the output period. That is, if the output period of the detection signal is unknown, it becomes difficult to correctly determine whether it is a valid detection or a false detection if a plurality of game media are detected. According to this, such inconvenience can be solved. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the disadvantage by misdetection can be suppressed and it can contribute to the reliability improvement of a game machine.

  For example, when it is determined that a plurality of game media have passed within the same length of time as the output period, only the passage of one game medium is validated and the passage of other game media is invalidated. It is good to give the privilege according to the passage of the game media.

Feature A3. When a game medium detection signal is output from the detection means, a restriction period setting means (main control device 162) that sets a period until the detection signal changes from a game medium detection signal to a game medium non-detection signal. MPU611 has a function of executing step S210 of the signal reading process),
The gaming machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2, wherein the restriction means executes the restriction within a restriction period set by the restriction period setting means.

  As shown in the feature A3, if the restriction period is set until the game medium detection signal changes to the game medium non-detection signal, and the restriction is performed within the restriction period, the feature A1 or feature A2 The shown configuration can be suitably realized.

Feature A4. Restriction period setting means for setting a restriction period for performing the restriction within the same length of time as the output period at the timing when the passage determination means determines that the game medium has passed through the gaming medium detection position. (Function to execute step S210 of the signal reading process in the MPU 611 of the main controller 162),
The gaming machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2, wherein the restriction means executes the restriction within a restriction period set by the restriction period setting means.

  In the configuration shown in the feature A1 and the like, a period corresponding to the regulation period may be periodically updated regardless of the game medium passage determination. However, when such a configuration is adopted, it may be difficult to eliminate the influence of noise when the detection signal is output so as to extend over a plurality of periods. For example, when noise is mixed in accordance with the timing that is the boundary of each period, it can be mistaken that individual detection signals are output in both periods.

  In this regard, if the restriction period is set when it is determined that the game medium has passed as shown in this feature, the above-described inconvenience can be suitably suppressed, and the reliability can be further improved. I can expect.

Feature A5. When a game medium detection signal is output from the detection means, a period until the detection signal changes from a game medium detection signal to a game medium non-detection signal is defined as a regulation period, and the game medium detection position is determined by the passage determination means. Including a restriction period setting means (a function of executing step S210 of the signal reading process in the MPU 611 of the main control device 162) for setting the restriction period at a timing when it is determined that the game medium has passed.
The gaming machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2, wherein the restriction means executes the restriction within a restriction period set by the restriction period setting means.

  A configuration in which a regulation period is set when it is determined that the game medium has passed as shown in this feature, and regulation is performed by the regulation means until the detection signal changes from a game medium detection signal to a game medium non-detection signal. Then, the configuration shown in the feature A1 and the like can be suitably realized.

  Feature A6. The regulation period is set to be a period obtained by subtracting a required period from the output period from when the game medium detection signal is output until the passage determination unit determines the passage of the game medium. The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A5,

  When the determination by the passage determination means is performed, a plurality of determination conditions can be set for the purpose of improving the determination accuracy. If the determination accuracy is to be improved in this way, there may be a time lag from when the game medium detection signal is output until the determination is completed. In such a configuration, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by setting a period obtained by excluding the period required for the passage determination of one game medium from the output period as the regulation period.

  Note that the restriction means executes a restriction on the passage determination of the game medium by the passage determination means within the restriction period (function of executing step S202 of the signal reading process in the MPU 611 of the main control device 162). It is good to have composition which has. Thereby, compared with the case where the process using a detection result is controlled, reduction of a control load can be aimed at. Furthermore, it can suppress that the freedom degree of the timing which performs the said process resulting from having a control means falls.

  Feature A7. One of the features A3 to A6, wherein the output period is set to a period shorter than an actual required time for the game medium to reach the game medium detection position and finish passing thereafter. The gaming machine described in one.

  According to the configuration having the regulation period setting means as shown in the feature A3 and the like, it is possible to suppress a decrease in detection accuracy due to mixing of noise or the like. However, depending on the setting pattern of the restriction period (start / end timing and length between synchronizations), there is a possibility that the game medium is not considered to have passed though the game medium actually passed the game medium detection position. Arise. This is not preferable because it can be a factor that the player suffers from disadvantage, and furthermore, it becomes difficult to set the period by the restriction period setting means. In particular, such inconvenience has passed through the game medium detection position in such a way that a plurality of game media are connected in a game machine that improves the determination accuracy by checking a plurality of requirements for one detection information. Is likely to occur in some cases.

  In this regard, according to this feature, it is possible to facilitate the determination of the passage of individual game balls, to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above disadvantages, and to realize a practically preferable configuration.

  For example, it may be configured such that the detection of the game medium by the detection means becomes impossible at least either immediately after the game medium reaches the game medium detection position or immediately before it has passed.

Feature A8. Comprising measuring means for measuring the length of the output period in the detection signal;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A7, wherein the regulation period setting unit variably sets the length of the regulation period based on a measurement result by the measurement unit.

  In the configuration shown in the feature A4 and the like, the detection accuracy is improved by using both the output period and the regulation period determined by the period adjusting means. The output period may change due to various factors such as deterioration according to the individual gaming machine and usage period. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the length of the actual output period is measured by the measuring means and the regulation period is variably set according to the result, the detection accuracy can be suitably secured. Become.

  Feature A9. When the regulation period setting unit variably sets the length of the regulation period based on the measurement result by the measurement unit, the regulation period setting unit performs a smoothing process on the length of the regulation period to obtain a new regulation period length. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the gaming machine is set.

  When the regulation period is variably set according to the actual output period length (actual length measurement value), the difference between the output period length recognized in the calculation process and the actual output period length is reduced. be able to. However, it is conceivable that the actual measurement value of the output period may vary somewhat with each measurement, or may vary greatly temporarily due to the influence of noise or the like. In this respect, according to the feature A9, since the length of the regulation period is variably set while performing the smoothing process, the regulation period is suitably set without being affected by variations in the actual measurement value of the output period or noise. it can.

Feature A10. Based on the detection signal, signal determination means for determining that the passage of the second and subsequent game media is detected within the same length of time as the output period (for example, signal determination processing in the MPU 611 of the main control device 162) Of executing S301 to S305)
An abnormality diagnosis unit (for example, a function of executing S306 to S308 of signal determination processing in the MPU 611 of the main control device 162) that performs abnormality diagnosis based on a determination result by the signal determination unit is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A9.

  According to the feature A8, it is possible to detect a malfunction or the like of the detection means at an early stage by diagnosing an abnormality of the detection signal (for example, mixing of noise or the like). Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the fall of detection accuracy suitably.

Feature A11. The abnormality diagnosis means calculates the number of times of determination that the second and subsequent gaming media have passed within the same length of time as the output period,
Provided is a notification means (for example, a function for executing S501 of the normal process in the MPU 611 of the main control device 162 or the error display lamp unit 27) that performs abnormality notification when the number of times of determination reaches a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to Feature A10, wherein:

  According to the feature A9, it is possible to contribute to the functional maintenance of the gaming machine by notifying the hall manager or the like by the notification means of mixing of noise or the like. In a gaming machine provided with such a notification function, it is assumed that the game progress is likely to be hindered by excessive notification. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the notification is executed when the number of determinations (for example, the number of occurrences of abnormality) determined that the second and subsequent game media have passed has reached a predetermined number. As a result, the smooth progress of the game can be ensured while improving the maintenance function of the gaming machine.

Feature A12. A game board (game board 80) in which a game area (game area PE) in which a game ball as the game medium flows down is formed;
Provided in the game area, and a ball entry portion (operating ports 83, 84, etc.) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
The guide passage guides at least the game ball that has entered the ball entrance part to the back side of the game board,
The game medium detection position is arranged in a portion located on the back side of the game board in the guide passage,
The detection means is a high-frequency oscillation type proximity sensor, and temporarily suppresses high-frequency oscillation when the game medium passes through the game medium detection position, so that the two differ depending on whether the game medium is detected or not detected. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, which outputs a value signal.

  According to the feature A12, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the entrance portion, the game ball is guided to the back side of the game board by the guide passage. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the game medium detection position, high-frequency oscillation is suppressed, and different binary signals are output when the game ball passes and when it does not pass. When detecting the passage of a game ball using a high frequency, if a high frequency is output from the outside of the gaming machine to the detection means, it is assumed that such a high frequency from the outside of the gaming machine is mixed in the detection information.

  Therefore, in this feature, by arranging the game medium detection position on the back side of the game board, the game medium detection position can be made difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine. As a result, for example, even if a fraudulent person intentionally mixes a high frequency, it is difficult to grasp at which timing the game ball passes the game medium detection position.

  In this way, in order to efficiently perform fraud in a gaming machine in which the game medium detection position is arranged on the back side of the game board, the high frequency oscillation is suppressed by the detection means in the unauthorized high frequency output period. It is necessary to continue to output the high frequency for a certain period from the timing before the game ball passes through the game medium detection position to the timing when the game ball finishes passing. In this case, the signal for detecting the passage of one game ball is easily differentiated into a large number. In other words, there may be a difference in the occurrence frequency of noise mixing between the case where noise is accidentally mixed and the case where noise is mixed in intentionally falsifying the detection signal.

  Therefore, in the combination with the feature A11, it is possible to suitably set the threshold value of the number of occurrences of abnormality when performing abnormality notification based on abnormality diagnosis. Specifically, it is possible to respond sensitively to noise contamination for the purpose of fraud without becoming sensitive to accidental noise generation. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve crime prevention while contributing to smooth progress of the game.

  Feature A13. The period adjusting means includes a speed variable unit capable of changing a passing speed of each game medium at the game medium detection position, and the length of the output period is changed by the speed change by the speed variable part. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, characterized by:

  The noise shown in the feature A1 or the like may be accidentally mixed into the detection signal, or may be intentionally mixed by an unauthorized person. Therefore, it is possible to change the output period and the regulation period of the game medium detection signal, and when the mixing of noise or the like is grasped, if the output period and the regulation period are temporarily extended by the speed variable unit, the presence or absence of noise is preferable. It becomes possible to grasp. Certainly, it is possible to set the output period and the regulation period to be longer, but this may reduce the responsiveness of detecting a game ball. Therefore, by applying the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to improve the noise grasping function and suitably suppress a decrease in responsiveness caused by the noise grasping function.

  Feature A14. The period adjusting means is provided in the guide passage, and a bent portion (for example, a boundary portion between the lower guide passage portion 272 and the lower recovery passage portion 321) in which the passage direction is changed in the guide passage. A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A14, the game medium that moves in the guide passage passes through the bent portion, so that the moving speed toward the game medium detection position is suppressed. In other words, in the stage before flowing into the guide passage, the momentum acquired by the game medium can be weakened before reaching the game medium detection position, and the variation in the passing speed (output period) at the game medium detection position is preferable. Can be suppressed. For example, the guide passage may be folded or meandered.

Feature A15. The guide passage is
A downstream passage portion (for example, a lower guide passage portion 272) having the game medium detection position;
An upstream passage portion (for example, a lower collection passage portion 321) that communicates with the upstream side of the downstream passage portion and extends in a direction different from the passage direction of the downstream passage portion;
The period adjusting means has a wall portion (e.g., a ball collision surface 325) that is located on an extension of the upstream passage portion to the downstream side and that the game medium that has flowed down the upstream passage portion collides with it.
The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the wall portion restricts the rebound of the game medium that has collided with the wall portion toward the game medium detection position.

  According to the feature A15, the game medium moving in the guide passage hits the wall portion when moving from the upstream passage portion to the downstream passage portion, so that the moving speed in the passage direction of the downstream passage portion can be suppressed. Become. In other words, the momentum acquired by the game medium before flowing into the guide passage can be weakened before reaching the game medium detection position, and variation in the passing speed (game medium detection signal output period) at the game medium detection position. Can be suitably suppressed.

  In addition, when the game medium that has flowed out from the upstream passage portion collides with the wall portion, the replay of the game medium to the game medium detection position side is restricted. Thereby, the dispersion | variation in the said passing speed resulting from the momentum at the time of the inflow to a guide channel can be suppressed more suitably. Therefore, the passing speed of each game medium at the game medium detection position can be preferably made uniform.

  Feature A16. The gaming machine according to Feature A15, wherein the downstream passage portion extends in a vertical direction or a substantially vertical direction.

  In the configuration shown in the feature A16, the downstream passage portion may be slightly inclined from the horizontal plane, and the game medium may be moved along the inclination. However, when the configuration is such that the passage speed of the game medium is determined depending on the inclination of the passage in this way, it is assumed that the influence of variation in the installation of the gaming machines and the like will increase. In other words, in the configuration in which the passage speed of the game medium is defined by the inclination of the passage, it is assumed that the influence of the variation in installation on the inclination of the passage becomes remarkable, and the relationship between the output period and the regulation period is easily broken.

  In this regard, according to this feature, by dropping the game medium by its own weight, it is possible to suppress the influence of variation in the installation of the gaming machines and to further improve the relationship between the output period and the regulation period.

Feature A17. A game area (game area PE) formed on the front surface of the game board (game board 80), and a ball entry part (for example, an operation port 84) into which a game ball enters;
A guide passage (for example, a lower guide passage portion 272 and a lower collection passage portion 321) for guiding a game ball that has entered the entrance portion to at least the back side of the game board;
Detection means (detection sensor 350) for detecting a game ball passing a game ball detection position (detection area DE) in the guide passage and outputting a predetermined detection signal;
Passage determination means for determining whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection position of the game ball based on the detection signal (function of executing steps S203 to S208 of the signal reading process in the MPU 611 of the main control device 162);
When the passage determining means determines that the game ball has passed through the gaming ball detection position, privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player (for example, step S501 of normal processing in the MPU 611 of the main control device 162). Function to execute)
A period in which an output period in which a game ball detection signal is output as the detection signal is set to a predetermined period by adjusting the passing speed of each game ball at the game medium detection position to be constant. Adjusting means (for example, the guide rib 273 of the lower guide passage 272 and the ball collision surface 325 of the vertical passage 322);
Restriction means for restricting the provision of the privilege based on a detection signal indicating the passage of the second and subsequent game balls within the same length of time as the output period (signal reading processing is executed in the MPU 611 of the main control device 162) A gaming machine characterized by having a function).

  According to the feature A17, when the game ball moving in the guide passage passes the game ball detection position in the guide passage, the game ball is detected by the detection means. Based on the detection signal from the detection means, the game ball passage determination at the game ball detection position is executed. When it is determined by the passage determining means that the game ball has passed the game ball detection position, a privilege (for example, a lottery right such as payout of game media or jackpot) is given to the player.

  When noise or the like is mixed in the detection signal from the detection means, it is assumed that erroneous determination occurs due to such noise or the like. For example, when noise is mixed in the detection signal, when one game ball passes the game ball detection position, it can be determined as if a plurality of game balls have passed through the game ball detection position. If such a misjudgment is made, a privilege will be unfairly given to the player, and it is assumed that the soundness of the game is impaired.

  In this regard, in this feature, the period during which the game ball detection signal is output is adjusted to be a predetermined period, and the second and subsequent times within the same length of time as the output period thus adjusted are used. It was set as the structure which controls privilege provision based on the detection signal which shows passage of a game ball. Even if noise indicating the passage of a plurality of game balls or the like is mixed in the detection signal, it is possible to avoid the provision of a privilege based on such an erroneous signal and improve the accuracy of game ball passage determination. In particular, in this feature, since the output period of the detection signal can be a period having a known length, it is possible to accurately grasp the erroneous detection of the game ball due to noise or the like within the same length of time as the output period. That is, if the output period of the detection signal is unknown, it becomes difficult to correctly determine whether it is a legitimate detection or a false detection if a plurality of game balls are detected. According to this, such inconvenience can be solved. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the disadvantage by misdetection can be suppressed and it can contribute to the reliability improvement of a game machine.

  For example, when it is determined that a plurality of game balls have passed within the same length of time as the output period, only the passage of one game ball is validated and the passage of other game balls is invalidated. It is good to give the privilege according to the passage of the game ball.

Feature A18. A guide passage for guiding the game medium (for example, the lower guide passage portion 272 and the lower collection passage portion 321);
Detection means (detection sensor 350) for detecting a game ball passing the game medium detection position in the guide passage and outputting a predetermined detection signal;
Passing determination means for determining whether or not a game medium has passed through the gaming medium detection position based on the detection signal (function of executing steps S203 to S208 of signal reading processing in the MPU 611 of the main controller 162). Prepared,
A game machine that executes a predetermined process (step S501 of the normal process in the MPU 611 of the main controller 162) based on the determination result when it is determined by the passage determination means that the game medium has passed through the gaming medium detection position. In
A period in which an output period during which a game medium detection signal is output as the detection signal is set to a predetermined period by adjusting the passing speed of each game medium at the game medium detection position to be constant. A gaming machine comprising adjustment means (for example, a guide rib 273 of the lower guide passage portion 272 and a ball collision surface 325 of the vertical passage 322).

  According to the feature A18, when the game medium moving in the guide passage passes the game medium detection position in the guide passage, the game medium is detected by the detection means. Based on the detection signal from the detection means, the game medium passage determination at the game medium detection position is executed. When it is determined by the passage determination means that the game medium has passed the game medium detection position, a predetermined process is executed. For example, this process may be configured to give a player a privilege such as payout of game media or a lottery right such as jackpot.

  When noise or the like is mixed in the detection signal from the detection means, it is assumed that erroneous determination occurs due to such noise or the like. For example, when noise is mixed in the detection signal, when one game medium passes the game medium detection position, it can be determined as if a plurality of game media have passed through the game medium detection position.

  In this regard, if the output period of the game medium detection signal is set to a predetermined period by the period adjusting means, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the signal based on the predetermined period. Thereby, the reliability of the game medium detection signal can be preferably improved.

  Note that the technical features described in the features A1 to A17 can be applied to this feature.

  The above feature A group is effective when applied to the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes detection means (for example, a proximity sensor) that detects a game medium at a game medium detection position in a guide passage that guides the game medium, and a control device that is input from the detection means. There is something. Based on the detection information input from the detection means by the control device, it is determined whether or not the game medium has passed through the game medium detection position. For example, in a pachinko machine, a game ball that has entered a winning opening is detected by the detection means, and if it is determined that a game ball win has occurred based on the detection information, a game ball is given to the player. Benefits such as paying out are granted.

  As described above, the occurrence of profits and the like is often involved in the determination of the passage of game media, and if the accuracy of determination of passage of game media is lowered, it may be disadvantageous for the player or the game hall, and the detection accuracy is improved. There is still room for improvement.

Feature B1. Guide passages (e.g., guide passage 1265, upstream passage 1325, and downstream passage 1335) for guiding game media;
Game medium detection means (detection sensor 1350) for detecting a game medium passing through a game medium detection position in the guide passage (detection area DE in the downstream passage 1335) and outputting a predetermined detection signal;
Based on the detection signal, passage determination means for determining whether or not the game medium has passed through the gaming medium detection position (the MPU 1611 of the main controller 1162 executes steps S1301 to S1307 and steps S1403 to S1409 of the signal reading process). Function)
A game machine that executes a predetermined process (step S1601 of the normal process in the MPU 1611 of the main controller 1162) based on the determination result when it is determined by the passage determination means that the game medium has passed through the gaming medium detection position. In
An abnormality monitoring means (function to execute step S1412 of the signal reading process in the MPU 1611 of the main control device 1162) capable of switching to a monitoring state for monitoring an abnormality in the detection signal and a non-monitoring state for not monitoring the abnormality is provided. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature B1, when the game medium moving in the guide passage passes the game medium detection position in the guide passage, the game medium is detected by the detection unit. Based on the detection signal from the detection means, the game medium passage determination at the game medium detection position is executed. When it is determined by the passage determination means that the game medium has passed the game medium detection position, a predetermined process is executed. For example, this process may be configured to give a player a privilege such as a lottery right such as payout of game media or jackpot.

  When an abnormality occurs in the detection signal from the detection means (for example, when noise or the like is mixed), there is a concern that an erroneous determination may occur due to such an abnormality in the detection signal. This is not preferable because it may cause a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine. In this respect, according to this feature, by monitoring the abnormality such as noise in the detection signal by the abnormality monitoring means, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of the abnormality at an early stage and suitably suppress the occurrence of the disadvantage caused by the abnormality. can do. This can contribute to improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

  In particular, by enabling the abnormality monitoring means to be switched between the monitoring state and the non-monitoring state, it becomes possible to enable or disable the abnormality monitoring means depending on the game situation or the like. Thereby, while contributing to the improvement of the reliability of a gaming machine, it is possible to suppress an increase in control load due to a monitoring process of a detection signal of a gaming medium.

  For example, the detection signal may be monitored by the abnormality monitoring means at a timing or period in which an abnormality is likely to occur due to noise mixing.

Feature B2. Guide passages (e.g., guide passage 1265, upstream passage 1325, and downstream passage 1335) for guiding game media;
Game medium detection means (detection sensor 1350) for detecting a game medium passing through a game medium detection position in the guide passage (detection area DE in the downstream passage 1335) and outputting a predetermined detection signal;
Based on the detection signal, passage determination means for determining whether or not the game medium has passed through the gaming medium detection position (the MPU 1611 of the main controller 1162 executes steps S1301 to S1307 and steps S1403 to S1409 of the signal reading process). Function) and a privilege granting unit (for example, MPU 1611 of the main control device 1162) that grants a privilege to the player based on the determination result when the passage determination unit determines that the game medium has passed through the game medium detection position. In step S1601 of normal processing)
It is possible to switch to a first state in which it is difficult or impossible to move the game medium to the game medium detection position, and a second state in which it is easier to move the game medium to the game medium detection position than the first state. A variable means (opening / closing door 1270 of the variable winning device 1082);
Control means (main unit) that continues the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied after the variable means is switched from the first state to the second state, and switches to the first state when the predetermined condition is satisfied. A function of executing step S1710 of the special prize opening / closing process in the MPU 1611 of the control device 1162),
An abnormality monitoring means (function for executing step S1412 of signal reading processing in the MPU 1611 of the main control device 1162) capable of switching to a monitoring state for monitoring an abnormality in the detection signal and a non-monitoring state for not monitoring the abnormality;
After the variable means is switched to the second state, switching means for switching the abnormality monitoring means from the non-monitoring state to the monitoring state (steps S1706 and S1707 of the big prize opening / closing process in the MPU 1611 of the main controller 1162). A game machine having a function to be executed).

  According to the feature B2, when the game medium moving in the guide passage passes the game medium detection position in the guide passage, the game medium is detected by the detection means. Based on the detection signal from the detection means, the game medium passage determination at the game medium detection position is executed. When it is determined by the passage determination means that the game medium has passed through the game medium detection position, a privilege (for example, a lottery right such as payout of game medium or jackpot) is given to the player.

  When an abnormality occurs in the detection signal from the detection means (for example, when noise or the like is mixed), there is a concern that an erroneous determination may occur due to such an abnormality in the detection signal. With regard to noise or the like that can cause such erroneous determination, it is assumed that there are cases where it is accidentally mixed and cases where it is intentionally mixed in an attempt to tamper with the detection signal. In particular, in the configuration in which the movement of the game medium to the game medium detection position is restricted by the variable means, the above fraud may be obtained by trying to obtain as many benefits as possible (that is, a privilege exceeding the privilege that can be normally acquired). There may be a bias in the timing and period during which the process is easily performed. In this regard, by switching the monitoring means from the non-monitoring state to the monitoring state after the variable means is switched to the second state, it is possible to favor overcounting of game media (count exceeding the predetermined number) caused by fraud etc. It becomes possible to monitor. In addition, by setting the monitoring means to the non-monitoring state in the period after the switching of the variable means to the second state (for example, immediately after), before the game medium is overcounted (in other words, the period during which the overcount hardly occurs). It can contribute to reduction of control load. That is, by providing a period during which the monitoring unit is in the non-monitoring state, an increase in control load due to the monitoring of the detection signal can be suitably suppressed as compared with the case where the monitoring unit is constantly in the monitoring state.

  For example, after the variable means is switched to the second state, conditions set in advance (specifically, conditions set based on the elapsed time since switching to the second state and the number of game medium passage determinations) ) Is established, the abnormality monitoring means may be switched from the non-monitoring state to the monitoring state. If the crime prevention function is activated in accordance with the timing and period when the above-described overcount is likely to occur, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in the control load due to monitoring of the detection signal while improving the crime prevention performance. Become.

  The “abnormality in the detection signal” shown in the feature B1 and the feature B2 is, for example, as if the game medium has passed the game medium detection position even though the game medium has not passed the game medium detection position. This includes the case where the detection signal changes. In particular, when such a change in the detection signal may cause an erroneous determination by the passage determination means, it can be said that such a change in the detection signal is harmful to the gaming machine. Also, for example, in a configuration in which the detection signal is a binary signal of HI / LOW and HI / LOW is temporarily switched when a game medium is detected, the “abnormality in the detection signal” is not detected in the game medium. This includes switching between HI / LOW.

  Incidentally, the “variable means” is provided, for example, at the passage entrance of the guide passage, and in the first state where entry of the game medium into the guide passage is difficult or impossible, and to the guide passage from the first state. It is also possible to make it possible to switch to the second state in which it is easy to enter.

Feature B3. The control means establishes the predetermined condition by determining that the predetermined number of preset game media have passed the game medium detection position by the passage determination means, and sets the variable means from the second state. Switching to the first state,
The switching means may be configured such that the number of gaming media determined by the passage determining means to have passed the gaming medium detection position after the variable means is switched to the second state reaches the predetermined number, or the same. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein when the number of game media reaches the predetermined number, the abnormality monitoring unit is switched from the non-monitoring state to the monitoring state.

  In a configuration in which the variable means is switched from the second state to the first state based on the passage determination of the predetermined number of game media, the possibility that the game media exceeding the predetermined number will pass the game medium detection position becomes low. In this type of gaming machine, for example, a predetermined detection signal that triggers switching to the second state is used as a target, and an illegal act such as dividing the detection signal into a plurality of parts is performed, so that the game medium detection position is originally passed. There is a concern that gaming media exceeding the predetermined number that are unlikely to be tampered with will be tampered as if they have passed through the same detection position, and that benefits that are more than originally obtained are illegally obtained.

  For example, the abnormality monitoring unit may be switched to the monitoring state when a preset period has elapsed from the timing when the variable unit is switched to the second state. However, it is assumed that it is difficult to uniquely define the relationship between the predetermined number and the period when the abnormality monitoring means switching condition is constructed according to the time factor. Considering the relationship between the number and the time, it is easy to give a considerable margin to the period in which the abnormality monitoring unit is kept in the monitoring state. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is made to switch from the non-monitoring state to the monitoring state according to the number of game media determined to pass, the above-described margin can be reduced, and a practically preferable configuration is achieved. realizable.

  In addition, in consideration of the above-described characteristics of fraud, it is assumed that the timing at which the detection signal is intentionally altered may be biased. In this point, in this feature, the abnormality monitoring unit is not monitored when the number of game media determined to have passed the game medium detection position by the passage determination unit reaches or reaches the predetermined number. The configuration is switched from the status to the monitoring status. As a result, it is assumed that the abnormality monitoring means can be made effective in accordance with a period during which fraudulent acts are likely to be performed, the crime prevention function of the gaming machine can be suitably improved, and further, fraudulent acts are unlikely to be performed. In the period, an increase in control load can be suitably suppressed by invalidating the abnormality monitoring means.

Feature B4. The control means establishes the predetermined condition by determining that the predetermined number of preset game media have passed the game medium detection position by the passage determination means, and sets the variable means from the second state. Switching to the first state,
The switching means is configured so that the number of game media determined by the passage determination means after passing through the game medium detection position after the variable means is switched to the second state is detected from the game medium detection means by the predetermined detection. From reaching the number obtained by subtracting the upper limit of the number of game media that can be determined to have passed through the game medium detection position by the passage determination means during the period in which the signal is output, until reaching the predetermined number The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the abnormality monitoring unit is switched from a non-monitoring state to a monitoring state during the period.

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the type that grants a privilege based on the result of game medium passage determination as shown in the feature B2, a predetermined detection signal or the like that triggers switching to the second state of the switching unit is targeted as described above. The above benefits may be acquired excessively as a result of cheating.

  Specifically, by mixing noise or the like into the predetermined detection signal and dividing the detection signal into a plurality of the same, when one game medium passes the game medium detection position, it is as if the plurality of game media are in the same game. There is a possibility that fraudulent acts such as pretending to have passed through the medium detection position are performed. If it is possible to make a plurality of pass determinations by dividing one detection signal into a plurality of signals in this way, the same number of game media as the number obtained by subtracting the upper limit that can be determined from the predetermined number is detected as game media. Targeting the subsequent game media after passing the position makes it appear that more than a predetermined number of game media have passed the game media detection position, and there is a high possibility that excessive benefits will be acquired. .

  In this regard, according to this feature, it is possible to enhance the crime prevention function by enabling the abnormality monitoring means in a period during which it is assumed that fraud related to excessive acquisition of such benefits is likely to be performed. . That is, it is possible to enjoy the fraud suppression effect while suppressing an increase in the control load by focusing on the period in which the damage is likely to increase due to fraud.

  It should be noted that “the upper limit number of game media that can be determined by the passage determination means to have passed the game medium detection position during the period in which the predetermined detection signal is output from the game medium detection means” is shown in this feature. By setting “the number subtracted from the predetermined number” as follows, further improvement of the above-described effect can be expected. That is, the number set as the switching condition of the switching means (hereinafter referred to as “specific number” for the sake of convenience) is “by the passage determining means during the period in which the predetermined detection signal is output from the game medium detecting means. The upper limit of the number of game media that can be determined to have passed the game media detection position may be a number obtained by adding 1 to the number obtained by subtracting from the predetermined number.

Feature B5. By adjusting the passage speed of each game medium at the game medium detection position to be constant, an output period in which the predetermined detection signal is output from the game medium detection means is defined as a predetermined period. Period adjusting means (for example, the guide rib 273 of the lower guide passage portion 272 and the ball collision surface 325 of the vertical passage 322),
The game machine according to Feature B4, wherein the passage determination unit is set to repeatedly perform the passage determination of the game medium at a predetermined period set shorter than the output period.

  As shown in feature B4, the upper limit of the number of game media that can be determined by the passage determination means to have passed the game medium detection position during the period in which the predetermined detection signal is output from the game medium detection means In the configuration in which the abnormality monitoring unit is switched based on the above, it is not preferable that the number that can be determined to pass due to the above-described differentiation of the detection signal varies. In this regard, as shown in this feature, a configuration is adopted in which the passage determination by the passage determination unit is repeatedly performed at a predetermined period set shorter than the output period, and a game medium detection signal is output by the period adjustment unit. If the output period is adjusted, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

  Feature B6. The abnormality monitoring means includes abnormality determination means for determining that the abnormality has occurred based on a determination result that the second and subsequent game media have passed within the same length of time as the output period. The gaming machine according to Feature B4 or Feature B5.

  As shown in feature B4, the abnormality monitoring means is monitored from the non-monitoring state until the number of gaming media determined to have passed the gaming media detection position reaches the predetermined number after reaching the specific number. In the configuration for switching to the state, by adopting a configuration for determining that the abnormality has occurred based on the passage determination result of the second and subsequent gaming media within the same length of time as the output period, as described above It is possible to appropriately grasp the illegal acquisition of the privilege due to the differentiation of the detection signal.

  Feature B7. The switching means is configured to monitor the abnormality when the number of game media determined to have passed the game medium detection position by the passage determination means after the variable means is switched to the second state reaches the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to Feature B3, characterized in that the means is set to switch from the non-monitoring state to the monitoring state.

  Assuming the dishonest act shown in the feature B4, etc., the benefit that can be acquired by the act is the largest when the detection signal is differentiated by targeting the last one of a predetermined number of game media. it is conceivable that. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the number of game media determined to have passed through the game media detection position reaches a predetermined number, the abnormality monitoring means is switched from the non-monitoring state to the monitoring state. While ensuring the function, the accompanying increase in control load can be suitably suppressed.

  Feature B8. The switching means is a number in which the number of game media determined by the passage determining means to have passed through the game medium detection position after switching the variable means to the second state exceeds half of the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to the feature B3, wherein the gaming machine is set to switch the abnormality monitoring means from the non-monitoring state to the monitoring state when a failure occurs.

  Assuming the dishonest act shown in feature B4, etc., comparing the first half and the second half of a predetermined number of game media passing through the game medium detection position, it is assumed that the second half is more likely to be targeted as a fraud target. . Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the number of game media determined to have passed the game media detection position exceeds the predetermined number, the abnormality monitoring means is switched from the non-monitoring state to the monitoring state. If it is set as a structure, the increase in the control load accompanying it can be suppressed suitably, ensuring a crime prevention function.

Feature B9. The control means has a predetermined period after the number of game media determined to have passed the game medium detection position by the passage determination means after the variable means is switched to the second state has reached the predetermined number. The variable means is set to be in the first state until it has elapsed,
Any one of the characteristics B3 to B8, wherein the switching unit is set to return the abnormality monitoring unit from the monitoring state to the non-monitoring state before the predetermined period elapses. The gaming machine described in one.

  In the configuration in which the variable means is in the first state until the predetermined period elapses after the number of game media determined to have passed the game media detection position reaches the predetermined number as shown in this feature, the variable is the same. When the means is switched to the first state, the movement of the game medium to the game medium detection position is prevented. For this reason, it is assumed that an illegal act due to the differentiation of the detection signal as shown in the feature B3 or the like becomes difficult because the target detection signal is not output. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the abnormality monitoring means is returned to the non-monitoring state before the predetermined period elapses after the number of game media reaches the predetermined number, the crime prevention function is secured. The increase in control load resulting from the enjoyment of the crime prevention function can be suitably suppressed.

Feature B10. A game board (game board 1080) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A ball entry portion (for example, a guide passage 1265, an upstream passage 1325, and a downstream passage 1335) into which a game ball flowing down the game area flows;
A ball detection means (detection sensor 1350) for detecting a game ball passing through a game ball detection position (a detection area DE in the downstream passage 1335) in the entrance portion and outputting a predetermined detection signal;
Based on the detection signal, passage determination means for determining whether or not a game ball has passed the gaming ball detection position (function to execute step S1101 of signal reading processing in the MPU 1611 of the main control device 1162), and the passage determination means When it is determined that the game ball has passed the game ball detection position, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the determination result (for example, step S1601 of normal processing in the MPU 1611 of the main control device 1162). Function to execute)
A variable input that is provided on the game board and can be switched between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to flow into the ball entry portion and a second state in which the flow of the game ball is easier than the first state. Ball means (opening / closing door 1270 of variable winning device 1082),
After the variable pitching means is switched from the first state to the second state, the predetermined number of game balls are determined until the passage determining means determines that the predetermined number of game balls have passed the gaming ball detection position. When the two states are continued and the passing determination is made, the ball entering control means for switching the variable entry means from the second state to the first state (step of the big prize opening / closing process in the MPU 1611 of the main controller 1162) A function of executing S1710 and the like);
An abnormality monitoring means (function for executing step S1204 of signal reading processing in the MPU 1611 of the main control device 1162) capable of switching to a monitoring state for monitoring an abnormality in the detection signal and a non-monitoring state for not monitoring the abnormality;
After the variable means is switched to the second state, switching means for switching the abnormality monitoring means from the non-monitoring state to the monitoring state (steps S1706 and S1707 of the big prize opening / closing process in the MPU 1611 of the main controller 1162). A game machine having a function to be executed).

  According to the feature B10, a game ball flowing down the game area flows into the entrance portion and passes through the game ball detection position, whereby a predetermined detection signal is output from the detection means. Based on this detection signal, the passage determination of the game ball at the game ball detection position is executed. When it is determined by the passage determining means that the game ball has passed through the game ball detection position, the player is given benefits such as payout of the game ball or a lottery right such as a big hit. When the number of game balls determined to pass reaches a predetermined number, the variable entry means is switched from the second state to the first state by the entry control means. As a result, entry of other game balls is prevented.

  In a gaming machine that determines whether or not a privilege is granted based on a detection signal, if noise or the like is mixed in the detection signal from the detection means, it is assumed that an erroneous determination occurs due to such noise or the like. This is not preferable because it may result in excessive privilege acquisition and the like and may cause a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine.

  Regarding the mixing of such noise and the like, it is assumed that there are cases where the noise is accidentally mixed and cases where the detection signal is intentionally mixed in an attempt to falsify the detection signal. In this regard, according to this feature, the abnormality monitoring means monitors the abnormality of the detection signal due to the mixing of the noise or the like, so that the occurrence of the abnormality can be grasped at an early stage, and the occurrence of a disadvantage caused by the abnormality is preferable. Can be suppressed. Thereby, it can contribute to the reliability improvement and crime prevention improvement of a gaming machine.

  In addition, when a signal is tampered with for the purpose of fraud, it may be possible to bias the timing at which the fraud is likely to occur by trying to obtain as much gain as possible. In particular, in the configuration in which the number of game balls determined to pass as described above reaches a predetermined number and the subsequent game balls are prevented from entering by the variable entry means, it is assumed that the bias is likely to be significant. Is done.

  In this regard, by switching the monitoring means from the non-monitoring state to the monitoring state after the variable means is switched to the second state, it is possible to favor overcounting of game media (count exceeding the predetermined number) caused by fraud etc. It becomes possible to monitor. In particular, by providing a period during which the monitoring unit is set to the non-monitoring state after the variable unit is switched to the second state, the control load caused by the monitoring of the detection signal is compared with the case where the monitoring unit is always set to the monitoring state. Can be suitably suppressed. In particular, if the security function is improved at a timing at which fraud is likely to occur, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in control load due to the improvement of the security performance.

  For example, the detection signal may be monitored by the abnormality determination means at a timing or period in which an abnormality is likely to occur due to noise mixing.

  The technical ideas shown in the features B3 to B9 can be applied to this feature. In particular, according to the combination with the feature B4 and the feature B8, a practically preferable configuration can be realized. That is, in the game area described above, various game parts such as nails are arranged to diversify the flow paths of game balls flowing down the game area. For this reason, there is a possibility that a plurality of game balls may arrive at the entrance part at the same timing, and it is assumed that it is difficult to aim only at the game ball that finally flows into the entrance part. Therefore, in order to perform fraud efficiently, it is assumed that it is necessary to consider a certain amount of width (a margin to allow excessive acquisition of privileges due to fraud) to the game balls targeted for fraud. Therefore, if the switching timing to the monitoring state is set in combination with the feature B4 and the feature B8, it is possible to suitably suppress the increase in the control load due to the monitoring of the detection signal while preferably enjoying the crime prevention function. it can.

Feature B11. A guide passage for guiding game media;
Detecting means for detecting a game ball passing a game medium detection position in the guide passage and outputting a predetermined detection signal;
Passage determination means for determining whether or not a game medium has passed through the game medium detection position based on the detection signal, and when the passage determination means determines that the game medium has passed through the game medium detection position, Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the determination result;
Switchable between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible to move the game medium to the game medium detection position, and a second state in which it is easier to move the game medium to the game medium detection position than the first state. Variable means provided;
After the variable pitching means is switched from the first state to the second state, the predetermined number of game balls are determined until the passage determining means determines that the predetermined number of game balls have passed the gaming ball detection position. A ball entry control unit that continues two states and switches the variable ball entry unit from the second state to the first state when the passage determination is made;
A period adjustment in which an output period in which a game medium detection signal is output as the detection signal is set to a predetermined period by adjusting the passage speed of each game medium at the game medium detection position to be constant. Means,
The passage determination means for the second and subsequent gaming media by the passage determination means within the same length of time as the output period, and the execution of the predetermined process based on the result of the passage determination for the second and subsequent gaming media. A regulation means provided so as to be switchable between a regulation state that regulates at least one and a non-regulation state that does not perform the regulation;
A gaming machine comprising switching means for switching the restricting means from the non-regulated state to the restricted state after the variable means is switched to the second state.

  According to the feature B11, when the game medium moving in the guide passage passes the game medium detection position in the guide passage, the game medium is detected by the detection means. When it is determined that the game medium has passed the game medium detection position based on the detection signal from the detection means, a privilege (for example, a lottery right such as payout of game medium or jackpot) is given to the player. The

  When noise or the like is mixed in the detection signal from the detection means, it is assumed that erroneous determination occurs due to such noise or the like. For example, when noise is mixed in the detection signal, when one game medium passes the game medium detection position, it can be determined as if a plurality of game media have passed through the game medium detection position. If such a misjudgment is made, a privilege will be unfairly given to the player, and it is assumed that the soundness of the game is impaired.

  In this regard, in this feature, the period during which the game medium detection signal is output is adjusted to be a predetermined period, and the second and subsequent times within the same length of time as the output period thus adjusted are used. It was set as the structure which controls privilege provision based on the detection signal which shows passage of a game medium. Even if noise indicating the passage of a plurality of game media is mixed in the detection signal, provision of a privilege based on such an erroneous signal can be avoided, and the accuracy of determining the passage of the game media can be improved. In particular, in this feature, since the output period of the detection signal can be a period of a known length, it is possible to accurately grasp the erroneous detection of the game medium due to noise or the like within the same length of time as the output period. That is, if the output period of the detection signal is unknown, it becomes difficult to correctly determine whether it is a valid detection or a false detection if a plurality of game media are detected. According to this, such inconvenience can be solved. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the disadvantage by misdetection can be suppressed and it can contribute to the reliability improvement of a game machine.

  For example, when it is determined that a plurality of game media have passed within the same length of time as the output period, only the passage of one game medium is validated and the passage of other game media is invalidated. It is good to give the privilege according to the passage of the game media.

  When an abnormality occurs in the detection signal from the detection means (for example, when noise or the like is mixed), there is a concern that an erroneous determination may occur due to such an abnormality in the detection signal. With regard to noise or the like that can cause such erroneous determination, it is assumed that there are cases where it is accidentally mixed and cases where it is intentionally mixed in an attempt to tamper with the detection signal. In particular, in a configuration in which the number of game media that can reach the game medium detection position is limited by the variable means, by trying to obtain as many benefits as possible (that is, benefits that exceed the benefits that can be normally acquired). There may be a bias in the timing and period during which the fraud is likely to occur.

  Therefore, as shown in this feature, after the variable means is switched to the second state, the control means is configured to switch from the non-regulated state to the restricted state, thereby over-counting of game media caused by fraud etc. (Count exceeding a predetermined number) can be preferably regulated. In particular, by providing a period during which the regulating means is in the non-regulated state after the variable means is switched to the second state, the control load caused by the regulation is reduced compared to the case where the regulating means is always in the regulated state. The increase can be suitably suppressed.

  For example, if a pre-set condition is satisfied, the restricting means is switched from the non-regulated state to the restricted state, and the crime prevention function is activated in accordance with the timing or period when fraud is likely to occur. It is possible to suitably suppress an increase in control load resulting from the improvement in performance.

  Note that the technical ideas shown in the features A3 to A18 can be applied to this feature. In this case, the “regulating means” shown in the feature A group may be replaced with the “regulating means” shown in this feature.

  The feature B group is effective when applied to the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes detection means (for example, a proximity sensor) that detects a game medium at a game medium detection position in a guide passage that guides the game medium, and a control device that is input from the detection means. There is something. Based on the detection signal input from the detection means in the control device, it is determined whether or not the game medium has passed through the game medium detection position. For example, in a pachinko machine, a game ball that has entered a winning opening is detected by the detection means, and if it is determined that a game ball win has occurred based on the detection signal, the game ball is given to the player. Benefits such as paying out are granted.

  If an abnormality occurs in the detection signal from the detection means (for example, when noise or the like is mixed), there is a concern that an erroneous determination may occur due to such an abnormality in the detection signal. This is not preferable because it may cause a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine. In particular, as described above, the occurrence of profits is often involved in the determination of the passage of game media, and the occurrence of such an erroneous determination is not preferable because it may cause a disadvantage for the player or the game hall.

  Here, it is possible to improve the reliability of the detection signal and thus the gaming machine by adopting a monitoring means for monitoring the detection signal. However, even if the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine is improved by adopting the monitoring means or the like in this way, it is not preferable that the control load due to the monitoring process of the detection signal of the gaming medium is increased.

Feature C1. Guide passages (e.g., guide passage 2265, upstream passage 2325, and downstream passage 2335) for guiding game media;
First detection means (first detection sensor 2350A) for detecting a game medium passing through a first detection position in the guide passage and outputting a predetermined detection signal;
Second detection means (second detection sensor 2350B) for detecting a game medium passing through a second detection position downstream of the first detection position in the guide passage and outputting a predetermined detection signal;
First determination means for determining whether or not the game medium has passed through the first detection position in the guide passage based on the detection signal output from the first detection means (signal reading in the MPU 2611 of the main controller 2162) Processing step S2201 to step S2207),
Second determination means for determining whether or not the game medium has passed through the second detection position in the guide passage based on the detection signal output from the second detection means (a signal in the MPU 2611 of the main controller 2162). A function of executing steps S2208 to S2214 of the reading process);
The length of the output period during which a game medium detection signal is output as the detection signal from the first detection means, and the length of the output period during which a game medium detection signal is output as the detection signal from the second detection means Output period adjusting means (for example, the guide passage 2265, the upstream passage 2325, and the downstream passage 2335),
Based on the number of game media determined to have passed the first detection position by the first determination means and the number of game media determined to have passed the second detection position by the second determination means. And an abnormality determination means (function of executing step S2603 of error determination processing in the MPU 2611 of the main controller 2162).

  According to the feature C1, when the game ball guided by the guide passage is detected by the first detection means and the second detection means, detection signals are output from the first detection means and the second detection means, and the respective detections are performed. Based on the signal, the game medium is determined to pass. Then, by performing an abnormality determination based on (for example, comparing) the number of game media determined to have passed the first detection position and the number of game media determined to have passed the second detection position, The occurrence of an abnormality in the detection signal (for example, mixing of noise or the like) can be found. Thereby, for example, it can suppress that a privilege is given unfairly with respect to a player based on an incorrect determination result, and can contribute to the guarantee of the soundness of a game.

  The inconveniences described above may occur due to accidental factors or human factors. Assuming a case where noise generated continuously and repeatedly is mixed into the game medium detection signal during the output period of the game medium detection signal as the detection signal, for example, the detection signal is partially converted into a game medium non-detection signal. By switching, one game medium detection signal can be differentiated into a plurality of game medium detection signals. In other words, the presence of noise may change the signal for detecting one game medium as if the passage of a plurality of game media was detected. If such noise is mixed in the detection signal from the first detection means and the detection signal from the second detection means in the same manner, the following inconvenience may occur. That is, it is assumed that the number of game media determined by each determination unit is the same, abnormality determination based on the number of both game media is avoided, and it is difficult to grasp noise by the abnormality determination unit.

In particular, when the above-described noise is artificially mixed, in order to efficiently perform an illegal act, a plurality of noises are mixed in anticipation of the passing timing of the gaming medium (that is, the output timing of the detection signal), thereby allowing one gaming medium to be mixed. It is assumed that the detection signal corresponding to the passage of the game is differentiated into detection signals of a large number of game media. If it becomes difficult to find such fraudulent acts, damages in game halls and the like can be enormous. In this regard, in this feature, the above-described inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by making the length of the output period of the game medium detection signal output from each detection means different. In other words, when a plurality of noises are mixed in one detection signal as described above, the number of differentiation is likely to be different because the output periods of the detection signals are different. More specifically, when a plurality of noises are repeatedly mixed continuously, the number of detection signals differentiated within the two output periods. Thereby, the number of game media determined to have passed based on each detection signal will be different.
For this reason, by comparing the determination results by the abnormality determination means, it is possible to suitably find the above-described fraud.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the determination accuracy by suppressing erroneous determination due to noise mixing or the like by the period adjusting unit and the abnormality determining unit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantage due to erroneous detection and contribute to the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

  The technical ideas shown in the features B1 to B10 can be applied to this feature. For example, when the “abnormality monitoring unit” shown in the feature B1 has the “abnormality determination unit” shown in this feature, and the “abnormality monitoring unit is in the monitoring state”, “the first detection unit performs the first detection. If abnormality is determined based on the number of game media determined to have passed the position and the number of game media determined to have passed the second detection position by the second determination means ” Good.

  Feature C2. The output period adjusting means adjusts the passage speed of the game medium at the first detection position so as to be different from the passage speed of the game medium at the second detection position. The gaming machine according to claim C1, wherein the length of the output period is different from the length of the output period in the second detection means.

  In order to realize the configuration shown in the feature C1 and the like, it is preferable that the passing speed of the game medium at each detection position is made different by the output period adjusting means.

  Feature C3. The output period adjusting means adjusts the passing speed of the game medium at the first detection position to be slower than the passing speed of the game medium at the second detection position. A gaming machine according to C2.

  As shown in the feature C1 and the like, in the configuration in which the output period of the game medium detection signal output from each detection means is different, if the difference in the length of each output period is small, the function of improving the determination accuracy is provided. Can be reduced. For example, when the flow of game media stagnates in the guide passage, the game media may interfere with each other and the passing speed at each detection position may not be stable. This can be a factor for reducing the difference between the length of the output period of the game medium detection signal output from the first detection means and the length of the output period of the game medium detection signal output from the second detection means. Therefore, it is not preferable.

  In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the moving speed of the game ball moving along the guide path can be slow on the first detection position side and fast on the second detection position side, The game media can be moved smoothly, and the above-described interference between the game media can be suitably suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such that the difference in output period is reduced.

  In particular, at the second detection position, if the preceding game medium is accelerated when the subsequent game medium hits the preceding game medium, the passing speed of the preceding game medium at the second detection position may be increased. There will be no delay. Since the output period of the detection signal output from the second detection means is set shorter than the output period of the detection signal output from the first detection means, when the game medium is accelerated as described above, The difference in output period will be enlarged. Therefore, the above inconvenience can be more preferably avoided.

Feature C4. When the first determination unit determines that the game medium has passed through the first detection position, a privilege grant unit that grants a privilege to the player based on the determination result (e.g., normally in the MPU 2611 of the main controller 2162) A function of executing step S2301 of the process)
The output period adjustment means adjusts the passage speed of the game medium at the second detection position so as to be slower than the passage speed of the game medium at the first detection position. A gaming machine according to C2.

  For example, when it is determined that the game medium has passed through the second detection position, the above-described privilege (for example, payout of the game medium) is given, or both detection positions of the first detection position and the second detection position are played. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which the privilege is given when it is determined that the medium has passed. However, in these configurations, since privilege grant is not performed until it is determined that the second detection position has been passed, it is assumed that the period from when the game medium flows into the guide passage until the privilege is granted is extended. Is done. That is, in the configuration exemplified above, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy, but it may be difficult to improve the responsiveness of granting a privilege.

  In this regard, according to this feature, the game medium flowing into the guide passage passes through the first detection position upstream of the second detection position, and the game medium passes through the first detection position by the first determination means. By determining that it has been made, a privilege is given to the player. Thereby, while aiming at the improvement of detection accuracy, the fall of the responsiveness at the time of the privilege provision resulting from it can be suppressed.

  In addition, the first detection position is arranged upstream of the second detection position in the guide path, and the passing speed of the game medium at the second detection position is reduced by reducing the passing speed of the game medium at the first detection position. Compared with the case where the passing speed of the game medium at the first detection position is increased at the second detection position, the period from when the game medium flows into the guide passage until the privilege is granted is increased. It can shorten and can improve the responsiveness at the time of the privilege provision mentioned above. That is, it is possible to prevent the period from when the game medium actually passes through the first detection position until the privilege is granted from being extended, and to contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

  In addition, when applying each technical idea shown to the characteristic B1 thru | or the characteristic B10 to this characteristic, it is also possible to do as follows. That is, when the “abnormality monitoring means is in the non-monitoring state”, the passage determination by the second determination means, the number of game media determined to pass by the first determination means, and the game determined to pass by the second determination means It is also possible to adopt a configuration that does not perform abnormality determination based on the number of media.

  Feature C5. The output period adjusting means is configured such that a speed adjusting unit that adjusts the passing speed of the game medium is provided in a portion between the first detection position and the second detection position in the guide passage. The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C4, wherein:

  As shown in the feature C1, when the game ball flowing into the guide passage is detected by the detection means, it is assumed that various processes are executed using the game medium passage determination result. As shown in this feature, if the speed adjustment unit (output period adjustment means) is arranged between the first detection position and the second detection position, the first detection position can be arranged upstream of the guide passage. Thus, it is possible to prevent the period from when the game medium flows into the guide path until the above process is performed from being extended, thereby contributing to an improvement in the response of the process. For example, in combination with the feature C4, it is possible to contribute to the smooth progress of the game by improving the responsiveness at the time of granting the privilege.

Feature C6. When a game medium passage determination is made based on the detection signal of the first detection means, or when a game medium passage determination is made based on the detection signal of the second detection means, one of the results is determined as a passage determination result. The difference value calculating means (mainly) that adds the detected number of gaming media based on the detected number difference counter (check counter CC) and subtracts the detected number of gaming media based on the passage determination result from the detected number difference counter. A function of executing steps S2501 to S2504 of the error determination preparation process in the MPU 2611 of the control device 2162,
The abnormality determination means is configured to determine the number of game media determined to pass by the first determination means and the number of game media determined to pass by the second determination means based on the amount of change from the initial value of the detected number difference counter. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the abnormality is determined by comparing with a number.

  When there is no noise or the like and the passage determination based on the detection signal is normally performed, the number of game media determined to have passed the first detection position and the second detection position are passed. The number of game media to be determined matches. For this reason, although the number of game media stored in the storage means temporarily increases or decreases, it is held at the same value as the initial value. On the other hand, when noise or the like is mixed in the detection signal, the number of game media determined to have passed the first detection position is different from the number of game media determined to have passed the second detection position. It will be. As a result, the number stored in the detection difference number counter remains out of the initial value. Based on such deviation from the initial value of the detected difference number counter, the number of gaming media determined to pass by the first determining means is compared with the number of gaming media determined to pass by the second determining means. By performing the determination, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the detection signal. For example, it is possible to easily grasp the occurrence of noise or the like by transmitting the comparison result to a hall manager or the like using a notification means or the like.

  Particularly in this feature, determination results by the respective determination means can be handled together by one counter, and it is possible to improve the determination accuracy and suppress complication of the configuration. .

Feature C7. A shielding means (for example, a game board 2080) that shields the guide passage so that the first detection position and the second detection position are difficult or impossible to see from the front of the gaming machine;
The period adjusting means includes output period changing means for changing at least one of the length of the output period in the first detecting means and the length of the output period in the second detecting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6.

  As described above, the mixing of noise that can affect the determination result is not limited to the accidental occurrence, and may be intentionally performed by an unauthorized person. Assuming that such unauthorized noise is mixed, the noise mixed in the first detection means and the noise mixed in the second detection means are adjusted, for example, noise mixed in each detection means The number of game media, the output period, etc. are adjusted so that the number of game medium detection signals output from each detection means is the same, so that there is no difference in the number of game media determined to pass by each determination means. . Thereby, it may be difficult to find an abnormality by the abnormality determining means.

  Therefore, in this feature, the detection position is first made difficult or impossible to be visually recognized by the shielding means, and the length of the detection signal output period is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to equalize the number of game media determined to pass by both determination means by adjusting the number of noises intentionally mixed as described above. Therefore, further improvement in crime prevention can be expected.

  For example, in the combination with the feature C2, the configuration shown in this feature can be suitably realized by changing the passing speed of the game medium.

  Feature C8. In the output period changing means, the number of game media determined to pass by the first determining means and the number of game media determined to pass by the second determining means are different from each other by the abnormality determining means. The game machine according to Feature C7, wherein when it is determined that the output period is changed, the length of the output period is changed.

  In the configuration having the output period changing means as shown in the feature C7, it is possible to enjoy the improvement effect of the crime prevention function by sequentially changing the length of the output period. However, when a configuration in which the length of the output period is sequentially changed is adopted, an improvement in the crime prevention function can be expected, but an increase in uncontrollability due to it can be expected. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the number of game media determined to have passed the first detection position by the first determination means, and the game media determined to have passed the second detection position by the second determination means If it is determined that the number of output periods is different from that of the output period, the increase in the uncontrollability can be suitably suppressed, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized. it can.

Feature C9. The abnormality determination means compares the number of game media determined to pass by the first determination means with the number of game media determined to pass by the second determination means, and the difference in the number of game media is determined in advance. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the specified abnormality determination value is reached,
The abnormality determination value is determined based on a length of a movement period required for the game medium to move between the first detection position and the second detection position within the movement period by the first determination unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is set to be larger than a maximum number of game media that can be played.

  According to the feature C9, when a difference occurs in the number of game media determined to have passed the detection position due to mixing of noise or the like, an abnormality determination is made when the difference reaches a predetermined abnormality determination value. The When the first detection position and the second detection position are arranged apart from each other, there is always a time lag in the passage determination by each determination unit. Therefore, the number of game media determined to have passed the first detection position by the first determination means and the number of game media determined to have passed the second detection position by the second determination means are temporary. Differences can occur. Therefore, it is configured to determine that an abnormality has occurred when the difference in the number of game media reaches the abnormality determination value, and the abnormality determination value is moved between the first detection position and the second detection position. Based on the length of the movement period required to do so, it is set to be larger than the maximum number of game media that can be determined to pass by the first determination means within the movement period, so that such a normal difference is made. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the abnormality determining means from reacting sensitively, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

  Here, as described above, when adopting a configuration in which it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the difference in the number of game media reaches the abnormality determination value, discovery of the abnormality may be delayed if the abnormality determination value is excessively provided. There is sex. For example, by setting the abnormality determination value close to the maximum value (specifically, a number that is one larger than the maximum value, etc.), it is possible to improve the comparison accuracy regarding abnormality determination, and to improve the reliability of the abnormality determination means. Can contribute to improvement.

Feature C10. A shielding means (for example, a game board 2080) that shields the guide passage so that the first detection position and the second detection position are difficult or impossible to see from the front of the gaming machine;
The output period adjusting means includes a movement period changing means for changing a period required for the game medium to move between the first detection position and the second detection position. The gaming machine according to any one of C9.

  As already described, the mixing of noise that can affect the determination result is not limited to the accidental occurrence, and the possibility that it is intentionally performed by an unauthorized person cannot be eliminated. If it is possible to discriminate between the noise that the fraudster mixes with the first detection means and the noise that mixes with the second detection means, it may be difficult to grasp the noise mixed trace by the abnormality determination means. . For example, when the number of noises to be mixed is adjusted according to one of the output period of the detection signal output from the first detection means and the output period of the detection signal output from the second detection means, It may be difficult to grasp the noise mixed trace by the abnormality determining means.

  In this regard, according to this feature, the detection signal is output from one of the detection means by extending or shortening the period required to move from the first detection position to the second detection position by the changing means. It can be difficult to determine the timing at which the detection signal is output from the other detection means with reference to the timing. As a result, the above-described fraud can be suppressed, and further improvement in crime prevention can be expected.

Feature C11. A game board (game board 2080) in which a game area (game area PE) in which a game ball as the game medium flows down is formed;
Provided in the game area, and a ball entry part (such as a big prize opening 2261) that allows a game medium flowing down the game area to enter,
The guide passage guides the game medium that has entered the entrance part to at least the back side of the game board,
The game medium detection position is arranged in a portion located on the back side of the game board in the guide passage,
The first detection means is a high-frequency oscillation type proximity sensor, and temporarily suppresses high-frequency oscillation when the game medium passes through the first detection position, so that when the game medium passes and does not pass Outputs different binary signals,
The second detection means is a high-frequency oscillation type proximity sensor, and temporarily suppresses high-frequency oscillation when the game medium passes through the second detection position, thereby allowing the game medium to pass through and not pass through. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, characterized in that it outputs different binary signals.

  According to the feature C11, when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the entrance portion, the game ball is guided to the back side of the game board by the guide passage. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the detection position, high-frequency oscillation is suppressed, and different binary signals are output when the game ball passes and when it does not pass. When detecting the passage of a game ball using a high frequency, if a high frequency is output from the outside of the gaming machine to the detection means, it is assumed that such a high frequency from the outside of the gaming machine is mixed in the detection signal.

  Therefore, in this feature, by arranging the detection position on the back side of the game board, the detection position can be made difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine. As a result, for example, even if a fraudulent person intentionally mixes a high frequency, it is difficult to grasp at which timing the game ball passes the detection position. For this reason, in order to efficiently perform fraud, the fraudulent high-frequency output cycle is set shorter than the output period, and a certain amount of time passes from the timing before the game ball passes through the game medium detection position to the timing when the game ball finishes passing. It becomes necessary to continue high-frequency output for a period of time. In this case, the detection signals corresponding to the passage of one game ball are easily differentiated into a large number.

  Even if the first detection means and the second detection means are arranged close to each other, a difference is likely to occur between the detection signals output from both detection means. That is, the detection signals having different output periods have different numbers to be differentiated, so that it is possible to easily grasp the noise contamination. In this way, even if the detection means are arranged close to each other, it is possible to suppress a reduction in detection accuracy and a security function caused by the detection means, and thus the degree of freedom in arrangement of the detection means can be improved.

Feature C12. When the first determination unit determines that the game medium has passed through the first detection position, a privilege grant unit that grants a privilege to the player based on the determination result (e.g., normally in the MPU 2611 of the main controller 2162) A function of executing step S2301 of the process)
The first detection position is arranged on the back side of the game board at a position overlapping the game area in the front-rear direction,
The game machine according to Feature C11, wherein the second detection position is arranged at a position that does not overlap the game area on the back side of the game board.

  As shown in the feature C11, when a high-frequency oscillation type detection unit is employed, a high frequency is output toward each detection unit, so that noise is easily mixed. In this feature, by arranging the first detection position behind the game area, it is possible to contribute to improving the response of the game ball detection with respect to the ball entering the ball entering part. In addition, by arranging the second detection position at a position that does not overlap the game area, it is difficult to emit a high frequency from the outside toward both the first detection position and the second detection position. Can do. Thereby, even when noise is mixed, the difference between the detection signals can be made clear, and the detection of noise by the abnormality determination unit can be facilitated.

Feature C13. A variable ball entry means (provided in the game area) that can be switched between a first state in which game balls easily flow into the guide passage and a second state in which game balls are less likely or impossible to flow than the first state. Variable prize winning device 2082),
When the number of game balls determined to have passed through the first detection position by the first determination unit reaches a predetermined number, the variable pitching unit changes from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine according to Feature C11 or Feature C12, wherein the gaming machine can be switched to.

  According to the feature C13, the game balls that have flowed down the game area enter the guide passage, and when the number reaches a predetermined number, the variable ball entry means is switched to the second state. In the configuration in which the first state is switched to the second state based on the determination result by the first determination unit, the first detection position is arranged on the upstream side of the passage with respect to the second detection position. Responsiveness of the state switching of the variable entry means to the inflow of game balls can be enhanced.

  For example, by using the first detection means for switching the variable ball entry means and using the second detection means for noise determination, it is possible to suitably achieve both improvement in determination accuracy and smooth game progress. .

  Feature C14. The abnormality determination means is determined to pass by the first determination means during a period in which the variable pitching means is held in the first state after the variable pitching means is switched to the second state. The gaming machine according to Feature C13, wherein the abnormality determination is performed based on the number of game media and the number of game media determined to pass by the second determination means during the held period.

  In the configuration having the variable ball entry means as shown in the feature C13, a large number of game balls can flow into the guide passage at once by the variable ball entry means being in the first state. In a configuration in which the first detection position and the second detection position are not arranged at the same location, a large difference may temporarily occur in the determination result by each determination unit. In such a configuration, by performing abnormality determination based on the number of game media (for example, the number of game media detected based on the passage determination by the passage determination unit) after the variable pitching means is switched to the second state, There is no need to consider a temporary difference, and noise discrimination using the comparison result can be facilitated.

Feature C15. The first determination means performs a passage determination based on a game medium detection signal output from the first detection means in a periodic process periodically executed.
The second determination means executes a passage determination based on a game medium detection signal output from the second detection means in the regular process.
When a game medium detection signal is output from the first detection means, a determination period required when the first determination means performs passage determination based on the signal, and a game medium detection signal from the second detection means Any one of the characteristics C1 to C14 is characterized in that the second determination means is set to have the same determination period as that required when the second determination means performs passage determination based on the signal. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  The number of game media determined to have passed the first detection position by the first determination unit and the number of game media determined to have passed the second detection position by the second determination unit as shown in the feature C1 etc. By applying the configuration shown in this feature to the configuration capable of grasping the occurrence of abnormality based on the mixing of noise or the like, a practically preferable configuration can be realized. That is, the first determination unit and the second determination unit are executed by regular processing, and the period required for the passage determination is the same, so that the comparison is facilitated and the reliability of the comparison result is preferably improved. Can be increased.

  Feature C16. The period adjusting unit adjusts the difference between the length of the output period in the first determination unit and the length of the output period in the second detection unit to be at least larger than the determination period. The gaming machine according to Feature C15, wherein:

  In order to realize the configuration shown in the feature C1 and the like, it is desirable to make the difference in the output period of the detection signal output from each detection means larger than the determination period.

  Feature C17. The output period adjusting means is a decelerating unit that decelerates the game medium that has flowed into the guide passage, and is configured to decelerate the game medium so that the lengths of the respective output periods are different. Thru | or the game machine as described in any one of characteristics C16.

  When the flow-down speed of the game medium in the guide passage varies, the influence of the variation can affect the passage speed of the game medium when passing through each detection position. If there is a variation such that the difference in passing speed between the first detection position and the second detection position is small, there is a concern that the difference in the length of the output period will be small and it will be difficult to determine an abnormality using the difference. The Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the game medium is decelerated by the output period adjusting means, it is possible to suppress variations in the flow-down speed and favorably secure the above difference. Specifically, when the game ball flows down along the guide passage, by dropping the game ball by its own weight while keeping the speed before passing the detection position (hereinafter referred to as initial speed) small, It is possible to reduce the contribution of the initial speed to the passing speed and to suitably suppress the speed variation.

  For example, the speed reduction unit may be arranged at a position immediately upstream of the first detection position and a position immediately upstream of the second detection position.

  Feature C18. The game machine according to Feature C17, wherein the output period adjusting means decelerates the flow speed of the game medium flowing into the guide passage so as to become substantially zero at an intermediate position in the guide passage. .

  According to the feature C18, the speed variation shown in the feature C17 can be suitably suppressed by decelerating the flow speed of the game medium so as to be almost zero. In other words, even if the speed before reaching the output adjustment engine is whatever, it is possible to eliminate the influence due to the variation in the initial speed by decelerating the speed so that it becomes almost zero. This makes it possible to suppress variations in the passing speed when passing through the detection position, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature C19. Guide passages (e.g., guide passage 2265, upstream passage 2325, and downstream passage 2335) for guiding game media;
First detection means (first detection sensor 2350A) for detecting a game medium passing through a first detection position in the guide passage and outputting a predetermined detection signal;
Second detection means (second detection sensor 2350B) for detecting a game medium passing through a second detection position downstream of the first detection position in the guide passage and outputting a predetermined detection signal;
First determination means for performing determination based on the detection signal output from the first detection means (function of executing step S2201 to step S2207 of signal reading processing in the MPU 2611 of the main control device 2162);
Second determination means for performing determination based on the detection signal output from the second detection means (function of executing step S2208 to step S2214 of signal reading processing in the MPU 2611 of the main control device 2162);
The length of the output period during which a game medium detection signal is output as the detection signal from the first detection means, and the length of the output period during which a game medium detection signal is output as the detection signal from the second detection means Output period adjusting means (for example, the guide passage 2265, the upstream passage 2325, and the downstream passage 2335),
An abnormality determination unit that performs abnormality determination based on the determination result of the first determination unit and the determination result of the second determination unit (function of executing step S2603 of error determination processing in the MPU 2611 of the main controller 2162) is provided. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature C19, when the game ball guided by the guide passage is detected by the first detection means and the second detection means, detection signals are output from the first detection means and the second detection means, and the respective detections are performed. Determination by each determination means is performed based on the signal. Then, by detecting an abnormality based on the determination result by the first determination unit and the determination result by the second determination unit (for example, by comparison), the occurrence of an abnormality of the detection signal (for example, mixing of noise or the like) is found. Can do. Thereby, for example, it can suppress that a privilege is given unfairly with respect to a player based on an incorrect determination result, and can contribute to the guarantee of the soundness of a game.

  The inconveniences described above may occur due to accidental factors or human factors. Assuming a case where noise generated continuously and repeatedly is mixed into the game medium detection signal during the output period of the game medium detection signal as the detection signal, for example, the detection signal is partially converted into a game medium non-detection signal. By switching, one game medium detection signal can be differentiated into a plurality of game medium detection signals. In other words, the presence of noise may change the signal for detecting one game medium as if the passage of a plurality of game media was detected. If such noise is mixed in the detection signal from the first detection means and the detection signal from the second detection means in the same manner, the following inconvenience may occur. That is, it is assumed that the number of game media determined by each determination unit is the same, abnormality determination based on the number of both game media is avoided, and it is difficult to grasp noise by the abnormality determination unit.

  In particular, when the above-described noise is artificially mixed, in order to efficiently perform an illegal act, a plurality of noises are mixed in anticipation of the passing timing of the gaming medium (that is, the output timing of the detection signal), thereby allowing one gaming medium to be mixed. It is assumed that the detection signal corresponding to the passage of the game is differentiated into detection signals of a large number of game media. If it becomes difficult to find such fraudulent acts, damages in game halls and the like can be enormous. In this regard, in this feature, the above-described inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by making the length of the output period of the game medium detection signal output from each detection means different. In other words, when a plurality of noises are mixed in one detection signal as described above, the number of differentiation is likely to be different because the output periods of the detection signals are different. More specifically, when a plurality of noises are repeatedly mixed continuously, the number of detection signals differentiated within the two output periods. Thereby, the number of game media determined to have passed based on each detection signal will be different.

  For this reason, by comparing the determination results by the abnormality determination means, it is possible to suitably find the above-described fraud.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the determination accuracy by suppressing erroneous determination due to noise mixing or the like by the period adjusting unit and the abnormality determining unit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantage due to erroneous detection and contribute to the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

  Note that “determining based on the detection signal output from the detection means” means, for example, whether the signal is a HI level signal or a LOW level when the detection signal is a HI / LOW binary signal. Including “determining abnormality determination based on the determination result of the first determination unit and the determination result of the second determination unit” is the number of times that each determination unit determines that the signal is an HI level signal, This includes performing abnormality determination by comparing the number of times the LOW level signal is output.

Feature D1. A guide passage for guiding the game medium (for example, the lower guide passage portion 3272 and the lower collection passage portion 3321);
A plurality of detection means (detection sensor 3350) for detecting a game medium passing through the guide passage and outputting a predetermined detection signal;
Passage determination means for determining whether or not a game medium has passed through the guide passage based on the detection signals respectively output from the plurality of detection means (step S3201 of signal reading processing in the MPU 3611 of the main controller 3162) A function of executing step S3215);
An abnormality determination means (function to execute step S3216 of signal reading processing in the MPU 3611 of the main control device 3162) that performs abnormality determination based on the determination result of each detection signal by the passage determination means;
The plurality of detecting means change an alternating current of a high-frequency signal having a predetermined frequency either when the game medium passes or when the game medium does not pass due to an impedance change of a detection unit (detection circuit 3670) when the game medium passes. Attenuating and generating a game medium detection and game medium non-detection signal as the predetermined detection signal based on the attenuation of the AC change,
As the plurality of detection means, a first detection means (first detection sensor 3350A) that generates a game medium detection signal by attenuating an AC change in the high-frequency signal when the game medium passes, and a non- A gaming machine comprising: second detection means (second detection sensor 3350B) that generates a game medium non-detection signal by attenuating the AC change of the high-frequency signal when passing.

  According to the feature D1, when the game medium passes through the guide passage, a signal for detecting the game medium is individually output from the first detection means and the second detection means, and a passage determination by the passage determination means is performed based on these signals. . Detection accuracy is improved by performing abnormality determination based on the result of passage determination based on the detection signal output from the first detection means and the result of passage determination based on the detection signal output from the second detection means. be able to.

  The first detection means generates a game medium detection signal so as to attenuate the AC change of the high-frequency signal when the game medium passes. For this reason, the detection signal output from the first detection means is easily affected by noise when the game medium passes, but the influence of noise is suppressed when the game medium does not pass. On the other hand, the second detection means generates a game medium non-detection signal by attenuating the AC change of the high-frequency signal when the game medium does not pass. For this reason, the detection signal output from the second detection means is easily affected by noise when the game medium is not passed, but the influence of noise is suppressed when the game medium passes. By adopting a configuration in which detection means of different detection methods are used together in this way, it is possible to make the influence of noise detection in each detection signal different. In other words, when noise is mixed, the detection signal of one detection means is allowed to be affected by noise, and the detection signal of the other detection means is suppressed to reduce the influence of noise, resulting in a difference in the determination result by the passage determination means. Can be generated. This makes it possible to detect that an abnormality has occurred in the detection signal due to factors such as noise mixing, and further improvement in the detection accuracy described above can be expected.

  The technical ideas shown in the features B1 to B10 can be applied to this feature. For example, when the “abnormality monitoring unit” shown in the feature B1 has the “abnormality determination unit” shown in this feature and the “abnormality monitoring unit is in the monitoring state”, “the detection signal of each detection signal by the passage determination unit” It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an abnormality determination is performed based on the determination result.

Feature D2. The detection unit attenuates the high-frequency signal output from the oscillation unit (oscillation circuit 3660) either when the game medium passes or when it does not pass,
The first detection means includes, as the detection unit, a first detection unit (detection circuit 3670A) that attenuates an AC change of the high-frequency signal when the game medium passes through.
The feature D1 is characterized in that the second detection means has, as the detection unit, a second detection unit (detection circuit 3670B) for attenuating an AC change of the high-frequency signal when the game medium is not passed. The gaming machine described.

  As shown in this feature, the first detection unit that attenuates the AC change of the high-frequency signal output from the oscillation unit (high-frequency output unit) when the game medium passes, and the AC change of the high-frequency signal when the game medium does not pass By adopting the second detection unit to be attenuated, the configuration shown in the feature D1 can be suitably realized.

Feature D3. The first detection means and the second detection means are connected to the detection coil as the first detection section and the second detection section, and a detection coil (detection coil 3364) disposed in proximity to the place where the game medium passes. Each having a resonant circuit having a capacitor (capacitor 3671),
The first detection means is configured such that, when the game medium passes, the difference in the resonance frequency of the resonance circuit with respect to the frequency of the high-frequency signal is larger than the non-passage of the game medium, thereby causing an AC change of the high-frequency signal. Is to attenuate,
The second detection means is configured such that, when the game medium is not passing, the difference in the resonance frequency of the resonance circuit with respect to the frequency of the high-frequency signal is larger than that when the game medium is passing, so The game machine according to Feature D2, characterized in that the game machine is attenuated.

  Assuming that high-frequency noise of the same frequency as the high-frequency signal is mixed, and that the mixing of the noise occurs when the game medium passes through the position where the game medium is detected by each detection means (when passing). In the first detection means, a change in the high-frequency signal that does not naturally occur when the game medium passes through (a pseudo-amplification of an AC change in the high-frequency signal) occurs. Further, assuming that the mixing of the noise occurs when the game medium does not pass through the detected position (when the game medium is not passing), the second detection means does not have a flaw that originally occurs when the game medium does not pass. A change in the high-frequency signal (a pseudo amplification of the AC change in the high-frequency signal) occurs. In other words, in both cases where the game medium passes and does not pass, only one of the first detection means and the second detection means causes a change in the high-frequency signal that does not originally occur, and is detected accordingly. Since the output mode of the signal changes, a suitable abnormality determination can be performed. Thereby, the misjudgment of game media passage resulting from noise etc. can be suppressed.

  Feature D4. The game machine according to Feature D3, wherein the first detection means and the second detection means are different from each other in at least one of the number of turns of the detection coil and the capacitance value of the capacitor in the resonance circuit.

  By adopting the configuration shown in the feature D4, the configuration shown in the feature D2 can be suitably realized.

  As shown in this feature, when the first detection means and the second detection means adopt a configuration in which the number of turns of the coil and the capacitance value of the capacitor are different, an AC change (for example, frequency) of the high-frequency signal oscillated from the oscillation unit ), And can contribute to the realization and common use of the oscillation unit.

  In order to enjoy the above effect, it is sufficient that the inductance of the coil of each resonance circuit is different at least when the game medium is not passed (initial time), and a method other than making the number of turns of the coil different is adopted. Is also possible. However, it is preferable to adopt the configuration shown in this feature if it is desired to realize smooth guidance of the game medium in the guide passage while ensuring a certain sensitivity by the detection means.

Feature D5. The first detection unit and the second detection unit each include an oscillation unit (oscillation circuit 3660) that generates and outputs the high-frequency signal.
The high-frequency signal output from the first oscillating unit provided in the first detection means and the high-frequency signal output from the second oscillating unit provided in the second detection means have different oscillation frequencies. The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein:

  By adopting the configuration shown in the feature D5, the configuration shown in the feature D2 can be suitably realized.

  In addition, as shown in this characteristic, each detection means has a configuration having an oscillation unit individually, which can contribute to an improvement in the degree of freedom of arrangement of each detection means.

Feature D6. The first detection means includes, as the detection unit, an oscillation circuit having an oscillation coil disposed close to a passage location of the game medium and a capacitor connected to the oscillation coil, and the passage of the game medium At the time, by suppressing the oscillation in the oscillation circuit, to attenuate the AC change of the high-frequency signal,
The second detection means includes, as the detection unit, a resonance circuit having a detection coil disposed close to a passage location of the game medium and a capacitor connected to the detection coil, and when the game medium is not passed The feature D1 is characterized in that an AC change of the high-frequency signal is attenuated by increasing a difference in a resonance frequency of the resonance circuit with respect to a frequency of the high-frequency signal as compared to when the game medium passes. Game machines.

  According to the feature D6, when the game medium passes, the oscillation condition in the oscillation circuit changes due to the game medium passing by the oscillation coil, the amplitude of the high frequency signal is reduced, and the AC change of the high frequency signal is attenuated. It will be. Thereby, a game medium detection signal is output from the first detection means. Further, when the game medium passes by the detection coil, the resonance frequency in the resonance circuit changes, and the difference in the resonance frequency of the resonance circuit with respect to the frequency of the high-frequency signal increases, and the AC change of the high-frequency signal is attenuated. As a result, a game medium detection signal is output from the second detection means. By adopting such different types of detection means, the configuration shown in the feature D1 can be suitably realized.

  Feature D7. In the guide passage, the first detection means detects the passage of the game medium on one of two detection positions that are upstream and downstream of each other, and the second detection means detects the passage of the game medium on the other side. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the gaming machine is detected.

  By setting a certain amount of room for the passage width or the like in the guide passage, it becomes possible to smoothly guide the game medium. However, such a clearance setting can be a factor that causes the flow path of the game medium to vary. Further, when flowing down the guide passage in a state where a plurality of game media are connected, it is necessary to output a corresponding detection signal for each of the game media. Therefore, by adopting a high-frequency oscillation type (using a magnetic field) detection means, it is possible to identify individual game media flowing down in a row while allowing play in the guide passage.

  When such a high-frequency oscillation type detection means is employed, it is not preferable that the detection means interfere with each other when the game medium is detected. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the game medium is detected at different positions in the guide path by each detection means, the above-described mutual interference can be suppressed and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature D8. Provided with a privilege granting means (for example, a function of executing step S3501 of normal processing in the MPU 3611 of the main control device 3162) for granting a privilege to the player when a game medium passes through the guide passage;
The privilege granting unit grants the privilege based on a game medium passage determination result based on a detection signal of the first detection unit out of a game medium passage determination result based on each detection signal from the plurality of detection units. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

  In the first detection means, the AC change of the high-frequency signal is held except when the actual game medium passes, so even if high-frequency noise is mixed, the AC change of the high-frequency signal is not affected. Therefore, it is possible to suppress erroneous determination of game medium passage during a period other than when the game medium passes. During gaming, the latter is a significantly longer period compared to the detection period in which the passage of the game medium is detected and the other non-detection periods. It is considered that noise is mixed in a period other than the time when the game medium passes and an erroneous determination of game medium passing due to the mixed noise is caused. In this regard, according to this feature, it is possible to suppress misjudgment of passing the game medium during the non-detection period of the game medium, and to prevent unauthorized privilege grant during the same period.

  In addition, when applying each technical idea shown to the characteristic B1 thru | or the characteristic B10 to this characteristic, it is also possible to do as follows. That is, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the passage determination based on the detection signal from the second detection unit and the comparison of the passage determination result are not performed when “the abnormality monitoring unit is in the non-monitoring state”.

Feature D9. The first detection means detects the passage of the game medium at the upstream detection position among the two detection positions that are upstream and downstream in the guide passage,
The game machine according to Feature D8, wherein the second detection means detects passage of the game medium at the detection position on the downstream side.

  When the detection accuracy is improved by adopting a configuration having a plurality of detection means, it is not preferable that the responsiveness is lowered. In this regard, according to the present feature, by arranging the detection position by the first detection means related to the privilege grant upstream from the detection position by the second detection means, the game medium flows into the guide passage, The time lag until privilege grant is performed can be reduced. Thereby, the improvement of the detection accuracy resulting from it can be suppressed while improving the detection accuracy.

Feature D10. In the case where the passage determination of the game medium is made based on the detection signal of the first detection means and the case where the passage determination of the game medium is made based on the detection signal of the second detection means, either one of the results is determined as the passage determination result. The difference value calculating means (mainly) that adds the detected number of gaming media based on the detected number difference counter (check counter CC) and subtracts the detected number of gaming media based on the passage determination result from the detected number difference counter. A function of executing steps S3205 and S3213 of signal reading processing in the MPU 3611 of the control device 3162;
The abnormality determination unit compares the detection results of the first detection unit and the second detection unit based on a change amount from an initial value of the detection number difference counter, and performs the abnormality determination. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9.

  When there is no mixing of noise or the like and the passage determination based on the detection signal from each detection means is normally performed, the number of detected game media determined to pass based on the detection signal from the first detection means And the number of detected game media determined to pass based on the detection signal from the second detection means match. For this reason, the value of the detection difference counter temporarily increases or decreases, but is kept at the same value as the initial value (a value preset in the detection difference counter). On the other hand, when noise or the like is mixed in the detection signal, the number of detections is different, and the value of the detection difference counter remains out of the initial value. By comparing the value of the detection difference counter with the initial value of the counter and executing the abnormality determination, the detection accuracy improvement effect shown in the feature D1 and the like can be enjoyed suitably.

  In particular, as shown in the feature D9, when the detection units are arranged on the upstream side and the downstream side, a time lag occurs in the passage detection at each detection position. For this reason, for example, when comparing the determination results at that time at the same timing, it may be difficult to improve the reliability of the abnormality determination. In this respect, if the counter is used for comparison with the initial value as shown in this feature, the time lag can be allowed and the reliability of abnormality determination can be improved.

  Moreover, it is possible to collectively handle the determination results by the respective determination means by one storage means. Thereby, complication of the structure accompanying improvement in detection accuracy can be suppressed.

Feature D11. A guide passage for guiding the game medium (for example, the lower guide passage portion 3272 and the lower collection passage portion 3321);
A plurality of detection means (detection sensor 3350) for detecting a game medium passing through the guide passage and outputting a predetermined detection signal;
Passage determination means for determining whether or not a game medium has passed through the guide passage based on the detection signals output from the plurality of detection means (steps S3201 to S3201 of signal reading processing in the MPU 3611 of the main controller 3162) The function of executing S3215),
An abnormality determination means (function of executing step S3216 of signal reading processing in the MPU 3611 of the main control device 3162) for performing abnormality determination based on the determination result of each detection signal by the determination means;
As the plurality of detection means, an AC change of a high-frequency signal having a predetermined frequency is detected either when the game medium passes or when the game medium passes due to impedance change of a detection unit (detection circuit 3670) when the game medium passes. And a first detection means for generating a game medium detection signal as the detection signal based on the output of the high-frequency detection unit, and without the high-frequency detection unit. A gaming machine comprising: second detection means for generating a game medium detection signal as the detection signal by detecting passage of a medium.

  According to the feature D11, when the game medium passes through the guide passage, a signal for detecting the game medium is individually output from the first detection means and the second detection means, and a passage determination by the passage determination means is performed based on these signals. . Detection accuracy is improved by performing abnormality determination based on the result of passage determination based on the detection signal output from the first detection means and the result of passage determination based on the detection signal output from the second detection means. be able to.

  The first detection means generates a game medium detection signal so as to attenuate the AC change of the high-frequency signal when the game medium passes. For this reason, the detection signal output from the first detection means is easily affected by noise when the game medium passes, but the influence of noise is suppressed when the game medium does not pass. On the other hand, since the second detection means does not include a high-frequency detection unit, it is possible to suppress the influence of high-frequency noise on the detection signal generated by the second detection means. In other words, when noise is mixed, the detection signal of one detection means is allowed to be affected by noise, and the detection signal of the other detection means is suppressed to reduce the influence of noise, resulting in a difference in the determination result by the passage determination means. Can be generated. This makes it possible to detect that an abnormality has occurred in the detection signal due to factors such as noise mixing, and further improvement in the detection accuracy described above can be expected.

  If the detection signal is determined to be abnormal by the abnormality determination unit, for example, a notification unit (error display lamp unit 27) or the like may be used to notify the fact to the hall manager or the like. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage due to a signal abnormality, and it is possible to contribute to the early resolution of the abnormality.

Feature D12. The first detection means and the second detection means are proximity sensors that detect that a game medium is approaching,
The second detection means is an optical proximity sensor that does not use a change in magnetic field for detection of a game medium, and outputs a binary signal that is different between when the game medium passes and when it does not pass. The gaming machine according to Feature D11, which is characterized.

  According to the feature D12, the first detection unit is a high-frequency oscillation type proximity sensor, and the second detection unit is an optical proximity sensor, whereby mutual interference between both detection units (specifically, detection signals) can be suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to detect the passage of the game medium at the same position in the guide passage. If it is possible to align the detection positions in this way, it is possible to align the timing at which the detection signal is output from each detection unit, in other words, the timing at which the passage determination by each determination unit is executed. In this case, it is possible to eliminate the time lag that occurs in the passage determination by each determination means, and it is possible to improve the responsiveness of the abnormality determination when there is an abnormality in the detection signal.

Feature D13. When a game medium passes through the guide passage, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player (for example, a function of executing step S3501 of normal processing in the MPU 3611 of the main control device 3162) is provided.
The privilege granting unit grants the privilege based on a game medium passage determination result based on a detection signal of the first detection unit out of a game medium passage determination result based on each detection signal from the plurality of detection units. The gaming machine according to Feature D11 or Feature D12, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

  According to the feature D13, the presence / absence of privilege provision depends on the detection signal from the first detection means. Compared to optical sensors, the high-frequency oscillation type sensor has an improved tolerance level for the passage width and the like in the guide passage (variation in the flow path of the game media) and a plurality of game media flowing down. It is excellent in that it is easy to improve the identification ability of individual game media. That is, the effect of improving the detection accuracy of game media is remarkable. A practically preferable configuration can be realized by utilizing this high-frequency oscillation type sensor for granting a privilege. Note that an optical sensor may be employed as the second detection means and used for comparison of the passage determination result (that is, for error check).

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko machine: operation means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by a player, game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the fired A ball path (guidance rail 100) for guiding a game ball to a predetermined game area and game parts (nails 88, etc.) arranged in the game area, and a predetermined passing portion (general prize) among these game parts A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through the mouth 81 or the like.

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 1082 ... Variable winning device, 1162 ... Main control device, 1265 ... Guidance passage constituting guide passage, 1270 ... Opening / closing door as variable means, 1325 ... Upstream passage constituting guide passage 1335 ... downstream passage, 1350 ... detection sensor as game medium detection means, 1611 ... MPU, DE ... detection area as game medium detection position, PE ... game area.

Claims (1)

A guide passage for guiding game media;
Game medium detection means for detecting a game medium passing through a game medium detection position in the guide passage and outputting a predetermined detection signal;
Passage determination means for determining whether or not a game medium has passed through the game medium detection position based on the detection signal;
Means for executing a predetermined process based on the determination result when the passage determination means determines that the game medium has passed through the gaming medium detection position;
It is possible to switch to a first state in which it is difficult or impossible to move the game medium to the game medium detection position, and a second state in which it is easier to move the game medium to the game medium detection position than the first state. A variable means,
Control means for continuing the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied after the variable means is switched from the first state to the second state, and switching to the first state when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
An abnormality monitoring means capable of switching to a monitoring state for monitoring an abnormality relating to the detection signal and a non-monitoring state not monitoring the abnormality;
Switching means for switching the abnormality monitoring means from the non-monitoring state to the monitoring state after the variable means is switched to the second state;
The control means satisfies the predetermined condition when the determination result based on determination by the passage determination means that the game medium has passed the game medium detection position reaches a predetermined number, and the variable Switching means from the second state to the first state;
The switching means is a specific condition in which the determination result based on determining that the passage determination means has passed the game medium detection position after the variable means is switched to the second state is halfway reaching the predetermined number. Or the predetermined number is reached, the abnormality monitoring means is switched from the non-monitoring state to the monitoring state.

Images